AVy Lift Eng - 2 PDF

ARTDriveL
Lift Vector AC Drives
ARTDriveL AVy...-...-AC
AVy...-...-AC4
AVy...-...-BR
AVy...-...-BR4
...... Instruction Manual

Thank you for choosing this Gefran-Siei product.
We will be glad to receive any possible information which could help us
improving this manual. The e-mail address is the following: [email protected].
Before using the product, read the safety instruction section carefully.
Keep the manual in a safe place and available to engineering and installation
personnel during the product functioning period.
Gefran spa has the right to modify products, data and dimensions without notice.
The data can only be used for the product description and they can not be
understood as legally stated properties.
All rights reserved
This manual is updated according to software version 3.6XX and RV33-4NV

regulation card.
The identification number of the software version can be read on the inverter
nameplate or on the label on the FLASH memories mounted on the regulation
card.
Table of Contents
Safety Symbol Legend - Precautions de securit ............................................................ 6
Chapter 0 - Safety Precautions ........................................................................................ 7
Chapter 1 - Functions and General Features ................................................................. 13
1.1 Drive ......................................................................................................................................... 13
1.2 Motors ..................................................................................................................................... 15
Chapter 2 - Inspection procedures, Components Identification and Standard
Specifications ............................................................................................... 17
2.1 Upon Delivery Inspection Procedures ...................................................................................... 17
2.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................... 17
2.1.2 Inverter type designation ....................................................................................................................... 17
2.1.3 Nameplate .............................................................................................................................................. 18
Figure 2.1.3.1: Identification nameplate .................................................................................................... 18
Figure 2.1.3.2: Firmware & Card revision level nameplate ........................................................................ 18
Figure 2.1.3.3: Nameplates position .......................................................................................................... 18
2.2 Component Identification ......................................................................................................... 19
Figure 2.2.1: Basic Setup of Frequency Inverter ....................................................................................... 19
2.3 Standard Specifications ........................................................................................................... 20
2.3.1 Permissible Environmental Conditions ................................................................................................... 20
Disposal of the Device ..................................................................................................................................... 21
2.3.2 AC Input/Output Connection .................................................................................................................. 21
2.3.3 AC Input ................................................................................................................................................. 21
2.3.4 AC Output ............................................................................................................................................... 21
Figure 2.3.4.1: Rating of Drive in Function of Switching Frequency .......................................................... 22
Table 2.3.4.1: AC Input/Output Specifications ........................................................................................... 23
Table 2.3.4.2-A: Overload Capability (Sizes 1007 ... 4370) ....................................................................... 24
Table 2.3.4.2-B: Overload Capability (Sizes 5450... 81600) ...................................................................... 25
2.3.6 Accuracy ................................................................................................................................................ 26
Table 2.3.6.1: Maximum / Minimum Output Frequency ............................................................................. 26
2.3.5 I/O and Encoder Specifications .............................................................................................................. 26
Table 2.3.6.4: Torque Specifications .......................................................................................................... 27
Table 2.3.6.2: Speed Reference / Feedback Resolution and Maximum Limits ........................................... 27
Table 2.3.6.3: Speed Regulator Bandwidth ............................................................................................... 27
Chapter 3 - Mechanical Installation Guidelines ............................................................. 28
3.1 Dimensions and Mounting Methods ........................................................................................ 28
Figure 3.1.1: Drive Dimensions (Sizes 1007 ... 3150) ................................................................................ 28
Figure 3.1.2: Mounting Methods (Sizes 1007 ... 3150) ............................................................................ 28
Table 3.1.1: Drive Dimensions and Weights (Sizes 1007 ... 3150) .......................................................... 29
Figure 3.1.3: Drive Dimensions (Sizes 4220 ... 81600) .............................................................................. 29
Figure 3.1.4: Mounting Methods (Sizes 4220 ... 81600) ........................................................................... 30
Table 3.1.2: Drive Dimensions and Weights (Sizes 4220 ... 81600) ......................................................... 30
Figure 3.1.5: Keypad Positioning ............................................................................................................... 30
3.2 Watts Loss, Heat Dissipation, Internal Fans and Minimum Cabinet Opening Suggested for the
Cooling ................................................................................................................................... 31
Table 3.2.1: Heat Dissipation and Required Air Flow ................................................................................. 31
Table 3.2.2: Minimum Cabinet Opening Suggested for the Cooling ........................................................... 31
3.2.1 Cooling Fans Power Supply .................................................................................................................... 32
Figure 3.2.1: UL Type Fans Connections on AVy7900, AVy71100 and AVy71320 Sizes ............................ 32
ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Table of Contents 3

Figure 3.2.2: UL Type Fans Connections on AVy6750 and AVy81600 Sizes .............................................. 32
Figure 3.2.3: Example for External Connection .......................................................................................... 33
3.3 Installation Mounting Clearance .............................................................................................. 34
Figure 3.3.1: Max. Angle of Inclination ..................................................................................................... 34
Figure 3.3.2: Mounting Clearance ............................................................................................................. 34
Chapter 4 - Wiring Procedure ........................................................................................ 35
4.1 Accessing the Connectors ....................................................................................................... 35
4.1.1 Removing the Covers ............................................................................................................................. 35
Figure 4.1.1: Removing the Covers (Sizes 1007 to 3150) .......................................................................... 35
Figure 4.1.2: Removing the Covers (Sizes 4185 to 81600) ........................................................................ 36
4.2 Power Section .......................................................................................................................... 36
4.2.1 Terminal Assignment on Power Section / Cable Cross-Section ............................................................. 37
Table 4.2.1.1: Power Section Terminals from 1007 to 3150 ...................................................................... 37
Table 4.2.1.2: Power Section Terminals from 4185 to 81600 .................................................................... 37
Table 4.2.1.3: Maximum Cable Cross Section for Power Terminals ......................................................... 38
Table 4.2.1.4: Maximum Permissible Cable Cross-section on the Plug-in Terminals of the Regulator Section
.................................................................................................................................................................. 39
Table 4.2.1.5: Maximum Control Cable Lengths ........................................................................................ 39
4.3 Regulation Section ................................................................................................................... 40
4.3.1 RV33-4NV Regulation Card Switch & Jumpers ...................................................................................... 40
Table 4.3.1.1: LEDs & Test points on Regulation Card ............................................................................... 40
Table 4.3.1.2: Jumpers and dip-switches on Regulation Card RV33 ......................................................... 41
4.3.2 Terminal Assignments on Regulation Section ........................................................................................ 42
Table 4.3.2.1: Plug-in Terminal Strip Assignments .................................................................................... 42
4.4 Potentials of the Control Section .............................................................................................. 43
Figure 4.4.1-A: Potentials of the control section, Digital I/O NPN connection ........................................... 43
Figure 4.4.1-B: Potentials of the control section, Digital I/O PNP connection ........................................... 44
4.5 Encoders ................................................................................................................................................... 45
Table 4.5.1: Recommended Cable Section and Length for the Connection of Encoders ............................ 46
Table 4.5.2: Encoders Setting via S11...S23 Jumpers ............................................................................... 46
Table 4.5.3: Encoders Connections ........................................................................................................... 46
Table 4.5.4: Assignment of the High Density XE Connector for a Sinusoidal or a Digital Encoder ............. 49
4.5.1 XFR Connector Assignments (on optional EXP-RES Expansion Board for Resolver) .............................. 49
4.5.2 Encoder Simulation ............................................................................................................................. 50
4.5.3 XE1/XE Connector Assignments (on RV33-4NV and optional EXP-ABS-AVy cards) .............................. 50
4.6 Connection Diagrams ............................................................................................................... 52
Figure 4.6.1: Standard Connection Diagram .............................................................................................. 52
4.6.1 Expansion Card Connection ................................................................................................................... 53
Figure 4.6.2: Common Output Contactors Management ........................................................................... 53
Figure 4.6.3: Separate Output Contactors Management ........................................................................... 54
4.7 Circuit Protection ..................................................................................................................... 55
4.7.1 External Fuses for the Power Section .................................................................................................... 55
Table 4.7.1.1: External Fuse Types for AC Input Side ................................................................................. 55
4.7.2 External Fuses for the Power Section DC Input Side ............................................................................. 56
Table 4.7.2.1: External Fuses Type for DC Input Side ................................................................................ 56
4.7.3 Internal Fuses ......................................................................................................................................... 56
Table 4.7.3.1: Internal Fuses ..................................................................................................................... 56
4.8 Chokes / Filters ........................................................................................................................ 57
4.8.1 AC Input Chokes ..................................................................................................................................... 57
Table 4.8.1.1: 3-Phase AC Input Chokes .................................................................................................. 57
4.8.2 Output Chokes ........................................................................................................................................ 57
Table 4.8.2.1: Recommended Output Chokes ............................................................................................ 58
4 Table of Contents ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

4.8.3 Interference Suppression Filters ............................................................................................................. 58
4.9. Braking Units .......................................................................................................................... 59
Figure 4.9.1: Operation with Braking Unit (Principle) ................................................................................ 59
4.9.1 Internal Braking Unit ............................................................................................................................... 59
Figure 4.9.1.1: Connection with Internal Braking Unit and External Braking Resistor ............................... 59
4.9.2 External Braking Resistor ....................................................................................................................... 60
Table 4.9.2.1: Lists and Technical Data of the External Standard Resistors .............................................. 60
Figure 4.9.2.2: Limit Operating Braking Cycle with Typical Triangular Power Profile ................................. 60
Figure 4.9.2.3: Braking Cycle with TBR / TC = 20% ................................................................................. 61
Figure 4.9.2.4: Generic Braking Cycle with Triangular Profile ................................................................... 62
Table 4.9.2.2: Braking Thresholds for Different Mains .............................................................................. 63
Table 4.9.2.3: Technical Data of the Internal Braking Units ....................................................................... 63
4.10 Buffering the Regulator Supply .............................................................................................. 64
Table 4.10.1: DC Link Buffer Time ............................................................................................................ 64
Figure 4.10.1: Buffering the Regulator Supply by Means of Additional Intermediate Circuit Capacitors ... 65
4.11 Discharge Time of the DC-Link ............................................................................................... 66
Table 4.11.1: DC Link Discharge Time ...................................................................................................... 66
Chapter 5 - Serial Interface Description ........................................................................ 67
Figure 5.1: RS485 Serial Interface ............................................................................................................ 67
5.1 RS 485 Serial Interface Connector Description ........................................................................ 68
Table 5.1.1: Assignment of the Plug XS Connector for the RS 485 Serial Interface .................................. 68
Chapter 6 - Keypad Operation ........................................................................................ 69
6.1 LEDs & Keys ............................................................................................................................. 69
6.2 Moving Inside a Menu ............................................................................................................. 71
6.3 Using Keypad Help ................................................................................................................... 71
6.4 Drive Main Menu ..................................................................................................................... 72
Chapter 7 - Commissioning via Keypad ......................................................................... 73
7.1 Commissioning for AVy...AC / AC4 (Asychronous Motors) ..................................................... 73
7.1.1 Field Oriented mode ............................................................................................................................... 75
7.1.2 Sensorless vector mode ......................................................................................................................... 85
7.1.3 V/f Control mode .................................................................................................................................... 86
7.2 Commissioning for AVy...BR / BR4 (Brushless Motors) ........................................................... 99
Chapter 8 - Lift Sequencies .......................................................................................... 115
Figure 8.1: Standard Commands Sequence ............................................................................................ 116
Figure 8.2: Detail Starting ....................................................................................................................... 117
Figure 8.3: Detail Stopping ...................................................................................................................... 118
Figure 8.4: Relation between Direction Commands and Contactor Control Signals ................................ 119
Figure 8.5:Short floor function ................................................................................................................. 120
Chapter 9 - Parameter .................................................................................................. 121
9.1 Parameter Legend .................................................................................................................. 121
9.2 Parameter Description ........................................................................................................... 122
Chapter 10 - Troubleshooting ....................................................................................... 206
Figure 10.1: Led Status and Keypad ........................................................................................................ 206
10.1 List of Regulation Alarm Events ........................................................................................... 207
Table 10.1.1 Regulation Alarm Events ..................................................................................................... 208
10.2 List of Configuration and DataBase Error Alarm Events ....................................................... 210
10.2.1 Configuration Errors ........................................................................................................................... 210
10.2.2 Database Errors (DB Errors) ............................................................................................................... 211
ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Table of Contents 5

10.2.3 List of Error Codes for All Autotune Procedures ................................................................................. 213
Table 10.2.3.1: Error Messages from Autotune Procedures .................................................................... 213
Chapter 11 - EMC Directive .......................................................................................... 214
Chapter 12 -Parameters Index ..................................................................................... 215
IPAs ............................................................................................................................... 215
Safety Symbol Legend - Precautions de securit
Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that, if not strictly

observed, could result in personal injury or death.
Indique le mode d'utilisation, la procdure et la condition d'exploitation.
Warning
Si ces consignes ne sont pas strictement respectes, il y a des risques de
blessures corporelles ou de mort.
Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that, if not strictly

observed, could result in damage to or destruction of equipment.
Caution
Indique et le mode d'utilisation, la procdure et la condition
d'exploitation. Si ces consignes ne sont pas strictement respectes, il y a
des risques de dtrioration ou de destruction des appareils
Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that should be be

strictly followed in order to optimize these applications.
Indique le mode d'utilisation, la procdure et la condition d'exploitation.
Attention Ces consignes doivent tre rigoureusement respectes pour optimiser ces
applications..
NOTE! Indicates an essential or important procedure, condition, or statement.

Indique un mode d'utilisation, de procdure et de condition d'exploitation
essentiels ou importants
6 Chapter 0 Safety Precautions ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

Chapter 0 - Safety Precautions
According to the EEC standards the ARTDriveL and accessories must

be used only after checking that the machine has been produced using
those safety devices required by the 89/392/EEC set of rules, as far as
the machine industry is concerned. These standards do not apply in
the Americas, but may need to be considered in equipment being
shipped to Europe.
Drive systems cause mechanical motion. It is the responsibility of the
user to insure that any such motion does not result in an unsafe con-
dition. Factory provided interlocks and operating limits should not
be bypassed or modified.
Selon les normes EEC, les drives ARTDRiveL et leurs accessoires doivent
tre employs seulement aprs avoir verifi que la machine ait t produit
avec les mme dispositifs de scurit demands par la rglementation
89/392/EEC concernant le secteur de lindustrie.
Les systmes provoquent des mouvements mcaniques. Lutilisateur est
responsable de la scurit concernant les mouvements mcaniques. Les
dispositifs de scurit prvues par lusine et les limitations operationelles
ne doivent tre dpasss ou modifis.
Electrical Shock and Burn Hazard:

When using instruments such as oscilloscopes to work on live equip-
ment, the oscilloscopes chassis should be grounded and a differential
Warning
amplifier input should be used. Care should be used in the selection of
probes and leads and in the adjustment of the oscilloscope so that accu-
rate readings may be made. See instrument manufacturers instruction
book for proper operation and adjustments to the instrument.
Dcharge lectrique et Risque de Brlure :
Lors de lutilisation dinstruments (par example oscilloscope) sur des
systmes en marche, le chassis de loscilloscope doit tre reli la terre
et un amplificateur diffrentiel devrait tre utilis en entre.
Les sondes et conducteurs doivent tre choissis avec soin pour effectuer
les meilleures mesures laide dun oscilloscope. Voir le manuel
dinstruction pour une utilisation correcte des instruments.
Fire and Explosion Hazard:

Fires or explosions might result from mounting Drives in hazardous
areas such as locations where flammable or combustible vapors or
dusts are present. Drives should be installed away from hazardous
areas, even if used with motors suitable for use in these locations.
Risque dincendies et dexplosions:
Lutilisation des drives dans des znes risques (prsence de vapeurs ou
de poussires inflammables), peut provoquer des incendies ou des explo-
sions. Les drives doivent tre installs loin des znes dangeureuses, et
quips de moteurs appropris.
ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Chapter 0 Safety Precautions 7

Strain Hazard:
Improper lifting practices can cause serious or fatal injury. Lift only
with adequate equipment and trained personnel.
Attention llvation:
Une lvation inapproprie peut causer des dommages srieux ou fatals.
Il doit tre lev seulement avec des moyens appropris et par du person-
nel qualifi.
Drives and motors must be ground connected according to the NEC.

Tous les moteurs et les drives doivent tre mis la terre selon le Code
Electrique National ou quivalent.
Replace all covers before applying power to the Drive. Failure to do

so may result in death or serious injury.
Remettre tous les capots avant de mettre sous tension le drive. Des erreurs
peuvent provoquer de srieux accidents ou mme la mort.
Adjustable frequency drives are electrical apparatus for use in indus-

trial installations. Parts of the Drives are energized during operation.
The electrical installation and the opening of the device should there-
fore only be carried out by qualified personnel. Improper installation
of motors or Drives may therefore cause the failure of the device as well
Warning as serious injury to persons or material damage.
Drive is not equipped with motor overspeed protection logic other than
that controlled by software.Follow the instructions given in this manual
and observe the local and national safety regulations applicable.
Les drives frquence variable sont des dispositifs lectriques utiliss
dans des installations industriels. Une partie des drives sont sous ten-
sion pendant loperation. Linstallation lectrique et louverture des drives
devrait tre execut uniquement par du personel qualifi. De mauvaises
installations de moteurs ou de drives peuvent provoquer des dommages
materiels ou blesser des personnes.On doit suivir les instructions donnes
dans ce manuel et observer les rgles nationales de scurit.
Always connect the Drive to the protective ground (PE) via the marked
connection terminals (PE2) and the housing (PE1). AC Input filters
have ground discharge currents greater than 3.5 mA. EN 50178 speci-
fies that with discharge currents greater than 3.5 mA the protective
conductor ground connection (PE1) must be fixed type and doubled
for redundancy.
Il faut toujours connecter le variateur la terre (PE) par les des bornes
(PE2) et le chssis (PE1). Le courant de dispersion vers la terre est
suprieur 3,5 mA sur les filtres courant altern (CA). Les normes EN
50178 spcifient qu'en cas de courant de dispersion vers la terre, suprieur
3,5 ma, la mise la terre (PE1) doit avoir une double connexion pour
la redondance.

The drive may cause accidental motion in the event of a failure, even
if it is disabled, unless it has been disconnected from the AC input
feeder.
En cas de panne, le variateur peut causer une mise en marche accidentelle,
mme s'il est dsactiv, sauf s'il a t dbranch de l'alimentateur
courant altern.
Never open the device or covers while the AC Input power supply is
switched on. Minimum time to wait before working on the terminals
or inside the device is listed in section 4.12 on Instruction manual .
Ne jamais ouvrir lappareil lorsquil est suns tension. Le temps mini-
mum dattente avant de pouvoir travailler sur les bornes ou bien
lintrieur de lappareil est indiqu dans la section 4.12.
If the front plate has to be removed because of ambient temperature

higher than 40 degrees, the user has to ensure that no occasional
contact with live parts may occur.
Si la plaque frontale doit tre enleve pour un fonctionnement avec la
temprature de lenvironnement plus haute que 40C, lutilisateur doit
sassurer, par des moyens opportuns, quaucun contact occasionnel ne
puisse arriver avec les parties sous tension.
Do not connect power supply voltage that exceeds the standard speci-
fication voltage fluctuation permissible. If excessive voltage is ap-
Warning
plied to the Drive, damage to the internal components will result.
Ne pas raccorder de tension dalimentation dpassant la fluctuation de
tension permise par les normes. Dans le cas d une alimentation en ten-
sion excessive, des composants internes peuvent tre endommags.
Power supply and grounding / Attention ! Alimentation puissance et

mise la terre
In case of a three phase supply not symmetrical to ground, an insulation
loss of one of the devices connected to the same network can cause
functional problem to the drive, if the use of a wye/delta transformer is
avoided.
1 The drives are designed to be powered from standard three phase
lines that are electrically symmetrical with respect to ground (TN or
TT network).
2 In case of supply with IT network, the use of wye/delta transformer
is mandatory, with a secondary three phase wiring referred to
ground.
Please refer to the following connection sample.
Si le rseau n'est pas quilibr par rapport la terre et qu'il n'y a pas
de transformateur raingle/toile, une mauvaise isolation d'un appareil
lectrique connect au mme rseau que le variateur peut lui causer

des troubles de fonctionnement.
1 Les variateurs sont prvus pour tre aliments par un rseau
triphas quilibr avec un rgime de neutre standard (TN ou TT).
2 Si le rgime de neutre est IT, nous vous recommendons d'utiliser un
tranformateur triangle/toile avec point milieu ramen la terre
Vous pouvez trouver ci-aprs des exemples de cblage.
W2/T3
W1/L3
U2/T1
U1/L1
V2/T2
V1/L2
PE2/
PE1/
AC OUTPUT
AC Main Supply
AC INPUT
CHOKE
CHOKE
L1
L2
L3
Earth
Safety
ground
All wires (including motor ground) must
be connected inside the motor terminal box
Do not operate the Drive without the ground wire connected. The
motor chassis should be grounded to earth through a ground lead
separate from all other equipment ground leads to prevent noise cou-
pling.
Ne pas faire fonctionner le drive sans prise de terre. Le chassis du moteur
doit tre mis la terre laide dun connecteur de terre separ des autres
pour viter le couplage des perturbations. Le connecteur de terre devrait
tre dimensionn selon la norme NEC ou le Canadian Electrical code.
The grounding connector shall be sized in accordance with the NEC

or Canadian Electrical Code. The connection shall be made by a UL
listed or CSA certified closed-loop terminal connector sized for the
Caution wire gauge involved. The connector is to be fixed using the crimp tool
specified by the connector manufacturer.
Le raccordement devrait tre fait par un connecteur certifi et mentionn
boucle ferm par les normes CSA et UL et dimensionn pour lpaisseur
du cable correspondant. Le connecteur doit tre fix a laide dun instru-
ment de serrage specifi par le producteur du connecteur.
Do not perform a megger test between the Drive terminals or on the

control circuit terminals.
Ne pas excuter un test megger entre les bornes du drive ou entre les
bornes du circuit de contrle.

Because the ambient temperature greatly affects Drive life and reli-
ability, do not install the Drive in any location that exceeds the allow-
able temperature. Leave the ventilation cover attached for tempera-
tures of 104 F (40 C) or below.
tant donn que la temprature ambiante influe sur la vie et la fiabilit
du drive, on ne devrait pas installer le drive dans des places ou la tem-
perature permise est dpasse. Laisser le capot de ventilation en place
pour tempratures de 104F (40C) ou infrieures.
If the Drives Fault Alarm is activated, consult the TROUBLESHOOT-

ING section of this instruction book, and after correcting the problem,
resume operation. Do not reset the alarm automatically by external
sequence, etc.
Si la Fault Alarm du drive est active, consulter la section du manuel concernant
les dfauts et aprs avoir corrig lerreur, reprendre lopration. Ne pas
riniliatiser lalarme automatiquement par une squence externe, etc
Be sure to remove the desicant dryer packet(s) when unpacking the

Drive. (If not removed these packets may become lodged in the fan or
air passages and cause the Drive to overheat).
Lors du dballage du drive, retirer le sachet dshydrat. (Si celui-ci nest
pas retir, il empche la ventilation et provoque une surchauffe du drive).
Caution The Drive must be mounted on a wall that is constructed of heat re-
sistant material. While the Drive is operating, the temperature of the
Drive's cooling fins can rise to a temperature of 194 F (90C).
Le drive doit tre mont sur un mur construit avec des matriaux rsistants
la chaleur. Pendant le fonctionnement du drive, la temprature des
ailettes du dissipateur thermique peut arriver 194F (90).
Do not touch or damage any components when handling the device.

The changing of the isolation gaps or the removing of the isolation
and covers is not permissible.
Manipuler lappareil de faon ne pas toucher ou endommager des
parties. Il nest pas permis de changer les distances disolement ou bien
denlever des matriaux isolants ou des capots.
Protect the device from impermissible environmental conditions (tem-

perature, humidity, shock etc.)
Protger lappareil contre des effets extrieurs non permis (temprature,
humidit, chocs etc.).
No voltage should be connected to the output of the drive (terminals U2, V2

W2). The parallel connection of several drives via the outputs and the direct
connection of the inputs and outputs (bypass) are not permissible.
Aucune tension ne doit tre applique sur la sortie du convertisseur
(bornes U2, V2 et W2). Il nest pas permis de raccorder la sortie de

plusieurs convertisseurs en parallle, ni deffectuer une connexion directe
de lentre avec la sortie du convertisseur (Bypass).
A capacitative load (e.g. Var compensation capacitors) should not be

connected to the output of the drive (terminals U2, V2, W2).
Aucune charge capacitive ne doit tre connecte la sortie du convertisseur
(bornes U2, V2 et W2) (par exemple des condensateurs de mise en phase).
The electrical commissioning should only be carried out by qualified

personnel, who are also responsible for the provision of a suitable
ground connection and a protected power supply feeder in accord-
ance with the local and national regulations. The motor must be pro-
Caution
tected against overloads.
La mise en service lectrique doit tre effectue par un personnel qualifi.
Ce dernier est responsable de lexistence dune connexion de terre adquate
et dune protection des cbles dalimentation selon les prescriptions lo-
cales et nationales. Le moteur doit tre protg contre la surcharge
No dielectric tests should be carried out on parts of the drive. A suit-

able measuring instrument (internal resistance of at least 10 k /V)
should be used for measuring the signal voltages.
Il ne faut pas xcuter de tests de rigidit dilectrique sur des parties du
convertisseurs. Pour mesurer les tensions, des signaux, il faut utiliser des
instruments de mesure appropris (rsistance interne minimale 10 k/V).
NOTE! If the Drives have been stored for longer than two years, the operation of
the DC link capacitors may be impaired and must be reformed.
Before commissioning devices that have been stored for long periods,
connect them to a power supply for two hours with no load connected in
order to regenerate the capacitors, (the input voltage has to be applied
without enabling the drive).
En cas de stockage des variateurs pendant plus de deux ans, il est conseill
de contrler l'tat des condensateurs CC avant d'en effectuer le
branchement. Avant la mise en service des appareils, ayant t stocks
pendant longtemps, il faut alimenter variateurs vide pendant deux
heures, pour rgnrer les condensateurs : appliquer une tension
d'alimentation sans actionner le variateur .
NOTE! The terms Inverter, Controller and Drive are sometimes used
interchangably throughout the industry. We will use the term Drive in
this document.
Les mots Inverter, Controller et Drive sont interchangeables dans
le domaine industriel. Nous utiliserons dans ce manuel seulement le mot
Drive.

Chapter 1 - Functions and General Features
1.1 Drive
The ARTDrive Lift is a field-oriented vector drive with excellent speed
control properties and a high torque dedicated to elevator industry and in
general to hoisting applications. It can be applied to both geared and gearless
systems.
Available control modes according to the installed firmware are:
AVy ... AC / AVy ... AC4 AVy ... BR / AVy ... BR4
Asynchronous motor firmware Synchronous motor firmware
Control - Field oriented vector control -Brushless control
Modes - Sensorless vector control
- V/f advanced control
Dedicated features
Lift sequence
Typical sequence of input / output signals used in elevator application,
brake, output contactor & door control
Parameters in linear units
It is possible to select different engineering units for principal parameters
determining the movement, rpm for speed and rpm/s, rmp/s2 for
acceleration referred to motor or mm/s for speed, mm/s2, mm/s3 for
acceleration referred to car.
Lift mechanical parameters
Parameters of mechanical system like Pulley diameter and Gearbox
ratio for transformation between unit systems and System weights to
calculate inertia and tune speed regulator for desired response.
Ramp generation
Two independent S ramps selectable through digital input with 4
independent jerk settings. Dedicated deceleration ramp corresponding
to stop command.
Multi speed
8 preset speed reference values. At start, possibility to overwrite with
additional value to achieve smooth start.
Pre-torque
Initialisation of speed regulator from weight sensor to avoid saging or
lifting at start.
Landing control
Precision control of car position in floor zone through internal position
regulator.
Higher overload
Overload capability corresponding to typical load cycle used in elevator
application.
Fan control logic function (only for sizes AVy2040AC4 / BR4 up to
AVy5550AC4 / BR4)
ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Chapter 1 Functions and General Features 13

Fan control logic function allows to run internal inverter fans only
when the drive is enabled. Fan control logic function signal is also
repeated on the drive power board FEXT terminals, for an auxiliary
external fan.
Emergency Module Supply
Emergency Module Supply control (EMS or MW22U) allows
emergency lift maneuvres (auxiliary battery pack is required). Both
devices must be signal interfaced with drive power board EM terminal.
Please refer to EMS or MW22U user manual for technical specification.
Easy of use menu
Menus with elevator terminology separated for MONITORing, motor
STARTUP and TRAVEL settings.
Drive features
Self tuning procedure for current, flux and speed regulators, automatic
phasing for brushless motors.
Space vector modulation keeps the noise level to a minimum.
Switching frequencies selectable 2, 4, 8, 12, 16 kHz.
Output voltage up to 98% of input voltage.
Fault register storing the last 30 fault alarms with the associated lifetime.
Overload protection for drive, motor and brake unit.
Three freely configurable analog inputs on the standard device.
Expansion of the analog / digital outputs and analog / digital inputs via
option cards (EXP D8R4, EXP D14A4F).
Speed and torque current regulation possible.
Management of many different types of speed feeedback devices
(encoder).
Adaptive speed regulation.
Speed-related alarms.
Simple operation of the drive can be via

- the terminal strip
- the user-friendly keypad
- the PC program supplied and the RS485 serial interface
- a fieldbus connection (optional): INTERBUS-S, PROFIBUS-DP,
GENIUS, CANopen or DeviceNet.
The Drives are fitted with IGBTs (insulated gate bipolar transistors).
The output is protected against ground fault and phase to phase output
short circuit.
Regulator power supply via switched-mode power supply unit from the
DC Bus circuit. Power supply backup in the event of short-term voltage
dips.
Galvanic isolation between control section and command terminals.
Analog inputs designed as differential inputs.
14 Chapter 1 Functions and General Features ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

1.2 Motors
The AVy Drives designed for the field oriented regulation of standard
three-phase induction AC motors. A sinusoidal encoder or digital encoder
can be used for feedback in proportion to speed.
The electrical and mechanical data of standard three-phase motors refers

to a particular operating range. The following points should be noted when
these motors are connected to an AC Drive:
Is it possible to use standard induction motors?

With the AVy Drives it is possible to use standard induction motors. Some
features of the motor have a great influence on the obtained performances.
Notice also what is stated in section 2.3.2, AC Output, about the voltages
and the motor power.
Which properties of the asynchronous motors have an unfavorable

result in operation with frequency inverters?
Motors with double squirrel-cage rotors or deep rotor bars should not be
used.
Star or delta connection?

Motors can be connected in both star or delta connections. Experience has
shown that star connected motors have better control properties, so star
connections are preferred.
Cooling
The cooling of three-phase motors is normally implemented by means of a
fan that is mounted on the motor shaft. Remember that the air flux produced
by the fan is reduced when the motor is running at lower speeds, which in
certain circumstances may mean that the cooling is insufficient for the
motor. Check with the motor manufacturer whether an external fan is
required and the motor speed range in the application concerned.
Operation above the rated speed

Due to the mechanical factors involved (bearings, unbalance of rotor) and
due to the increased iron losses, consult the manufacturer of the motor if
this is operated above the rated speed .
What motor data is required for connecting the frequency inverter?

Motor nameplate specifications
Asynchronous induction motor

- Rated voltage - Rated power
- Rated frequency - Cosphi
- Rated current - Efficiency
- Rated speed
ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Chapter 1 Functions and General Features 15

Synchronous brushless motor
- Rated voltage - Torque constant
- Rated current - EMF constant
- Rated speed - Stator resistance
- Pole pairs - Ls S inductance
Motor protection
Thermistors
PTC thermistors according to DIN 44081 or 44082 fitted in the motor can
be connected directly to the frequency inverter via terminals 78 and 79. In
this case the resistor (1Kohm) mounted between the terminals 78 and 79
has to be removed.
Temperature-dependent contacts in the motor winding

Temperature-dependent contacts Klixon type can disconnect the drive
via the external control or can be reported as an external fault on the
frequency inverter (terminal 15). They can also be connected to the terminals
78 and 79 in order to have a specific error signal. In this case connect the
existing 1 Kohm resistor in series to the wiring, note that one side of it
must be connected directly to terminal 79.
NOTE! The motor PTC interface circuit (or klixon) has to be considered and
treated as a signal circuit. The connections cables to the motor PTC must
be made of twisted pairs with a shield, the cable route should not be parallel
to the motor cable or far away at least 20 cm.
Current limitation of the frequency inverter

The current limitation can protect the motor from impermissible overloads.
For this the current limitation and the motor overload control function of
the Drive (Motor protection) must be set so that the current is kept within
the permissible range for the motor concerned.
NOTE! Remember that the current limitation can control an overheating of the
motor only due to overload, not due to insufficient ventilation. When the
drive is operated at low speeds the additional use of PTC resistors or
temperature-dependent contacts in the motor windings is recommended,
unless separate forced ventilation is available.
Output chokes
When using general purpose standard motors, output chokes are
recommended to protect winding isolation in some cases. See section 4.8.2,
Output chokes.
16 Chapter 1 Functions and General Features ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

Chapter 2 - Inspection procedures, Components Identification and
Standard Specifications
2.1 Upon Delivery Inspection Procedures

2.1.1 General
A high degree of care is taken in packing the ARTDriveL drives and
preparing them for delivery. They should only be transported with suitable
transport equipment (see weight data). Observe the instructions printed on
the packaging. This also applies when the device is unpacked and installed
in the control cabinet.
Upon delivery, check the following:

the packaging for any external damage
whether the delivery note matches your order.
Open the packaging with suitable tools. Check whether:
any parts were damaged during transport
the device type corresponds to your order
In the event of any damage or of an incomplete or incorrect delivery please

notify the responsible sales offices immediately.
The devices should only be stored in dry rooms within the specified
temperature ranges.
NOTE! A certain degree of moisture condensation is permissible if this arises

from changes in temperature (see section 2.3.1, Permissible Environmental
Conditions). This does not, however, apply when the devices are in
operation. Always ensure that there is no moisture condensation in devices
that are connected to the power supply!
2.1.2 Inverter type designation

The technical specification of the AVy Drive is stated in the type code.
Example:
AVy2040-XXX-AC4
ARTDrive, AC flux vector drive, 3 phase input voltage

Enclosure dimension identification
Nominal motor output = 4kW
X=KCS led module, K=programmable KBS keypad
X=without internal brake transistor, B=with internal brake transistor
X=standard software, L=LIFT software (specific for lift control)
AC=Firmware for asynchronous induction motors, BR=Firmware for
synchronous brushless motors
4=Hardware Lift for internal / external logic fan control and emergency module
supplier control (AVy2040 ... AVy5550 sizes only), [blank]=Hardware standard
ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Chapter 2 Inspection procedures, Components Identification and Std Specs
17
2.1.3 Nameplate
Check that all the data stated in the nameplate enclosed to the inverter
correspond to what has been ordered.
Figure 2.1.3.1: Identification nameplate
Type : AVy 3150 -KBL AC4 S/N 02006233

Inp: 230-480 Vac (Fctry Set=400) 50/60Hz 3Ph Zmin=1%
28,2A@400Vac 24,5A@480Vac With line choke
Out : 0-400Vac 0-500Hz 3Ph 20HP @ 460Vac/15kW@400Vac
33A@400V Cont. Serv. 26,9A @480V
LISTED
INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT
31KF
Type: Inverter model

S/N: Serial number
Inp: Power supply voltage range, frequency and
AC Input current
Out: Output voltage, Output frequency, Output power and
current
Figure 2.1.3.2: Firmware & Card revision level nameplate

Firmware HW release S/N 0162330 Prod.
Release D F P R S BU SW. CFG CONF
1.000 0.A 0.A 0.A 1.000 D1
Figure 2.1.3.3: Nameplates position
18 Chapter 2 Inspection procedures, Components Identification and Std Specs ARTDriveL Instruction Manual
2.2 Component Identification
An ARTDriveL converts the constant voltage and frequency of a three-
phase power supply into a direct voltage and then converts this direct voltage
into a new three-phase power supply with a variable voltage and frequency.
This variable three-phase power supply can be used for infinitely variable
adjustment of the speed of three-phase asynchronous and synchronous
motors.
Figure 2.2.1: Basic Setup of Frequency Inverter
3 4 5
7 8
1 2
1 AC Input supply voltage

2 AC Mains choke
See section 4.8.1
3 Three-phase rectifier bridge
Converts the alternating current into direct current using a three phase
full wave bridge.
4 DC intermediate circuit
With charging resistor and smoothing capacitor.
Direct voltage (UDC) = 2 x Mains voltage (ULN)
5 IGBT inverter
Converts direct voltage to a variable three-phase alternating voltage
with variable frequency.
6 Configurable control section
Modules for open-loop and closed-loop control of the power section.
This is used for processing control commands, reference values and
actual values.
7 Output voltage
Three-phase, variable alternating voltage.
8 Encoder
For speed feedback (see section 3.4.2).
19
2.3 Standard Specifications
2.3.1 Permissible Environmental Conditions
ENVIRONMENT
TA Ambient temperature [C] ____ 0 +40; +40+50 with derating

TA Ambient temperature [F] ____ 32 +104; +104+122 with derating
Installation location __________ Pollution degree 2 or better (free from direct sunlight, vibration,
dust, corrosive or inflammable gases, fog, vapour oil and dripped
water, avoid saline environment)
Degree of protection __________ IP20
IP54 for the cabinet with externally mounted heatsink (size type
1007 to 3150)
Installation altitude ___________ Up to 1000 m (3280 feet) above sea level; for higher altitudes a
current reduction of 1.2% for every 100 m (328 feet) of additional
height applies .
Temperature:
operation 1) _________________________ 040C (32104F)
operation 2) _________________________ 050C (32122F)
storage _________________ -25+55C (-13+131F), class 1K4 as per EN50178
-20+55C (-4+131F), for devices with keypad
transport ________________ -25+70C (-13+158F), class 2K3 as per EN50178
-20+60C (-4+140F), for devices with keypad
Air humidity:
operation ________________ 5 % to 85 %, 1 g/m3 to 25 g/m3 without moisture condensation
or icing (Class 3K3 as per EN50178)
storage _________________ 5% to 95 %, 1 g/m3 to 29 g/m3 (Class 1K3 as per EN50178)
transport ________________ 95 % 3), 60 g/m3 4)
Air pressure:
operation ________________ [kPa] 86 to 106 (class 3K3 as per EN50178)
storage _________________ [kPa] 86 to 106 (class 1K4 as per EN50178)
transport ________________ [kPa] 70 to 106 (class 2K3 as per EN50178)
STANDARD
Climatic conditions ___________ IEC 68-2 Part 2 and 3

Clearance and creepage _______ EN 50178, UL508C, UL840 degree of pollution 2
Vibration ___________________ IEC68-2 Part 6
EMC compatibility ____________ EN61800-3:2004 (see EMC Guidelines instruction book)
Approvals __________________ CE, UL, cUL
1) Parameter Ambient temp = 40C (104)

Ambient temp = 0 ... 40C (32...104F)
Over 40C: - current reduction of 2% of rated output current per K
- remove front plate (better than class 3K3 as per EN50178)
2) Parameter Ambient temp = 50C (122F)
Ambient temp = 0 ... 50C (32...122F)
Current derated to 0.8 rated output current
Over 40C (104): removal of the top cover (better than class 3K3 as per EN50178)
3) Greatest relative air humidity occurs with the temperature @ 40C (104F) or if the
temperature of the device is brought suddenly from -25 ...+30C (-13...+86F).
4) Greatest absolute air humidity if the device is brought suddenly from 70...15C (158...59F).
DISPOSAL OF THE DEVICE
The AVy Drive can be disposed as electronic scrap in accordance with the
currently valid national regulations for the disposal of electronic parts.
The plastic covers of the Drives (up to size 3150) are recyclable: the material
used is >ABS+PC< .
2.3.2 AC Input/Output Connection

The AVy Drive must be connected to an AC mains supply capable of
delivering a symmetrical short circuit current (at 480V +10% Vmax) lower
or equal to the values indicated on table 2.3.4.1. For the use of an AC input
choke see chapter 4.8.1.
No external connection of the regulator power supply to the existing AC
Input supply is required since the power supply is taken from the DC Link
circuit. When commissioning, set the Mains voltage parameter to the value
of the AC Input voltage concerned. This automatically sets the threshold
for the Undervoltage alarm at the appropriate level.
NOTE! In some cases AC Input chokes, and possibly noise suppression filters should
be fitted on the AC Input side of the device. See chapter Chokes/Filters.
Adjustable Frequency Drives and AC Input filters have ground discharge

currents greater then 3.5 mA. EN 50178 specifies that with discharge
currents greater than 3.5 mA the protective conductor ground connection
(PE1) must be fixed type.
2.3.3 AC Input
The Input current of the Drive depends on the operating state and the service
conditions of the connected motor, and the use of input reactors. The table
2.3.4.1 shows the values corresponding to rated continuous service (IEC
146 class 1), keeping into account typical output power factor for each size
2.3.4 AC Output
The output of the AVy Drive is ground fault and phase to phase short
protected. The switching frequency is constant in the speed range and
depends on the drive size.
The connection of an external voltage to the output terminals of the Drive
is not permitted!
NOTE! It is allowed to disconnect the motor from the Drive output, by means
of output contactor only after the Drive has been disabled.
21
The value for the continuous output current rating ( ICONT ) depends on
AC Input voltage ( KV ), Ambient temperature ( KT ) and Switching
frequency ( KF ), values of derating factor are the listed on table 2.3.4.1:
ICONT = I2N x KV x KT x KF
The applicable deratings are automatically set when selecting the

appropriate values of AC Input voltage, Ambient temperature and
Switching frequency.
Figure 2.3.4.1: Rating of Drive in Function of Switching Frequency
Rated drive current
@400V
[%] Over-rating only on 2.2, 4, 5.5, 18.5kW
110%
105%
100%
85%
70%
Switching frequency
45-160kW
[kHz]
0.75-37kW
2kHz 4kHz 8kHz 12kHz 16kHz
Default Higher
Table 2.3.4.2 shows overload current values for typical service profiles
(Ambient temperature =40C [104F], standard switching frequency).
After overload cycle, the output current is reduced to nominal output

current by the drive control. In order to allow next overload cycle, output
current should be decreased (reducing the load) to value less then nominal.
Table states overload recovery (pause) time with current reduced to 90%
continuous current.
The coordination of the motor rated powers with the Drive type presented
in the table below refers to the use of standard 4 poles motors with a rated
voltage equal to the rated voltage of the input supply.
As for those motors with different voltages, the type of Drive to use is
determined by the rated current of the motor.
Motor nominal current cannot be lower than 0,3 x I2N . Magnetizing

motor current must not be higher of ICONT.
4220 4300 4370
Type 1007 1015 1022 1030 2040 2055 2075 3110 3150 4185 5450 5550 6750 7900 71100 71320 81600
4221 4301 4371
Inverter Output (IEC 146 class1), Continuous service [kVA] 1.6 2.7 3.8 5 6.5 8.5 12 16.8 22.4 26.5 32 42 55 64 79 98 128 145 173 224
PN mot (recommended motor output) :
@ ULN=230Vac; f SW=default; IEC 146 class 1 [kW] 0.37 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 18.5 22 22 30 37 55 55 75 90
@ ULN=400Vac; f SW=default; IEC 146 class 1 [kW] 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160
@ ULN=460Vac; IEC 146 class 1 [Hp] 1 2 3 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 23 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 150 200
ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

U2 Max output voltage [V] 0.98 x U LN (AC Input voltage)
O
U f2 Max output frequency (*) [Hz] 400 200
T I2N Rated output current :
P @ ULN=230-400Vac; f SW= default; IEC 146 class 1 [A] 2.4 4 5.6 7.5 9.6 12.6 17.7 24.8 33 39 47 63 79 93 114 142 185 210 250 324
U @ ULN=460Vac; f SW=default; IEC 146 class 1 [A] 2.1 3.5 4.9 6.5 8.3 11 15.4 21.6 28.7 34 40 54 68 81 99 124 160 183 217 282
T
fSW switching frequency (Default) [kHz] 8 4
fSW switching frequency (Higher) [kHz] 12 / 16 8 --
Derating factor:
KV at 460/480Vac 0.87 0.96 0.87 0.93
0.90 0.87
KT for ambient temperature 0.8 @ 50C (122F)
KF for switching frequency 0.7 for f SW=16, 0.85 for f SW=12 0.7 for f SW higher then default
ULN AC Input voltage [V] 230 V -15% ... 480 V +10%, 3Ph
AC Input frequency [Hz] 50/60 Hz 5%
IN AC Input current for continuous service :
- Connection with 3-phase reactor
I @ 230Vac; IEC 146 class1 [A] 1.7 2.9 4 5.5 7 9.5 14 18.2 25 32.5 39 55 69 84 98 122 158 192 220 n.a.
N @ 400Vac; IEC 146 class1 [A] 1.9 3.3 4.5 6.2 7.9 10.7 15.8 20.4 28.2 36.7 44 62 77 94 110 137 177 216 247 309
P @ 460Vac; IEC 146 class1 [A] 1.7 2.9 3.9 5.4 6.7 9.3 13.8 17.8 24.5 32.5 37 53 66 82 96 120 153 188 214 268
U
- Connection without 3-phase reactor
T
@ 230Vac; IEC 146 class1 [A] 3.6 4.4 6.8 7.9 11 15.5 21.5 27.9 35.4
@ 400Vac; IEC 146 class1 [A] 3.9 4.8 7.4 9 12 16.9 24.2 30.3 40 For these types an external inductance is recommended
@ 460Vac; IEC 146 class1 [A] 3.4 4.2 6.4 7.8 10.4 14.7 21 26.4 34.8
Max short circuit power without line reactor (Zmin=1%) [kVA] 160 270 380 500 650 850
1200 1700 2250 2700 3200 4200 5500 6400 7900 9800 12800 14500 17300 22400
Overvoltage threshold [V] 820 VDC
Table 2.3.4.1: AC Input/Output Specifications
Undervoltage threshold [V] 230 VDC (for 230 V AC mains), 400 V DC (for 400V AC mains), 460 V DC for 460 V AC mains)
Option internal (with external resistor);
Braking IGBT Unit (standard drive) Standard internal (with external resistor); Braking torque 150% External braking unit (optional)
Braking torque 150%
(*) Max output frequency refer to regulation in field oriented mode. See table at chapter 3.3.6 for other details TADL2010
For AVyAC4 and AVyBR4 series only the models on grey field are available.
23
Chapter 2 Inspection procedures, Components Identification and Std Specs
Table 2.3.4.2-A: Overload Capability (Sizes 1007 ... 4370)
T2 Overload LOW LOW

Continuous T3 Overload
Overload T1 Overload Overload pause time Frequency < Frequency <
current pause time @
Model factor time current @90% Cont 3Hz overload 3Hz overload
@400V 0% Cont curr
curr factor time
[A] [sec] [A] [sec] [sec] [sec]
1007 2.4 4.4
1015 4 7.3
1022 5.6 10.2
1030 7.5 13.7
2040 9.6 17.6
1.5
2055 12.6 23.1
2075 17.7 1.83 10 32.4 124 24 2
3110 24.8 45.4
3150 33 60.4
4185 39 71.4
4221 47 86.0
4301 63 115.3 1.36
4371 79 144.6
TL2020
Overload Level [%] CYCLE A

T1 OvldCurrentLevel
T2 100%ContinuousCurrentLevel
90%ContinuousCurrentLevel
(2)
(1)
Time [sec]
Overload Level [%] CYCLE B

T1 OvldCurrentLevel
(3)
(4)
T3
Time [sec]
(1) Load current must be reduced to 90% level to allow next overload cycle.
(2) Drive current is limited to 100% level when drive overload alarm is selected as Ignore or Warning
(3) No limit on duration of this time interval @100% Cont current
(4) Next overload cycle is allowed after T3
Table 2.3.4.2-B: Overload Capability (Sizes 5450... 81600)
T2 SLOW LOW LOW

Continuous SLOW T1 SLOW SLOW Overload FAST TF FAST FAST Frequency Frequency
current Overload Overload Overload pause time Overload Overload Overload < 3Hz < 3Hz
Model
@400V factor time current @90% factor time [sec] current overload overload
Cont curr factor time
[A] [sec] [A] [sec] [sec] [A] [sec]
5450 93 126.5 170.2
5550 114 155 208.6
6750 142 193.1 259.9
1.83 0.5
7900 185 1.36 60 251.6 300 338.6 1.36 2
71100 210 285.6 384.3
71320 250 340 457.5
81600 324 440.6 1.4 1.0 453.6
TL2021
Overload Level [%]

TF
FastOvldCurrentLevel
T1 SlowOvldCurrentLevel
T2 100%ContinuousCurrentLevel
Drive current is limited to 100% level

when drive overload alarm is selected
as Ignore or Warning
Load current must be reduced to 90% level
to allow next overload cycle
Time [sec]
25
2.3.5 I/O and Encoder Specifications
I/O
Enable inputs ________________ 0 / 15...30 V 3.2...6.4 mA (5 mA @ 24 V)
Analog inputs ________________ Selectable 0... 10 V 0.25mA max
0...20 mA 10V max
4...20 mA 10 V max
Max common mode voltage: 0... 10 V
Analog outputs _______________ 0... 10 V 5 mA max per output

Digital inputs ________________ 0 / 15...30 V 3.2...6.4 mA (5 mA @ 24 V)
Digital outputs _______________ Supply + 15...35 V

Signals + 15...35 V 40 mA max per output
Int. voltage supply

Load capacity _______________ + 5 V, 160 mA Plug connector
+ 10 V, 10 mA Terminal 7
- 10 V, 10 mA Terminal 8
+ 24 V, 120 mA Terminal 19
Tolerance ___________________ + 10 V 3 % 1)
- 10 V 3 % 1)
+ 24 V + 20 ... 30 V, not stabilized
XE for digital encoder, PIN 7/9
The tolerance between positive and negative amplitudes is 0.5%

1)
2.3.6 Accuracy
Table 2.3.6.1: Maximum / Minimum Output Frequency
Output frequency (Hz)

Maximum Minimum (a) Resolution
Regulation mode
Switching frequency (kHz)
2 4 8 16
Field oriented 200 200 400 400 0
Sensorless vect 200 200 200 200 0.6 0.005
V/f control 200 300 600 600 2*motor slip freq
Brushless 200 200 400 400 0
(a): 1.5 * Rated motor torque capability
Table 2.3.6.2: Speed Reference / Feedback Resolution and Maximum Limits
Speed Speed feedback resolution (rpm) FSS max Limit speed
Regulation mode reference resolution
(rpm) Enc Sin Enc Dig Fmode Enc Dig Fpmode SinCos/Res. value (rpm) (rpm)
0.03125 Higher from Higher from 512 1024

Field oriented 0.125 [60000/(4096*ppr) [60000/(40*ppr)- SpdD ref res 2048 4096
0.25 - SpdD ref res] N/A 4096 8192
0.5 SpdD ref res] 8192 16384
1 16384 32768
0.03125 512 1024
Sensorless vect 0.125 Highest value from (0.3 - SpdD ref res) (b) N/A 2048 4096
0.25 4096 8192
0.5 8192 16384
1 16384 32768
0.03125 512 1024
V/f control 0.125 2048 4096
0.25 N/A 4096 8192
0.5 8192 16384
1 16384 32768
0.03125 Higher value of
Highest value of 512 1024
0.125 either [60000/ 2048 4096
Brushless 0.25 (4096*ppr)] or
either [60000/
SpdD ref res 2.5 4096 8192
(40*ppr)] or
0.5 SpdD ref res
SpdD ref res 8192 16384
1 16384 32768
(b): 4 pole motor

Table 2.3.6.3: Speed Regulator Bandwidth
Spd Control Typ Spd Reg

Regulation mode Max Spd reg bandwidth (rad/sec)
range Accuracy (c) [%]
Enc Sin Enc Dig Fmode Enc Dig Fpmode SinCos/Res.

Field oriented >10000:1 300 (Spd>15rpm
0.01
450 100 for ppr=1024)
N/A
Sensorless vect >500:1 100 (Spd>FSS/100) N/A 0.3@FSS

0.5@FSS/50
V/f control >100:1 N/A 1%
300 (Spd>15rpm
Brushless >10000:1 450 100 for ppr=1024)
100 0.01%
(c): Standard 1500rpm
Table 2.3.6.4: Torque Specifications
Torque ref Typ Torque Reg Typ Trq Rise time

Regulation mode resolution Accuracy (d)[%] Trq Control range [ms]
Field oriented >1:1000 4 >20:1 0.8
Sensorless vect >1:1000 8 >20:1 0.8
V/f control N/A N/A N/A N/A
Brushless >1:1000 1 >20:1 0.8
(d): Mot rated torque=100%

Spd range: Max=Mot Rated speed; min=Mot Rated speed/10
Torque range: Max=Mot Rated torque; min=Mot Rated torque/10
27
Chapter 3 - Mechanical Installation Guidelines
3.1 Dimensions and Mounting Methods

Figure 3.1.1: Drive Dimensions (Sizes 1007 ... 3150)
c a a
D1 D1
D2
D2
E2
E2
b
d E1 E1
Figure 3.1.2: Mounting Methods (Sizes 1007 ... 3150)
E5
E2 E4
E3
E1
Mounting with external dissipator (E) Mounting wall (D)
28 Chapter 3 Installation Guidelines ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

Table 3.1.1: Drive Dimensions and Weights (Sizes 1007 ... 3150)
Type 1007 1015 1022 1030 2040 2055 2075 3110 3150
Drive dimensions:
a mm (inch) 105.5 (4.1) 151.5 (5.9) 208 (8.2)
b mm (inch) 306.5 (12.0) 323 (12.7)
c mm (inch) 199.5 (7.8) 240 (9.5)
d mm (inch) 62 (2.4) 84 (3.3)
D1 mm (inch) 69 (2.7) 115 (4.5) 168 (6.6)
D2 mm (inch) 296.5 (11.6) 310.5 (12.2)
E1 mm (inch) 69 (2.7) 115 (4.5) 164 (6.5)
E2 mm (inch) 299.5 (11.7) 315 (12.4)
E3 mm (inch) 99.5 (3.9) 145.5 (5.7) 199 (7.8)
E4 mm (inch) 284 (11.2) 299.5 (11.8)
E5 mm (inch) 9 (0.35)
d M5
Weight kg (lbs) 3.5 (7.7) 3.6 (7.9) 3.7 (8.1) 4.95 (10.9) 8.6 (19)
tadl3100
Figure 3.1.3: Drive Dimensions (Sizes 4220 ... 81600)
a
c D1
b
ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Chapter 3 Installation Guidelines 29

Figure 3.1.4: Mounting Methods (Sizes 4220 ... 81600)
D4
D1
D2 D2
Mounting wall (D) D3 D3 D3 D3
Table 3.1.2: Drive Dimensions and Weights (Sizes 4220 ... 81600)
Type 4185-4221 4300-4301 4370-4371 5450 5550 6750 7900 71100 71320 81600
Drive dimensions:
a mm (inch) 309 (12.1) 376 (14.7) 509 (20)
b mm (inch) 489 (19.2) 564 (22.2) 741 (29.2) 909 (35.8) 965 (38)
c mm (inch) 268 (10.5) 308 (12.1) 297.5 (11.7) 442 (17.4)
D1 mm (inch) 225 (8.8)
D2 mm (inch) 150 (5.9)
D3 mm (inch) 100 (3.9)
D4 mm (inch) 475 (18.7) 550 (21.6) 725 (28.5) 891 (35) 947 (37.3)
M6
Weight kg 18 22 22.2 34 34 59 75.4 80.2 86.5 109

lbs 39.6 48.5 48.9 74.9 74.9 130 166.1 176.7 190.6 240.3
tadl3105
Figure 3.1.5: Keypad Positioning
To allow a confortable viewing angle, the keypad can be oriented on three

different positions.

3.2 Watts Loss, Heat Dissipation, Internal Fans and Minimum
Cabinet Opening Suggested for the Cooling
The heat dissipation of the Drives depends on the operating state of the connected
motor. The table below shows values that refer to operation at default switching
frequency (see section 2.3.2, AC Input/Output Connection), Tamb 40C, typ.
motor power factor and nominal continuous current.
Table 3.2.1: Heat Dissipation and Required Air Flow
Heat Dissipation [W] Airflow of fan [m3/h]

Type 1) 1)
@ULN=400Vac @ULN=460Vac Internal fan Heatsink fans
1007 48.2 45.0 11 -
1015 77.5 72.0 11 30
1022 104.0 96.3 11 30
1030 138.3 126.7 11 30
2040 179.5 164.1 11 2x30
2055 233.6 215.6 11 2x30
2075 327.4 300.8 11 2x30
3110 373 340 30 2x79
3150 512 468 30 2x79
4185 560 500 80
4220-4221 658 582 80
4300-4301 864 780 170
4370-4371 1100 1000 170
5450 1250 1100 340
5550 1580 1390 340
6750 1950 1750 650
7900 2440 2200 975
71100 2850 2560 975
71320 3400 3050 975
81600 4400 3950 1820
tadl0040
1) fSW=default; I2=I2N
NOTE! All the Drives have internal fans.

Heat dissipation losses refer to default Switching frequency.
Table 3.2.2: Minimum Cabinet Opening Suggested for the Cooling
Minimum cooling opening [cm 2] (sq.inch)

Type
Control section Heatsink
1007 ... 1030 31 (4.8) 36 (5.6)
2040 ... 2075 31 (4.8) 72 (11.1)
3110 ... 3150 36 (5.6) 128 (19.8)
4185 ... 4221 2x150 (2x 23.5) 2x150 (2x 23.5)
4300 ... 4371 2x200 (2x31) 2x200 (2x31)
5450 ... 5550 2x370 (2x57.35) 2x370 (2x57.35)
6750 ... 71320 2x620 (2x96.1) 2x620 (2x96.1)
81600 2 x 1600 (2 x 248) 2 x 1600 (2 x 248)
tadl0050

3.2.1 Cooling Fans Power Supply
Fan Control Logic function
(only for sizes AVy2040AC4 / BR4 up to AVy5550AC4 / BR4)
It allows to run internal fans only when the drive is enabled. Fans will
stop when the drive is disabled after a period of 300sec and heatsink
temperature is below 60 degrees.
Fan control logic function signal is also repeated on the drive power board
FEXT terminals, for an auxiliary external fan.
Cooling Fans Power Supply for sizes AVy1007 to AVy5550

Power supply (+24VAC) for these fans is provided from the internal drive
power supply unit.
Cooling Fans Power Supply for sizes AVy6750 to AVy81600

Power supply for the fans is externally connected by the user. AC Input
voltage is connected at the power terminal strip:
- AVy6750: 0.8A@115V/60Hz, 0.45A@230V / 50Hz
- AVy7900 ... AVy71320: 1.2A@115V/60Hz, 0.65A@230V / 50Hz
- AVy81600: 1.65A@115V/60Hz, 0.70A@230V / 50Hz
Figure 3.2.1: UL Type Fans Connections on AVy7900, AVy71100 and AVy71320 Sizes
Drive
0
U3
AUTOTRAFO
115 M
2V3
~
230 230VAC fans
1V3
Figure 3.2.2: UL Type Fans Connections on AVy6750 and AVy81600 Sizes
Drive
U3
2V3
1V3
No.2 115VAC fans

M M
~ ~

Figure 3.2.3: Example for External Connection
Drive Drive
U3 U3
2V3 115VAC 2V3 *) Only for AVy6750 and

230VAC AVy81600 drives
(*)
1V3 1V3
NOTE! An internal fuse (2.5A 250VAC slo-blo) for AVy7900, AVy71100 and
AVy71320 sizes is provided.
On AVy6750 and AVy81600 sizes the fuse must be mounted externally.

3.3 Installation Mounting Clearance
NOTE! The dimensions and weights specifed in this manual should be taken into
consideration when the device is mounted. The technical equipment required
(carriage or crane for large weights) should be used. Improper handling
and the use of unsuitable tools may cause damage.
Figure 3.3.1: Max. Angle of Inclination
The maximum angle of inclination is 30
NOTE! The drives must be mounted in such a way that the free flow of air is ensured.
The clearance to the device must be at least 150 mm (6 inches). A space of at
least 50 mm (2 inches) must be ensured at the front.
On size 81600 the top and bottom clearance must be at least 380 mm (15
inches), on front and sides must be ensured a space of at least 140 mm (5.5
inches). Devices that generate a large amount of heat must not be mounted in
the direct vicinity of the drive.
Figure 3.3.2: Mounting Clearance
150 mm ( 6" )
[380mm (15")]
10 mm ( 0.4" ) 20 mm ( 0.8" ) 150 mm ( 6" ) 10 mm ( 0.4" ) 50 mm ( 2" )

[140mm (5.5")] [140mm (5.5")] [380mm (15")] [140mm (5.5")] [140mm (5.5)]
[...] for 81600 size
NOTE! Fastening screws should be re-tightened after a few days of operation.

Chapter 4 - Wiring Procedure
4.1 Accessing the Connectors

4.1.1 Removing the Covers
NOTE! Observe the safety instructions and warnings given in this manual. The devices
can be opened without the use of force. Only use the tools specified.
Figure 4.1.1: Removing the Covers (Sizes 1007 to 3150)
2 2
no. 2 for
20-40 ...30-60
size
1
Sizes 1007 to 2075:

The terminal cover and cable entry plate of the device must be removed in
order to fit the electrical connections:
- unscrew the screw (1), remove the cover of devices (2) by pressing on
both sides as shown on the above figure (3).
- unscrew the two screws (4) to remove the cable entry plate.
The top cover must be removed in order to mount option cards and change
the internal jumper settings:
- remove the keypad and disconnect the connector (5)
- lift the top cover on the bottom side (over the connector level) and
then push it to the top (6).
Sizes 3110 to 3150:

The terminal cover and cable entry plate of the device must be removed in
order to fit the electrical connections:
- unscrew the two screws (1) and remove the cover of devices
- unscrew the two screws (4) to remove the cable entry plate.
The top cover must be removed in order to mount the option card and
change the internal jumper settings:
- remove the keypad and disconnect the connector (5)
- lift the top cover on the bottom side (over the connector level) and then
push it to the top (6)
ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure 35

Figure 4.1.2: Removing the Covers (Sizes 4185 to 81600)
3
3
2 2
Sizes 4185 to 81600:

The terminal cover of the device must be removed in order to fit the electrical
connections: unscrew the two screw (2) and remove the cover (1)
The top cover must be removed in order to mount the option card and
change the internal jumper settings: unscrew the two screw (3) and remove
the top cover by moving it as indicated on figure (4).
In order to avoid damage to the drive it is not

Caution
allowed to transport it by holding the cards!
4.2 Power Section

Please note that a wrong connection on motor phases can cause the motor
to move without control and can destroy the drive.
Caution Please check that motor phases are connected in the right sequence before
enabling the drive.
36 Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

4.2.1 Terminal Assignment on Power Section / Cable Cross-Section
Table 4.2.1.1: Power Section Terminals from 1007 to 3150
Function max
U1/L1
230V -15%
3Ph~ V1/L2 AC mains voltage 460V+15%, 3Ph
W1/L3
Braking unit resistor command (braking resistor
BR1 must be connected between BR1 and C)
C
Internal braking resistor Intermediate circuit connection 770V DC / 1.65
output current
D
U2/T1
AC line volt 3Ph
M V2/T2 Motor connection 1.36 output
current
W2/T3
PE2/ Motor ground connection
On FAN-CEXP card
EM Note!
Emergency module signal required to interface the drive
0.22A EM and FEXT terminals
with the EMS device (Emergency Module Supplier)
EM
are available on sizes
FEXT AVy2040AC4 / BR4 up to
Logic fan control signal repeated on an external fan (*) 250Vac
1A AVy5550AC4 / BR4 only.
FEXT
PE1 / Grounding (protective earth) conductor
Table 4.2.1.2: Power Section Terminals from 4185 to 81600
Function max
U1/L1
230V -15%
3Ph~ V1/L2 AC mains voltage 460V+15%, 3Ph
W1/L3
C
Intermediate circuit connection 770V DC / 1.65
Braking resistor (optional) output current
D
Braking unit resistor command (braking resistor
BR1 must be connected between BR1 and C)
U2/T1
AC line volt 3Ph
M V2/T2 Motor connection 1.36 output
current
W2/T3
PE2/ Motor ground connection
EM
Emergency module signal required to interface the drive Note!
0.22A
with the EMS device (Emergency Module Supplier)
EM EM and FEXT terminals
are available on sizes
FEXT
Logic fan control signal repeated on an external fan (*) 250Vac AVy2040AC4 / BR4 up to
1A AVy5550AC4 / BR4 only.
FEXT
PE1 / Grounding (protective earth) conductor
(*) Fans will be always start when the drive is enabled.

Fans will stop when the drive is disabled after a period of 300 sec. and heatsink temperature
is below 60C.

Power terminals lay-out sizes 1007 to 3150
The terminals of the devices are made accessible by removing the cover
and the cable entry plate (see section 4.1, Accessing the connectors), on
some drive types it is also possible to extract the removable connector.
All the power terminals are located on the power card PV33-...
Power terminals lay-out sizes 4185 to 81600

The terminals of the devices are made accessible by removing the cover
(see section 4.1, Accessing the connectors).
Maximum cable sizes for power terminals U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, C, D, PE
Table 4.2.1.3: Maximum Cable Cross Section for Power Terminals
Type 1007 1015 1022 1030 2040 2055 2075 3110 3150 4185...4221 4300-3401
AWG 14 12 10 8 6 4
U1,V1,W1,U2,V2,W2,C,D 2
mm 2 4 8 10 16 25
terminals
(sq in) (0.003) (0.006) (0.012) (0.016) (0.025) (0.039)
Tightening torque Nm 0.5 to 0.6 1.2 to 1.5 2 3
(lbf . in) (4.4) to (5.3) (10.6) to (13.2) (17.7) (26.5)
AWG 14 12 10 8 6 10 8
2
BR1 terminals mm 2 4 8 10 6 10
(sq in) (0.003) (0.006) (0.012) (0.016) (0.009) (0.016)
Nm 0.5 to 0.6 1.2 to 1.5 0.9 1.6
Tightening torque
(lbf . in) (4.4) to (5.3) (10.6) to (13.2) (7.9) (14.1)
AWG 14 12 10 8 6 6
2
PE1, PE2 terminals mm 2 4 8 10 16 16
(sq in) (0.003) (0.006) (0.012) (0.016) (0.025) (0.025)
Nm 0.5 to 0.6 1.2 to 1.5 2 3
Tightening torque
(lbf . in) (4.4) to (5.3) (10.6) to (13.2) (17.7) (26.5)
Type 4370-4371 5450 5550 6750 7900 71100 71320 81600

AWG 2 1/0 2/0 4/0 300* 350* 4xAWG2 * = kcmils
U1,V1,W1,U2,V2,W2,C,D 2
mm 35 50 70 95 150 185 4x35
terminals
(sq in) (0.054) (0.078) (0.109) (0.147) (0.233) (0.287) (0.006x0.054)
Tightening torque Nm 4 12 10 - 30
(lbf . in) (0.006) (106.2) (88.5) - (265.5)
AWG 8 6
2
BR1 terminals mm 10 16
(sq in) (0.016) (0.025) terminals not available
Nm 1.6 3
Tightening torque
(lbf . in) (14.1) (26.5)
AWG 6 2
2
PE1, PE2 terminals mm 16 50
(sq in) (0.025) (0.078)
Nm 3 4
Tightening torque
(lbf . in) (26.5) (35.4)
Type 2040 up to 5550

AWG 28 16
EM, FEXT terminals mm
2 0.14 1.5
(sq in)
Nm 0.4
Tightening torque
(lbf . in)
tadl4040L
The grounding conductor of the motor cable may conduct up to twice the
value of the rated current if there is a ground fault at the output of the
ARTDriveL drive.
NOTE! Use 60C / 75C copper conductor only.

Maximum Cable Sizes for control terminals
Table 4.2.1.4: Maximum Permissible Cable Cross-section on the Plug-in Terminals of
the Regulator Section
Maximum Permissible Cable Cross-Section Tightening

Terminals [mm2] torque
AWG
flexible multi-core [Nm]
1 ... 79 0.14 ... 1.5 0.14 ... 1.5 28 ... 16 0.4
80 ... 85 0.14 ... 1.5 0.14 ... 1.5 28 ... 16 0.4
txv0065L
The use of a 75 x 2.5 x 0.4 mm (3 x 0.1 x 0.02 inch) flat screwdriver is

recommended. Remove 6.5 mm (0.26 inch) of the insulation at the cable
ends. Only one unprepared wire (without ferrule) should be connected to
each terminal point.
Maximum Cable Length

Table 4.2.1.5: Maximum Control Cable Lengths
Cable section [mm2] 0.22 0.5 0.75 1 1.5
Max Length m [feet] 27 [88] 62 [203] 93 [305] 125 [410] 150 [492]
avy3130

4.3 Regulation Section
4.3.1 RV33-4NV Regulation Card Switch & Jumpers
FRONT SIDE BACK SIDE
Table 4.3.1.1: LEDs & Test points on Regulation Card

Designation Color Function
PWR green LED lit when the voltage +5V is present and at correct level
RST red LED lit during the Hardware Reset
PWM green LED lit during IGBT modulation
RUN green LED is flashing when regulation is running (not in STARTUP menu)
RS485 green LED lit when RS485 interface is supplied
+5VE green LED lit when encoder power supply +5V (XE-9)
+8VE red LED lit when encoder power supply +8V (XE-2)
XY4 (test point) Phase current signal (U)
XY5 (test point) Reference point

Table 4.3.1.2: Jumpers and dip-switches on Regulation Card RV33
Designation Function Factory setting

S3 Factory use, the setting must not be changed -
S5 - S6 Terminating resistor for the serial interface RS485 ON (*)
ON= Termination resistor IN
OFF= No termination resistor
S8 Adaptation to the input signal of analog input 1 (terminals 1 and 2) OFF
ON=0...20 mA / 4...20 mA
OFF=0...10 V / -10...+10 V
ON=0...20 mA / 4...20 mA
OFF=0...10 V / -10...+10 V
ON=0...20 mA / 4...20 mA
OFF=0...10 V / -10...+10 V
S11 - S12 - S13 Encoder setting ( jumpers on kit EAM_1618 supplied with the drive) OFF
S14 - S15 - S16 ON=Sinusoidal SE or SESC encoder
(**) OFF=Digital DE or DEHS encoder
S17 Monitoring of the C-channel of the digital encoder OFF
(**) ON=C-Channel monitored
OFF=C-Channel not monitored (required for single-ended channels)
S18 - S19 Encoder setting A
S20 - S21 Pos. B=digital DEHS encoder
(**) Pos. A= sinusoidal SESC encoder
S22 - S23 Analog input 3 enabling (alternative with SESC encoder) A
(**) Pos. A= if SESC encoder is used
Pos. B=analog input 3 enabled
Pos. OFF= resolver
S26 - S27 (**) Resover use enabling ON
Pos. ON=when resolver is not used
Pos. OFF=resolver
S28 Encoder Internal power supply selection ON/ON
ON / ON = +5 V
OFF / OFF = +8 V
S29 Internal use A
S30 Second encoder qualifier input B
A=from EXP- board
B=from digital input "6" on RV33-4
S34 Jumper to disconnect 0V (+24V power supply) from ground ON
ON = 0V connected to ground (hard-wire)
OFF = 0V disconnected from ground
S35 Jumper to disconnect 0V (regulation board) from ground ON
ON = 0V connected to ground (hard-wire)
OFF = 0V disconnected from ground
S36 Internal use not mounted
S37 Internal use not mounted
S38-S39 Inverter size setting ON
ON = Read size on power board
OFF = Read size on regulation board (dip-switch or configuration file)
S40-S41 Power supply for the serial interface RS485 OFF
(***) ON = Internal power supply (from pins XS.5 / XS.9)
OFF = External power supply (to pins XS.5 / XS.9)
AL4060
(*) on multidrop connection the jumper must be ON only for the last drop of a serial line
(**) see table 4.5.2 for more details on encoder jumper setting
(***) see chapter 5.
The devices are factory set accordingly.

When fitting a regulation card as a spare, remember to set again the
Caution
encoders jumpers.

4.3.2 Terminal Assignments on Regulation Section
Table 4.3.2.1: Plug-in Terminal Strip Assignments
Strip X1 Function max
1 Programmable/configurable analog differential input. Signal: terminal 1.

Analog input 1
2 Reference point: terminal 2.
10V
3 Programmable/configurable analog differential input. Signal: terminal 3. 0.25mA

Analog input 2
4 Reference point: terminal 4. (20mA when
current loop
5 Programmable/configurable analog differential input. Signal: terminal 5.
input)
Analog input 3
6 Reference point: terminal 6.
7 +10V Reference voltage +10V; Reference point: terminal 9 +10V/10mA
8 -10V Reference voltage -10V; Reference point: terminal 9 -10V/10mA
9 0V Internal 0V and reference point for10V -
Enable/ Inverter ENABLE, active=high. Concurrently, it can be used as a programmable

12 Digital input 0 input. (Default none) +30V
13 Digital input 1 Programmable input, Default setting: START FWD 3.2mA @ 15V
14 Digital input 2 Programmable input, Default setting: START REW 5mA @ 24V
15 Digital input 3 Programmable input, Default setting: NULL 6.4mA @ 30V
16 COM D I/O Reference point for digital inputs and outputs, term.12...15, 36...39, 41...42 -
18 0 V 24 Reference point for + 24V OUT supply, terminal 19 -

+2228V
19 +24V OUT +24V supply output. Reference point: terminal 18 or 27 or 28
120mA @ 24V
Analog output
21 1 Programmable analog output; Default setting: NULL 10V/5mA
22 0V Internal 0V and reference point for terminals 21 and 23 -

Analog output
23 2 Programmable analog output; Default setting: NULL 10V/5mA
BU comm.
26 output VeCon controlled BU-... braking units command. Ref. point: term.27. +28V/15mA
BU-
27 0 V 24 Reference point for BU-... command, terminal 26 -
External braking
unit (optional)
28 RESERVED -
29 RESERVED
Programmable input
36 Digital input 4 Default setting: MLT SPD S0 +30V
37 Digital input 5 Default setting: MLT SPD S1 3.2mA @ 15V
Default setting: MLT SPD S2. Configurable as 2nd encoder index qualifier
38 Digital input 6 5mA @ 24V
(setting via S30 jumper, Digital input 6 parameter must be set as not used)
Default setting: FAULT RESET. Configurable as 1st encoder index
Digital input 7 6.4mA @ 30V
39 qualifier Digital input 7 parameter must be set as not used)
Digital output
41 2 Programmable output; Default setting: DRIVE READY
Digital output +30V/40mA
Programmable output; Default setting: SPEED IS 0
42 3
Supply D O Supply input for digital outputs on terminals 41/42. Ref. point: term.16. +30V/80mA
46
78 Motor PTC Motor PTC sensing for overtemperature (cutoff R1k if used) 1.5mA
R1K
79
Strip X2 Function Max.

80 250V AC
Digital output 0 Potential- free relay contact, programmable output,
Relay 1A
82 Default=DRIVE OK
83 Digital output 1 Potential- free relay contact, programmable output, 250V AC

Relay Default=BRAKE CONT MON 1A
85

+24Vdc voltage, which is used to externally supply the regulation card has
to be stabilized and with a maximum 10% tolerance. The maximum
absorption is 1A.
Caution
It is not suitable to power supply the regulation card only through a unique
rectifier and capacitive filter.
4.4 Potentials of the Control Section
Figure 4.4.1-A: Potentials of the control section, Digital I/O NPN connection
To Expansion Cards
1
Analog input 1
2 Analog
21
output 1
3 0V
Analog input 2 22
4
Analog
output 2 23
5
Analog input 3
6
S35
+10V 7
12
+24V
Enable (Digital input 0) 0V 9
13
- 10V
Digital input 1 8
14
Digital input 2
Digital output 1 83
15 85
Digital input 3
36 Digital output 0 80
82
Digital input 4
37
46 +24V
Digital input 5
38 Digital output 2
41 LOAD
Digital input 6
39
Digital input 7 Digital output 3
42 LOAD
0V(+24V) 16 COM D I/O 0V(+24V)

+24 V +24V
29 19
Internal power supply

from Power Card
0 (+24 V) 0V (24V)
28 18
78
1k Over Temperature BU 26
79 Motor
27
S34
NOTE! Combination NPN inputs / PNP outputs and viceversa is not permitted.
The potentials of the regulation section are isolated and can be disconnected
via jumpers from ground.

The connections between each potential are shown in Figure 4.4.1 .
The analog inputs are designed as differential amplifiers.
The digital inputs are optocoupled with the control circuit.
The digital inputs have terminal 16 as reference point.
The analog outputs are not designed as differential amplifiers and have a
common reference point (terminal 22). The analog outputs and the 10V
reference point have same potential (terminal 9 and 22).
The digital outputs are optocoupled with the control circuit. The digital
outputs (terminal 41 and 42) have same potential (terminal 16) and terminal
46 as common supply.
Figure 4.4.1-B: Potentials of the control section, Digital I/O PNP connection
To Expansion Cards
1
Analog input 1
2 Analog
21
output 1
3 0V
Analog input 2 22
4
Analog
output 2 23
5
Analog input 3
6
S35
+10V 7
12
Enable (Digital input 0) 0V 9
13
- 10V
Digital input 1 8
14
Digital input 2
Digital output 1 83
15 85
Digital input 3
36 Digital output 0 80
82
Digital input 4
37 0V(+24V)
46
Digital input 5
38 Digital output 2
41 LOAD
Digital input 6
39
Digital input 7 Digital output 3
42 LOAD
0V(+24V)
COM D I/O +24V

16
+24V
+24 V +24V
29 19
Internal power supply

from Power Card
0 (+24 V) 0V (24V)
28 18
78
1k Over Temperature BU 26
79 Motor
27
S34
NOTE! Combination NPN inputs / PNP outputs and viceversa is not permitted.

4.5 Encoders
Several types of encoders may be connected to the XE connector (high density
15-pole socket, fitted on device), see the table 4.5.2 for the jumper settings.
AVy ... AC / AC4 :

- DE: digital incremental encoder with A+/A-,B+/B-,C+/C- traces
- SE: sinusoidal incremental encoder with A+/A-,B+/B-,C+/C traces
AVy ... BR / BR4 :

- SEHS: sinusoidal incremental encoder with A+/A-,B+/B-,C+/C- traces
and three digital Hall sensor absolute position traces for initial
synchronization (factory setting).
- SESC: sinusoidal incremental encoder with A+/A-,B+/B-,C+/C- traces
and two analog Sin Cos absolute position traces for initial
synchronization.
- SExtern: sinusoidal incremental encoder with A+/A-,B+/B-,C+/C-
traces and absolute position information thought SSI serial interface
for initial synchronization (requires APC100y card).
- DEHS: digital incremental encoder with A+/A-,B+/B-,C+/C- traces
and three digital Hall sensor absolute position traces (factory setting).
- DExtern: digital incremental encoder with A+/A-,B+/B-,C+/C traces
and absolute position information thought SSI serial interface for initial
synchronization (requires APC100y card).
- SC: sinusoidal encoder with two analog SinCos absolute position traces
- RES: resolver (requires EXP-RES card)
- SEHiperface: sinusoidal incremental encoder with A+/A-,B+/B-, traces
and Hiperface interface
- SE Intern: sinusoidal incremental encoder with A+/A-,B+/B-,C+/C-
traces, absolute position traces are not necessary because phasing is
performed automatically at every start
- DE Intern:digital incremental encoder with A+/A-,B+/B-,C+/C- traces,
absolute position traces are not necessary because phasing is performed
automatically at every start .
- SE EnDat: sinusoidal incremental encoder with A+/A-,B+/B-, traces
and Endat interface (requires EXP-ENDAT-AVy card)
Encoders are used to feed back a speed signal to the drive. The encoder
should be coupled to the motor shaft with a backlash free connection.
Optimal regulation results are ensured when using sinusoidal encoders.
Digital encoders may also be used but regulation properties get worse at
low speeds.
The encoder cable must made of twisted pairs with a global shield should
be connected to the ground on the Drive side. Typically shield should not
be connected to ground on the motor side. In some installation with high
electromagnetical noise connecting the shield also on motor side helps to
suppress pickup of false encoder pulses and reduces amount of disturbanes
in the measured speed.

In case of brushless motor or where the cable length is more than 100
meters (328 feet), a cable with a shield on each conductor pair must be
used. The shield must be connected to the common point (0V). The global
shield must always be grounded.
Some types of sinusoidal encoders may require installation with galvanic
isolation from the motor frame and shaft.
Table 4.5.1: Recommended Cable Section and Length for the Connection of Encoders
Cable section mm2 0.22 0.5 0.75 1 1.5
Max Length (m) [feet] 27 [88] 62 [203] 93 [305] 125 [410] 150 [492]
txv0055
Table 4.5.2: Encoders Setting via S11...S23 Jumpers
Encoder / Jumpers setting S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19 S20 S21 S22 S23 S26 S27
DE OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF (*) - - - - - - - -
SE ON ON ON ON ON ON (*) - - - - - - - -
SEHS ON ON ON ON ON ON (*) B B B B - - - -
SESC ON ON ON ON ON ON (*) A A A A A A ON ON
SExtern ON ON ON ON ON ON (*) - - - - - - - -
DEHS OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF (*) B B B B - - - -
DExtern OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF (*) - - - - - - - -
SC - - - - - - (*) A A AA A A
ON ON
RES - - - - - - (*) - - - -
OFF OFF OFF OFF
RES (**) - - - - - - (*) OFF OFF OFF OFF A A ON ON
SEHiperface ON ON ON ON ON ON (*) - - - - - - - -
SE Endat ON ON ON ON ON ON (*) - - - - - - - -
ai3150L
(*) If the encoder is not provided of the zero channel : S17=OFF

(**) With EXP-RES + Regulation card RV33-4B and higher
The jumper S17 selects the inhibition or the enabling of the channel C
pulses reading. It has to be correctly selected in order to detect appropriately
the encoder loss alarm.
S17 ON : channel C (index) reading=ON
S17 OFF: channel C (index) reading=OFF
Table 4.5.3: Encoders Connections

Regulation card
XE CONNECTOR PIN
Shielded
Encoder type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
cable
B- +8V C+ C- A+ A- 0V B+ +5V E+ E- F+ F- G+ G-
Internal +5V Encoder Power Supply
DE 8 pole l l l l l l l l
SE 8 pole l l l l l l l l
SESC 12 pole l l l l l l l l l l l l
DEHS 14 pole l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SEHS 14 pole l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Internal +8V Encoder Power Supply
DE 8 pole l l l l l l l l
SE 8 pole l l l l l l l l
SESC 12 pole l l l l l l l l l l l l
DEHS 14 pole l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SEHS 14 pole l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ai3160

Regulation card
XE CONNECTOR PIN (RV33-3)

Shielded 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Encoder type
cable
6 pole l l l l l l
TERMINALS XS connector
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
RxA RxB
SEHiperface 0V +5V
TxA TxB
connect connect
2 pole l l l l
with pin 8 with pin 9
ai3161L
Note: - In this case the cable must be split in two
Regulation card + Expansion card (EXP-RES)
XFR CONNECTOR PIN (EXP-RES)

Shielded
Encoder type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
cable
Sin+ Sin- Cos+ Cos- Rot- Rot+
RES 6 pole l l l l l l
Regulation card + Option card (APC100y with E-ABS)
XE CONNECTOR PIN (RV33-1)

Shielded 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Encoder type
cable
8 pole l l l l l l l l
TERMINALS application card (APC100y)
SExtern 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DExtern
CK- CK+ EQP DT- DT+ Gnd 0V
4 pole l l l l
ai3160L
Note: - In this case the cable must be split in two
- For EQP, Gnd and 0V terminals refers to card manuals
Requirements:
Sinusoidal encoders (XE connector on Regulation card)

Max. frequency ______________ 80 kHz (select the appropriate number of pulses
depending on required max. speed )
Number of pulses per revolution __ min 512, max 9999 (see table below)
Channels ___________________ two-channel, differential
Input Voltage ________________ 1 V pp
Power supply ________________ + 5 V / +8V (Internal supply) *
Load capacity _______________ > 8.3 mA pp per channel (input resistance = 124 Ohms).
Cable max. _________________ 500 feet (150 m), screened, 4 twisted pairs.
Configure drive software for the signal amplitude range of the encoder in use (STARTUP /
Startup config / Encoders config / Std sin enc Vp)

Speed D reference Max number of encoder
Recommended min number of encoder pulses (ppr)
resolution (rpm) pulses (ppr)
0.003125 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096
0.125 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024
0.25 512 512 512 1024 1024 1024 80kHz* 60/FSS
0.5 512 512 512 1024 1024 1024
1 512 512 512 1024 1024 1024
Mot.pole pairs (rpm@50Hz) 1(3000) 2(1500) 3(1000) 4(750) 5(600) 6(500)
Mot.pole pairs (rpm@60Hz) 1(3600) 2(1800) 3(1200) 4(900) 5(720) 6(600) (FSS=Full scale speed)
Digital encoders (XE connector on Regulation card)

Type ______________________ standard and inverted signal
Max. frequency ______________ 150 kHz (select the appropriate number of pulses
depending on required max. speed )
Number of pulses per revolution __ min 512, max 9999 (see table below)
Channels ___________________ - two-channel, differential A+ / A-, B+ / B-, C+ / C-. An encoder
loss detection is possible via firmware setting.
- two channel, (A,B). Encoder loss detection is not possible.
Input Voltage ________________ 5V
Power supply ________________ + 5 V / +8V (Internal supply) *
Load capacity _______________ > 4.5 mA / 6.8 ... 10 mA per channel
* Via keypad (STARTUP / Startup config / Encoder config) it is possible to select 4 different
values of internal encoder supply voltage to compensate the voltage reduction due to encoder
cable length and load current encoder.
Selection available, according to S28 jumper, are: 5.41V, 5.68V, 5.91V, 6.18V and 8.16V,
8.62V, 9.00V, 9.46V via Std enc supply parameter.
Speed D reference Max number of encoder

Recommended min number of encoder pulses (ppr) pulses (ppr)
resolution (rpm)
0.003125 512 512 512 1024 1024 1024
0.125 256 512 512 1024 1024 1024
0.25 256 512 512 1024 1024 1024 150kHz* 60/FSS
0.5 256 512 512 1024 1024 1024
1 256 512 512 1024 1024 1024
Mot.pole pairs (rpm@50Hz) 1(3000) 2(1500) 3(1000) 4(750) 5(600) 6(500)
Mot.pole pairs (rpm@60Hz) 1(3600) 2(1800) 3(1200) 4(900) 5(720) 6(600) (FSS=Full scale speed)
Encoder power supply test (if the internal supply +5V is used)
During the start up of the drive:
- verify the encoder power supply to the encoders terminals with all the
encoders channels connected
- via Std enc supply parameter set the appropriate voltage if the encoder
supply characteristic (example: +5V 5%) is out of range.
Terminals for external encoder connections
Male terminals type: ___________ 15 poles high density (VGA type)

Connector cover: _____________ Standard 9 poles low profile (Example manufacturer code: AMP
0-748676-1, 3M 3357-6509)
XE XS
11 15
6 9
6 10
1 5 1 5

The connection with the drive is through a 15 poles high density sub-D
connector (VGA type). Please note that it is mandatory to use a shielded
cable with al least 80 % coverage. The shield should be connected to ground
on both sides.
NOTE! For synchronous brushless firmware it is possible to use only encoder having
pulses per revolution equal to number that is power of 2.
Example: 512 ppr, 1024 ppr, 2048 ppr, etc.
Table 4.5.4: Assignment of the High Density XE Connector for a Sinusoidal or a Digital
Encoder
Designation Function I/O Max. voltage Max. current

Channel B- 5 V digital or 10 mA digital or
PIN 1 ENC B- I
Incremental encoder signal B negative 1 V pp analog 8.3 mA analog
PIN 2 +8V Encoder supply voltage (see table 4.5.3) O +8 V 200 mA
Channel C+ 5 V digital or 10 mA digital or
PIN 3 ENC C+ I
Incremental encoder signal Index positive 1 V pp analog 8.3 mA analog
Channel C- 5 V digital or 10 mA digital or
PIN 4 ENC C- I
Incremental encoder signal Index negative 1 V pp analog 8.3 mA analog
Channel A+ 5 V digital or 10 mA digital or
PIN 5 ENC A+ I
Incremental encoder signal A positive 1 V pp analog 8.3 mA analog
Channel A- 5 V digital or 10 mA digital or
PIN 6 ENC A- I
Incremental encoder signal A negative 1 V pp analog 8.3 mA analog
PIN 7 GND Reference point for +5V encoder supply voltage O
Channel B+ 5 V digital or 10 mA digital or
PIN 8 ENC B+ I
Incremental encoder signal B positive 1 V pp analog 8.3 mA analog
PIN 9 AUX+ +5V encoder supply voltage (see table 4.5.3) O +5 V 200 mA
Channel HALL1 + / SIN+ 5 V digital or 10 mA digital or
PIN 10 HALL 1+/SIN+ I
Hall 1 positive / Analog encoder Sin positive 1 V pp analog 8.3 mA analog
Channel HALL 1- / SIN- 5 V digital or 10 mA digital or
PIN 11 HALL 1-/SIN- I
Hall 1 negative / Analog encoder Sin negative 1 V pp analog 8.3 mA analog
Channel HALL 2+ / COS+ 5 V digital or 10 mA digital or
PIN 12 HALL 2+/COS+ I
Hall 2 positive / Analog encoder Cos positive 1 V pp analog 8.3 mA analog
Channel HALL 2- / COS- 5 V digital or 10 mA digital or
PIN 13 HALL 2-/COS- I
Hall 2 negative / Analog encoder Cos negative 1 V pp analog 8.3 mA analog
Channel HALL 3 + 5 V digital or
PIN 14 HALL 3+ I 10 mA digital
Hall 3 positive 1 V pp analog
Channel HALL 3 - 5 V digital or
PIN 15 HALL 3- I 10 mA digital
Hall 3 negative 1 V pp analog
ai3140L
4.5.1 XFR Connector Assignments (on optional EXP-RES Expansion

Board for Resolver)
The connection with the drive is through a 15 poles high density sub-D
connector (VGA type). Please note that for resolver feedback it is mandatory
to use a twisted pair cable with shields on each pair and a global shield.
The shield should be connected to ground on both sides.

Assignment Function I/O Max. voltage Max.current
Pin 1 2 - - - - -
Pin 3 RES-SINP Input sin + I 1 V pp analog 3.8 mA analog
Pin 4 RES-SINN Input sin - I 1 V pp analog 3.8 mA analog
Pin 5 RES-COSP Input cos + I 1 V pp analog 3.8 mA analog
Pin 6 RES-COSN Input cos - I 1 V pp analog 3.8 mA analog
Pin 7 9 - - - - -
Pin 10 RES-ROTN Excitation - Output O 6 Volts 50 mA rms max
Pin 11 14 - - - - -
Pin 15 RES-ROTP Excitation + Output O 6 Volts 50 mA rms max
ai3140ER
WARNING! The pins number 1, 2, 7...9, 11...14 are reserved.
NOTE! Refer to EXP-RES manual (code 1S5E66) for more details.
4.5.2 Encoder Simulation

The expansion board EXP-RES provides one incremental encoder output,
with TTL Line Driver levels, that can be used for simulation of a servomotor
feedback device.
This function is performed by the microprocessor and it is possible to
simulate an encoder output with a programmable number of pulses/rev.
The output interface is optically isolated and therefore the encoder output
must be supplied with an external 15.24 V supply that can be connected to
terminals 96 and 97 of the EXP-RES expansion board.
The encoder output signals are available on the XFO connector with the
following connection diagram:
Designation Function
Pin 1 B- Digital Encoder Simulation. B - channel
Pin 2
Pin 3 C+ Digital Encoder Simulation.C + channel
Pin 4 C- Digital Encoder Simulation. C- channel
Pin 5 A+ Digital Encoder Simulation. A+ channel
Pin 6 A- Digital Encoder Simulation. A - channel
Pin 7
Pin 8 B+ Digital Encoder Simulation. B+ channel
Pin 9 .. 15
ai3307L
NOTE! Jumper S2 and S3 on the EXP-RES optional board must be OFF.
NOTE! To enable encoder simulation set Rep/sim encoder parameter.
4.5.3 XE1/XE Connector Assignments (on RV33-4NV and optional EXP-

ABS-AVy cards)
The connection with the drive is through two 15 poles high density sub-D
connector (VGA type) :
- XE on RV33-4NV card
- XE1 on optional EXP-ENDAT-AVy card

D-SUB 15 poles
XE - RV33-4NV card (on AVyL Drive)
ENDAT Encoder
D-SUB 15 poles
XE1 - EXP-ENDAT-AVy Card (on AVyL Drive)
XE Connector (RV33-4NV card)
Pin number Signal Description

1 B- Incremental encoder B- signal
2 PTC Motor thermal protection signal (referred to GND)
34 Reserved Do not connect
5 A+ Incremental encoder A+ signal
6 A- Incremental encoder A- signal
7 GND Ground of encoder supply voltage
8 B+ Incremental encoder B+ signal
9 ALIM Encoder supply voltage
10 15 Reserved Do not connect
XE1 Connector (EXP-ENDAT-Avy card)
Pin number Signal Description

1 10 Reserved Do not connect
11 CLK+ Encoder CLOCK+ signal
12 CLK- Encoder CLOCK- signal
13 DT+ Encoder DATA+ signal
14 DT- Encoder DATA- signal
15 Reserved Do not connect
ai3308L

4.6 Connection Diagrams
Figure 4.6.1: Standard Connection Diagram
K1M
K2M
K3M
RV33 regulation board
Safety contacts
12 Dig.Inp. 0 (Enable)
Start fwd
13 Dig.Inp. 1
Start rev
14 Dig.Inp. 2
15 Dig.Inp. 3 D8R4
16 COM DI/0 expansion
18 0V24 card
19 +24 VDC
Mlt spd s 0
36 Dig.Inp. 4
Mlt spd s 1
37 Dig.Inp. 5 26
Mlt spd s 2 External
38 Dig.Inp. 6 27 BU control
Fault reset
39 Dig.Inp. 7
Drive ready XE
41 Dig.Out. 2
Speed is 0
15
5
42 Dig.Out. 3
10
46 Supply DO
11
6
1
Drive 80 Dig.
OK 82 Out. 0
Brake 83 Dig. 78
cont Out. 1 R1K
mon 85 79
Power Board EM
EMS signal
C EM
D FEXT Internal / External
BR1 FEXT fan control logic (*)
K3M
K2M
L1
5
U1/L1 U2/T1
MAINS M
3
V1/L2 V2/T2 E
3 Ph~ 3 Ph~
1
W1/L3 W2/T3
K1M
PE1/ PE2/
F1
Brake
FR K3M K2M
(*): - Fans will always start when drive
is enabled. - +
- Fans will stop when drive is
Brake 83
disabled after a period of 300sec FR(R)

85
and heatsink temperature is below

L01
mon
cont
L02
60 degrees.
NOTE! Fan Control Logic function (only for sizes AVy2040AC4 / BR4 up to
AVy5550AC4 / BR4)

4.6.1 Expansion Card Connection
Figure 4.6.2: Common Output Contactors Management
D8R4 Expansion Card (optional)

Output contactor configuration:
+24VDC 101
O24V 100 U2/T1
M
Dig.Inp. 0X 31 V2/T2
3 Ph~
Dig.Inp. 1X 32 W2/T3
Dig.Inp. 2X 33
K3M
K2M
Dig.Inp. 3X 34
COM DI 0X...3X 35
Dig.Inp. 4X 36
Dig.Inp. 5X 37
Dig.Inp. 6X 38 L01
Dig.Inp. 7X 39 Emergency
COM DI 4X...7X 40 OFF
Dig. 112
Out. 111
0X Run cont mon
114
212
Dig. Out. 1X K2M K3M
211 Up cont mon
214
L00
312
Dig. Out. 2X 311 Down cont mon
314
412
Dig. Out. 3X 411
Door open mon
414
NOTES! Phase sequence does not change. This configuration must be used in FOC & BRS modes.
Expansion board digital outputs must be enabled via software through menu
I/O CONFIG \ Digital Outputs\ Exp dig out en
In this example an expansion board is used, but same functionality can be accomplished also
using standard digital outputs.

Figure 4.6.3: Separate Output Contactors Management
Output contactor configuration:

D8R4 Expansion Card (optional)
K2M
+24VDC 101
O24V 100
Dig.Inp. 0X 31
Dig.Inp. 1X 32 M
K3M
3 Ph~
Dig.Inp. 2X 33 U2/T1
Dig.Inp. 3X 34
V2/T2
COM DI 0X...3X 35
W2/T3
Dig.Inp. 4X 36
Dig.Inp. 5X 37
KG
Dig.Inp. 6X 38
L01
Dig.Inp. 7X 39
Emergency
COM DI 4X...7X 40
OFF
Dig. 112
Out. Run cont mon
111
0X L00
114 KG
212
Dig. Out. 1X 211 L00
Up cont mon
214 K2M
312
Dig. Out. 2X 311
Down cont mon
314 K3M
412 L00
Dig. Out. 3X 411
Door open mon
414
NOTES! Phase sequence changes according to direction selected. This configuration can be used in
VF & SLS modes only.
Expansion board digital outputs must be enabled via software through menu
I/O CONFIG \ Digital Outputs\ Exp dig out en
In this example an expansion board is used, but same functionality can be accomplished also
using standard digital outputs.

4.7 Circuit Protection
4.7.1 External Fuses for the Power Section
The inverter must be fused on the AC Input side. Use fast fuses only.
NOTE! Connections with three-phase inductance on AC input are not essential but
will improve the DC link capacitors lifetime.
Table 4.7.1.1: External Fuse Types for AC Input Side

DC link F1 - Fuses type (code)
Drive type capacitors life Europe USA
time [h] Connections without three-phase reactor on AC input
1007
25000 GRD2/10 (F4D13) or Z14GR10 (F4M03) A70P10 FWP10 (S7G49)
1015
1022 25000
GRD2/16 (F4D14) or Z14GR16 (F4M05) A70P20 FWP20 (S7G48)
1030 10000
2040 25000 GRD2/20 (F4D15) or Z14GR20 (F4M07) A70P20 FWP20 (S7G48)
2075 10000 GRD3/35 (F4D20) or Z22GR40 A70P35 FWP35 (S7G86)
3110 25000
Z22GR63 (F4M17) A70P60 FWP60 (S7G88)
3150 10000
For these types an external reactor is mandatory if the AC input impedence is equal or less
4185 81600 10000
than 1%
Connections with three-phase reactor on AC input
1007 50000
A70P10 FWP10 (S7G49)
1015 50000 GRD2/10 (F4D13) or Z14GR10 (F4M03)
1022 50000 A70P10 FWP10 (S7G49)
1030 50000
GRD2/16 (F4D14) or Z14GR16 (F4M05) A70P20 FWP20 (S7G48)
2040 50000
3110 50000
Z22GR63 (F4M17) A70P60 FWP60 (S7G88)
3150 50000
4185 4221 25000
S00f1/80/80A/660V or Z22gR80 A70P80 FWP80 (S7G54)
4300 25000
S00f1/80/100A/660V or M00f01/100A/660V
4301 - 4370 25000 A70P100 FWP100 (S7G55)
(F4G18)
4371 25000 S00f1/80/125A/660V A70P150 FWP150 (S7G56)
5450 25000 S00f1/80/160A/660V or M00f01/160A/660V
A70P175 FWP175 (S7G57)
5550 25000 (F4E15)
6750 25000 S00f1/110/250A/660V or M1f1/250A/660V
A70P300 FWP300 (S7G60)
7900 25000 (F4G28)
71100 25000
71320 25000 S2f1/110/400A/660V or M2f1/400A/660V (F4G34) A70P400 FWP400 (S7G62)
81600 25000
TADL4120
Fuse manufacturers: Type GRD2... (E27), GRD3... (E33), M... (blade fuses),
Z14... 14 x 51 mm, Z22... 22 x 58 mm, S.... Jean Mller, Eltville
A70P... Gould Shawmut
FWP... Bussmann
NOTE! The technical data of the fuses, e.g. dimensions, weights, heat dissipation,
auxiliary contactors, are found in the manufacturers data sheets.

4.7.2 External Fuses for the Power Section DC Input Side
Use the following fuses when a SR-32 Line Regen is used (see SR-32
instruction book for more details).
Table 4.7.2.1: External Fuses Type for DC Input Side
Europe USA
Drive type
Fuses type Code Fuses type Code
1007
Z14GR10 F4M03 A70P10 FWP10A14F S7G49
1015
1022 Z14GR16 F4M05 A70P20 FWP20A14F S7G48
1030 Z14GR20 F4M07 A70P20-1 FWP20A14F S7G48
2040
Z14GR32 F4M11 A70P25-1 FWP25A14F S7G51
2055
2075 Z14GR50 F4M15 A70P50 FWP50B S7G53
3110 Z22GR63 F4M17 A70P60-4 FWP60B S7I34
3150
S00F1/80/80A/660V F4M19 A70P80 FWP80 S7G54
4185 - 4220
4221 - 4300 S00F1/80/100A/660V F4G18 A70P100 FWP100 S7G55
4301 - 4370 S00F1/80/125A/660V F4G20 A70P150 FWP150 S7G56
4371 - 5450 S00F1/80/160A/660V F4E15 A70P175 FWP175 S7G57
5550 S00F1/80/200A/660V F4G23 A70P200 FWP200 S7G58
6750 S1F1/110/250A/660V F4G28 A70P250 FWP250 S7G59
7900 S1F1/110/315A/660V F4G30 A70P350 FWP350 S7G61
71100 S1F1/110/400A/660V F4G34 A70P400 FWP400 S7G62
71320 S1F1/110/500A/660V F4E30 A70P500 FWP500 S7G63
81600 S1F1/110/500A/660V F4E30 A70P500 FWP500 S7G63
TAVy4140
Fuse manufacturers: Type Z14..., Z22, S00 ..., S1... Jean Mller, Eltville
A70P... Gould Shawmut
FWP... Bussmann
NOTE! The technical data of the fuses, e.g. dimensions, weights, heat dissipation,
auxiliary contactors, are found in the manufacturers data sheets.
4.7.3 Internal Fuses

Table 4.7.3.1: Internal Fuses
Drive type Designation Protection of Fuse (source) Fitted on:

2A fast 5 x 20 mm (Bussmann: Power card PV33-4-
4185 to SF523220 or Schurter: "D" and higher
F1 +24V
81600 FSF0034.1519 Power card PV33-5-
or Littlefuse: 217002) "B" and higher
Regulation card
F1 +24V Resettable fuse
RV33
1007 to
RS485 serial
81600 Regulation card
F2 interface Resettable fuse
RV33-4 and higher
supply circuit
2.5A 6.3x32
6750 to Fans (Bussmann: MDL 2.5, Gould Bottom cover (power
F3
71320 transformer Shawmut: GDL1-1/2, Siba: 70 059 terminals side)
76.2,5 , Schurter: 0034.5233)
tadl0170

4.8 Chokes / Filters
4.8.1 AC Input Chokes
A three-phase inductance is strongly reccomended to be connected on the
AC Input side in order to:
- limit the input RMS current of ARTDriveL series drives.
- prolong the life time of the DC link capacitors and the reliability of the
input rectifier.
- reduce the AC mains harmonic distortion
- reduce the problems due to a low impedence AC mains ( 1%).
The inductance can be provided by an AC Input choke or an AC Input
transformer.
Table 4.8.1.1: 3-Phase AC Input Chokes
Drive type Three-phase choke type Code
1007 LR3y-1007 S7AAD
1015 LR3y-1015 S7AAE
1022 LR3y-1022 S7AAF
1030 LR3y-1030 S7AB3
2040 LR3y-2040 S7AAG
2055 LR3y-2055 S7AB5
2075 LR3y-2075 S7AB6
3110 LR3y-3110 S7AB7
3150 LR3y-3150 S7AB8
4185 - 4221 LR3-022 S7FF4
4300-4301 LR3-030 S7FF3
4370-4371 LR3-037 S7FF2
5450
LR3-055 S7FF1
5550
6750
LR3-090 S7D19
7900
71100
71320 LR3-160 S7D40
81600
TAVy4135
NOTE! The current rating of these inductors (reactors) is based on the nominal
current of standard motors, listed in table 2.3.4.1.
4.8.2 Output Chokes

The AVy Drive can be used with general purpose standard motors or with
motors specially designed for Drive use. The latter usually have a higher
isolation rating to better withstand PWM voltage.
Follow example of reference regulation:

Low voltage general purpose standard motors
VDE 0530: max peak voltage 1 kV
max. dV/dt 500 V/us
NEMA MG1 part 30: max. peak voltage 1 kV
min. rise time 2 us
Low voltage motors for use on inverters
NEMA MG1 part 31: max. peak voltage 1.6 kV
min. rise time 0.1 us.

Motors designed for use with Adjustable Frequency Drives do not require
any specific filtering of the voltage waveform from the Drive. For general
purpose motors and using drives up to 2075 size, especially with long
cable runs (typically over 100 m [328 feet]) an output choke is
recommended to mantain the voltage waveform within the specified limits.
Suggested choke ratings and part numbers are listed in table 5.7.2.1.
The rated current of the filters should be approx. 20% above the rated
current of the frequency Drive in order to take into account additional
losses due to PWM waveform.
Table 4.8.2.1: Recommended Output Chokes

Drive type Three-phase choke type Code
1007
1015
LU3-003 S7FG2
1022
1030
2040
LU3-005 S7FG3
2055
2075
LU3-011 S7FG4
3110
3150 LU3-015 S7FM2
4185 - 4221 LU3-022 S7FH3
4300 - 4301 LU3-030 S7FH4
4370 - 4371 LU3-037 S7FH5
5450
LU3-055 S7FH6
5550
6750
LU3-090 S7FH7
7900
71100
71320 LU3-160 S7FH8
81600
TAVy4150
NOTE! When the drive is operated at the rated current and at 50 Hz, the output
chokes cause a voltage drop of approx. 2% of the output voltage.
4.8.3 Interference Suppression Filters

The inverters of AVy series must be equipped with an external EMI filter in
order to reduce the radiofrequency emissions on to the mains line. The
filter selection is depending on the drive size and the installation
environment. For this purpose see the EMC Guidelines instruction book.
In the Guide it is also indicated how to install the cabinet (connection of
filter and mains reactors, cable shield, groundig, etc.) in order to make it
EMC compliant according the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC. The document
describes the present situation concerning the EMC standards and the
compliance tests made on the Gefran-Siei drives.
NOTE! For the use of output sinusoidal filters, please contact the factory.

4.9. Braking Units
In oversynchronous or regenerative operation, the frequency-controlled
three-phase motor feeds energy back to the DC link circuit via the drive.
This creates an increase in the intermediate circuit voltage.
Braking units (BU) are therefore used in order to prevent the DC voltage
rising to an impermissible value. When used, these activate a braking resistor
that is connected in parallel to the capacitors of the intermediate circuit. The
feedback energy is converted to heat via the braking resistor (RBR), thus
providing very short deceleration times and restricted four-quadrant operation.
Figure 4.9.1: Operation with Braking Unit (Principle)
E
_ R BR
U ZK
M
3
BU
Drive sizes 1007 up to 3150 have, as standard configuration, an internal

braking unit. Drive sizes 4220 up to 5550 can have an optional internal
braking unit (see section 2.1.2 Inverter type designation) factory mounted.
All the standard AVy... drive can be equipped with an external braking unit
(BU-32... or BUy-...) connected to the terminals C and D.
NOTE! When the internal braking unit is present, or when circuit terminals C and D
are connected to external devices, the AC Input must be protected with
superfast semiconductor fuses! Observe the mounting instruction concerned.
For braking resistor connection (terminals BR1 and C) a twisted cable has
to be used. In case the braking resistor is supplied with thermal protection
(klixon), it may be connected to the "External fault" drive input.
The braking resistors can be subject to unforeseen overloads due to possible

failures. The resistors have to be protected using thermal protection devices.
Such devices do not have to interrupt the circuit where the resistor is inserted
but their auxiliary contact must interrupt the power supply of the drive
Warning power section.
In case the resistor foresees the precence of a protection contact, such contact has
to be used together with the one belonging to the thermal protection device.
4.9.1 Internal Braking Unit

The Internal Braking Unit is included as standard (up to size 3150). The
braking resistor is optional and has always to be mounted externally. For
parameter setting refer to parameter list. The figure below shows the
configuration for internal brake unit operation.
Figure 4.9.1.1: Connection with Internal Braking Unit and External Braking Resistor
Braking
Unit
W1/L3
W2/T3
U1/L1
U2/T1
V1/L2
V2/T2
BR1
PE1 /
D
PE2/
C
F1 Braking AC Motor
resistor
3Ph~

4.9.2 External Braking Resistor
Recommended resistors for use with internal braking unit:
Table 4.9.2.1: Lists and Technical Data of the External Standard Resistors
Inverter Resistor PNBR RBR EBR
Type Type [kW] [Ohm] [kJ]
1007 MRI/T600 100R 0.6 100 22

1015
1022
1030
2040
2055
MRI/T900 68R 0.9 68 33
2075
3110 MRI/T1300 49R 1.3 49 48
3150 MRI/T2200 28R 2.2 28 82
4185 - 4221 MRI/T4000 15R4 4 15.4 150
4300 - 4301 MRI/T4000 11R6 4 11.6 150
4370 - 4371 MRI/T4000 11R6 4 11.6 150
5450 MRI/T8000 7R7 8 7.7 220
5550 MRI/T8000 7R7 8 7.7 220
TADL0250
Parameters description:
PNBR Nominal power of the braking resistor

RBR Braking resistor value
EBR Max surge energy which can be dissipated by the resistor
PPBR Peak power applied to the braking resistor
TBRL Maximum braking time in condition of limit operating cycle
(braking power = PPBR with typical triangular profile)
EBR
TBRL= 2 =[s]
PPBR
Figure 4.9.2.2: Limit Operating Braking Cycle with Typical Triangular Power Profile
n,P
PPBR
EBR
TBRL t
TCL

TCL Minimum cycle time in condition of limit operating cycle
(braking power = PPBR with typical triangular profile)
1 PPBR
TCL= TBRL =[s]
2 PNBR
The BU overload alarm occurs if the duty cycle exceeds the maximum
data allowed in order to prevent possible damage to the resistor.
Resistor model: Standard resistor data

Example code: MRI/T900 68R
MRI = resistor type
900 = nominal power (900 W)
T= with safety thermostat
68R = resistor value (68 ohm)
NOTE! The suggested match of resistor-model and inverter-size, allows a braking

stop at nominal torque with duty cycle TBR / TC = 20%
Where: TBR = Braking time, TC = Cycle time
Figure 4.9.2.3: Braking Cycle with TBR / TC = 20%

P,n
TBR t
TC
The standard resistor can be used for couplings, different from the ones
above reported. These resistors, whose technical data are reported in the
table 5.8.2.1, have been dimensioned to tolerate an overload equal to 4
time their nominal power for 10 seconds.
In any event they can tolerate also an overload, whose energy dissipation
is the same of the maximum power level defined by:
2
VBR [V]
PPBR= =[w]
RBR [ohm]
Where:
VBR = braking unit threshold (see table 4.9.2.2)
With reference to the figure 4.9.2.4, where the power profile is the typical
triangular one, the following example can be taken into consideration (see
also table 4.9.2.1).

Resistor model: MRI/T600 100R
Nominal power PNBR = 600 [W]
Maximum energy EBR = 4 x 600[W] x 10[s] = 24000[J]
Inverter mains supply = 460V
Voltage threshold: VBR =780V
VBR 2 780 2 E BR 24000
P PBR = = = 6084 [W] T BRL = 2 = 2 = 7.8[s]
R BR 100 P PBR 6084
It is necessary to consider the following relation:
A) If TBR EBR / PNBR verify:

1) PMB 2 * EBR / TBR Where: PMB is the average power of the
cycle (see.fig. 4.9.2.4)
PMB . TBR
2) PNBR
2 TC
The average power of the cycle must not be higher than the
nominal power of the resistor.
B) If TBR > EBR / PNBR that is to say, in case of very long braking
time, it must be dimensioned PMB PNBR
Figure 4.9.2.4: Generic Braking Cycle with Triangular Profile
n,P
PPBR
PMB
TBR t
TC
If one of the above mentioned rules is not respected, it is necessary to

increase the tested power of the resistor, respecting the limit of the internal
braking unit (reported intable 4.9.2.3), or an external BU if necessary.
In order to protect these resistors from dangerous overload, software
overload control logic is also available (STARTUP / Startup config / BU
protection).
The default parameters in the drive match the recomended resistor paring
as for the table 4.9.2.1.
For no-standard paring resistor see STARTUP / Startup config / BU
protection.

Table 4.9.2.2: Braking Thresholds for Different Mains
Braking threshold
Mains voltage
VBR [V]
230Vac 400
400Vac 680
460Vac/480Vac 780
avy4200
When the duty cycle exceeds the data entered, the alarm BU overload
automatically occurs in order to prevent possible damages to the resistor.
The following table can be used to choose an external resistor, different
from the standard series.
Table 4.9.2.3: Technical Data of the Internal Braking Units
Inverter Minimum
type IRMS IPK T RBR
[A] [A] [s] [ohm]
1007
1015
1022 4.1 7.8 19 100
1030
2040
2055
6.6 12 16 67
2075
3110 12 22 17 36
3150 17 31 16 26
4185 4221 18 52 42 15
4300 - 4301 37 23
78 10
4370 - 4371 29 37
5450
50 104 22 7.5
5550
6750
7900
71100 External braking unit (optional)
71320
81600
Tavy4210
IRMS Nominal current of the braking unit

IPK Peak current deliverable for 60 seconds max.
T Minimum cycle time for a working at IPK for 10 seconds
Generally the following condition must be satisfed

IRMS 1 . PPBR . T BR
2 RBR TC
Each drive is provided of the terminals 26 and 27 which allows control of
one or more external braking units, parallel connected. The drive will act
as Master and the external braking units BU32 must be configured as Slave.
In this way it will be possible to utilize the internal I2 t protection.
If more than one BU is used, each BU shall be connected to a single resistor.
All Braking Unit shall be the same model and have same type resistor.

4.10 Buffering the Regulator Supply
The power supply of the control section is provided by a switched mode
power supply unit (SMPS) from the DC Link circuit. The drive is disabled
as soon as the voltage of the DC Link circuit is below the threshold value
(UBuff). The regulator supply is buffered by the energy of the DC Link circuit
until the limit value (Umin) is reached. The buffer time is determined by the
capacitance of the DC Link capacitors. The minimum values are shown in
the table below. The buffer time (tBuff) can be extended (only on 11 kW
drive and higher) by connecting external capacitors in parallel (on terminal
C and D).
Table 4.10.1: DC Link Buffer Time
Buffer time tBuff Maximum Maximum

Internal (minimum value) with the permissible power required
Inverter type capacitance internal capacitance at : external by switched
AC Input AC Input AC Input capacitance mode power
Cstd voltage =230V voltage =400V voltage =460V supply
[F] [s] [s] [s] Cext [F] PSMPS [W]
1007 220 0.02 0.165 0.25 0 65
1015 220 0.02 0.165 0.25 0 65
1022 330 0.03 0.24 0.37 0 65
1030 330 0.03 0.24 0.37 0 65
2040 830 0.08 0.62 0.95 0 65
2055 830 0.08 0.62 0.95 0 65
2075 830 0.08 0.62 0.95 0 65
3110 1500 0.28 1.12 1.72 1500 65
3150 1500 0.28 1.12 1.72 1500 65
4185 ... 4221 1800 0.58 1.54 2.3 4500 70
4300 - 4301 2200 0.62 1.88 2.8 4500 70
4370 - 4371 3300 0.72 2.83 4.2 4500 70
5450 4950 0.87 4.24 6.3 4500 70
5550 4950 0.87 4.24 6.3 4500 70
6750 6600 0.61 5.6 8.1 0 70
7900 6600 0.61 5.6 8.1 0 70
71100 9900 0.91 8.4 12.1 0 70
71320 14100 1.30 12.8 17.2 0 70
81600 14100 1.30 12.8 17.2 0 70
avy4220L
SMPS = Switched Mode Power Supply

Figure 4.10.1: Buffering the Regulator Supply by Means of Additional Intermediate
Circuit Capacitors
1 = 1 + 1
W1/L3
W2/T3
U1/L1
U2/T1
V1/L2
V2/T2
BR1
PE1 /
D
PE2/
C
Cx C1x C2x
F1
CX 900 VDC or
3Ph~
NOTE! When connecting the intermediate circuit terminals C and D the AC Input
side must be protected with superfast semiconductor fuses!
Formula for calculating the size of the external capacitors:
6
2 P SMPS t Buff 10
Cext = - C std
U2 Buff - U2min fA018
Cext, Cstd [F]

PSMPS [W] UBuff = 400 V at ULN = 400 V
tBuff [s] UBuff = 460 V at ULN = 460 V
UBuff, Umin [V] Umin = 250 V
Calculation example
An AVy4220 drive is operated with an AC Input supply ULN = 400 V. A
voltage failure buffer is required for max. 1.5 s.
PSMPS 70 W tBuff 1.5 s

UBuff 400 V Umin 250 V
Cstd 1800 F
2 . 70 W . 1.5 s . 106 m F / F
C ext = - 1800mF = 2154 mF - 1800 mF = 354mF
(400 V) 2 - (250 V) 2

4.11 Discharge Time of the DC-Link
Table 4.11.1: DC Link Discharge Time
Type I2N Time (seconds) Type I2N Time (seconds)

1007 2.1 4300 - 4301 58 60
90
1015 3.5 4370 - 4371 76 90
1022 4.9 5450 90
150
1030 6.5 5550 110
2040 8.3 6750 142
2055 11 205 7900 180 120
2075 15.4 71100 210
3110 21.6 71320 250
220
3150 28.7 81600 310
Tavy4250
4185 - 4221 42 60
This is the minimum time that must be elapsed when an AVy Drive is
disconnected from the AC Input before an operator may service parts inside
the drive to avoid electric shock hazard.
CONDITION The value consider the time to turn-off for a drive supplied at 480Vac
+10%, without any options (the charge for the switching supply is the
regulation card, the keypad and the 24Vdc fans if mounted).
The drive is disabled. This represents the worst case condition.

Chapter 5 - Serial Interface Description
The RS 485 serial interface enables data transfer via a loop made of two
symmetrical, twisted conductors with a common shield. The maximum
transmission distance is 1200 m (3936 feet) with a transfer rate of up to
38,400 KBaud. The transmission is carried out via a differential signal. RS
485 interfaces are bus-compatible in half-duplex mode, i.e. sending and
receiving take place in sequence. Up to 31 ARTDriveL devices (up to 128
address selectable) can be networked together via the RS 485 interface.
Address setting is carried out via the Slave address parameter. Further
information concerning the parameters to be transfered, their type and value
range is given in paragraph 9.2, COMMUNICATION \ RS 485.
Figure 5.1: RS485 Serial Interface
XS
0VS
+5 V S
470 R
470 R
100 R
150 R
S5 S6
S41 TxA/RxA
TxB/RxB
S40 +5 V
PE
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
RS485
The RS 485 on the ARTDriveL series devices is located on the Regulation

card in the form of a 9-pole SUB-D socket connector (XS).The
communication may be with or without galvanic isolation: when using
galvanic isolation an external power supply is necessary (+5V).
Communication without galvanic isolation is suggested only in case of
temporary connections for setup with one drive connected. The differential
signal is transferred via PIN 3 (TxA/RxA) and PIN 7 (TxB/RxB). Bus
terminating resistors must be connected at the physical beginning and end
of an RS 485 bus in order to prevent signal reflection. The bus terminating
resistors on ARTDriveL drives are connected via jumpers S5 and S6. This
enables a direct point-to-point connection with a PLC or PC.
NOTE! Ensure that only the first and last drop of an RS 485 bus have a bus
terminating resistor (S5 and S6 mounted). In all other cases (within the
line) jumpers S5 and S6 must not be mounted. With S40 and S41 mounted
the drive supply the serial line. This modality is allowed on point-to-point
connection without galvanic isolation only.
ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Chapter 5 Serial Inreface Description 67

NOTE! A connection point to point can be done using PCI-485 option interface
(S40 and S41 mounted).
For multidrop connection (two or more drive), an external power supply is
necessary (pin 5 / 0V and pin 9 / +5V).
Pins 6 and 8 are reserved for use with the PCI-485 interface card.
When connecting the serial interface ensure that:

- only shielded cables are used
- power cables and control cables for contactors/relays are routed
separately
The communication protocol can be chosen between Slink4, Modbus,

Jbus, ISO 1745 or Hiperface through Protocol type parameter
(COMMUNICATION / RS 485 / Protocol type).
5.1 RS 485 Serial Interface Connector Description
Table 5.1.1: Assignment of the Plug XS Connector for the RS 485 Serial Interface
Designation Function I/O Elec. Interface

PIN 1 Internal use
PIN 2 Internal use
PIN 3 RxA/TxA I/O RS485
PIN 4 Internal use
PIN 5 0V (Ground for 5 V) Power supply
PIN 6 Internal use
PIN 7 RxB/TxB I/O RS 485
PIN 8 Internal use
PIN 9 +5 V Power supply
ai4110
I = Input O = Output
68 Chapter 5 Serial Interface Description ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

Chapter 6 - Keypad Operation
The keypad is made of a LCD display with two 16-digit lines, seven LEDs
and nine function keys. It is used:
- to start and stop the drive (this function can be disabled)
- to display the speed, voltage, diagnostics etc. during the operation
- to set parameters and enter commands
The LED module is made of 6 LEDs. It is used to display status and
diagnostic information during the operation. Keypad and LED module can
be installed or removed also while the drive is running.
-Torque +Torque Alarm Enable ZeroSpeed Limit
-Torque Negative torque current
+Torque Positive torque current
Alarm Alarm condition
Enable Drive enable status
ZeroSpeed Speed <=zero speed threshold
Limit Actual current >=current limit
This monitoring module can be upgraded with the keypad with

alphanumeric LCD display
NOTE! a replacement keypad cable longer than 20 cm must be shielded.
6.1 LEDs & Keys

The LEDs present on the keypad are used to quickly diagnose the operating
state of the drive.
Designation Color Function

-Torque yellow the LED is lit when the drive operates with a negative torque
+Torque yellow the LED is lit when the drive operates with a positive torque
ALARM red the LED is lit when the drive signals a trip
ENABLE green the LED is lit when the drive is enabled
Zero speed yellow the LED is lit when motor speed is zero
Limit yellow the LED is lit when the drive operates at a current limit
Shift yellow the LED is lit when the keypad second functions are enabled
ts030g
ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Chapter 6 Keypad Operation 69

Control
Text reference Function
Keys
START key commands the drive to Enable

[START] and Start.(Command select = I O key)
STOP key commands to Stop and disable

[STOP] (Command select = I O key)
Stop key also resets the sequencer after an alarm event
Jog
Motor pot and Jog functions are not available on
[Increase] / [Jog] ARTDriveL version.
Motor pot and Jog functions are not available on

[Decrease] / [Rotation control] ARTDriveL version.
Used to scroll down menu items in menu navigation,

Help picklists in selectors, or digit values in numeric editing.
After pressing shift key, an item-specific information
[Down arrow] / [Help] menu is entered when applicable. Help menu can be
browsed with up/down arrows. Left arrow returns to
normal mode.
Alarm
Used to scroll up menu items in menu navigation,
picklists in selectors, or digit values in numeric editing.
[Up arrow] / [Alarm] After pressing Shift key, the Alarm list display mode
is entered. Active alarms and Alarms pending for
acknowledge can be browsed with up/downs arrows.
Alarms can be acknowledged whit the Enter key. Left
arrow returns to normal mode.
Escape
Used to go up one level in menu navigation; to scroll
[Left arrow] / [Escape] digits in numeric edit mode, to return to normal mode
from alarm list or help modes.
After pressing shift key, it is used to Escape out of
numeric edit or selection with no change.
Home
Used to go down one level in menu navigation; to enter
[Enter] / [Home] Selections or numeric values after editing, to issue
Enter commands, to acknowledge alarms in the Alarm list
mode.
Home second function, return to Monitor menu from
any main menu level.
[Shift] Shift button enables the keypad second functions

Shift
(Rotation control, Jog, Help, Alarm, Escape, Home)
70 Chapter 6 Keypad Operation ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

6.2 Moving Inside a Menu
MAIN MENU
Enter to MONITOR menu
R: S: OUTPUT VOLT AGE

MONITOR 340V
Escape from MONITOR

Scroll Scroll
down up
Enter to
STARTUP menu
R: S: STARTUP
STARTUP Startup config
Escape from
STARTUP
Escape from
STARTUP
R: S: STARTUP
TRAVEL Regulation mode
............................
Enter forSAVE PAR AMETERS
R: S: STARTUP Busy
SERVICE Save config? Please wait
6.3 Using Keypad Help
SHIFT + HELP
R: S: Output voltage Help max value

MONITOR 0V 0.000
R: S: Output current Help min value

STARTUP 0.00A 0.000
Help mode ZUSWR

---11
ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Chapter 6 Keypad Operation 71

6.4 Drive Main Menu
R: S: Drive status variables

MONITOR
R: S: Drive & Motor initial setup,

STARTUP Lift mechanical data
R: S:
TRAVEL Lift parameters
R: S: Regulator gain & control

REGULATION PARAM parameters
R: S: Input / Output & commands

I/O CONFIG configurations
R: S:
ALARM CONFIG Alarm configurations
Password
LEVEL 1
R: S:
COMMUNICATION Serial link, communication card
R: S:
APPL CARD CONFIG Application card configurations
R: S: Signal compare blocks

CUSTOM FUNCTIONS Programmable block area & PAD
configurations
Password R: S: Service purpose menu with

LEVEL 2 SERVICE password *
* SERVICE menu allows the setting of the password to enable Level 1 drive menus: 12345.
To have the access of Level 1 drive menus, edit 12345 password into Insert Password
parameter and confirm it using Enter button.
NOTE! Level 1 password must be set every recycle drive supply
72 Chapter 6 Keypad Operation ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

Chapter 7 - Commissioning via Keypad
The ARTDrive Lift can operate with advanced Voltage /Frequency control
(as default), Sensorless vector control (open-loop), Field Oriented vector
control (closed-loop) and Brushless.
All the regulation modes have their own-independent parameter sets.
A commissioning executed in one mode should be repeated or transferred
to another regulation mode.
7.1 Commissioning for AVy...AC / AC4 (Asychronous Motors)

Commissioning Set-up Procedure
Step Function Description

Closed-loop - Field Oriented mode (see chapter 7.1.1)
Select the Drive comes factory defaulted to V/f control, change to

1
Regulation mode Field Oriented vector control.
2 Set Drive data Go to Setup mode for drive data parametrization:

Mains voltage, Ambient temp, Switching freq, Speed
reference resolution
3 Set Motor data Go to Setup mode for motor data parametrization:

Rated voltage, Rated frequency, Rated current, Rated
speed, Rated power, Cosphi
4 Run motor Autotune Autotune procedure is a real motor parameters

measurement; two options are available:
- Complete still can be used when motor is coupled to
gearbox, brake is applied and lift car is installed. It could
cause limited shaft rotation when brake is not applied.
- Complete rot can be used when motor is uncoupled
or gearbox does not represent more than 5% load and lift
car is not installed. It causes motor shaft rotation close
to the rated speed.
5 Set all system System mechanical data:

mechanical data Gearbox ratio, Pulley diameter, Full scale speed.
6.1 - 6.1 : Feedback from encoder connected to XE

or Encoder type connector on Regulation card
configuration - 6.2 : Feedback from encoder connected to XFI
6.2 connector on EXP-... optional card
Go to step 6 up to step 9 of chapter 7.1.3
ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Chapter 7 Commissioning 73

Open-loop - Sensorless vector mode (see chapter 7.1.2)
Select the Drive comes factory defaulted to V/f control; Sensorless
1

Regulation mode vector mode selection.
Go to step 2 up to step 9 of chapter 7.1.3
V/f control mode (see chapter 7.1.3)

1 Switch-on Drive comes factory defaulted to V/f control.
2 Set Drive data Go to Setup mode for drive data parametrization:

Mains voltage, Ambient temperature and Switching freq.
3 Set Motor data Go to Setup mode for motor data parametrization:

Rated voltage, Rated frequency, Rated current, Rated
speed, Rated power, Cosphi.
4 Run motor Autotune Autotune procedure is a real motor parameters

measurement; two options are available:
- Complete still can be used when motor is coupled to
gearbox, brake is applied and lift car is installed. It could
cause limited shaft rotation when brake is not applied.
- Complete rot can be used when motor is uncoupled
or gearbox does not represent more than 5% load and lift
car is not installed. It causes motor shaft rotation close
to the rated speed.

mechanical data Gearbox ratio, Pulley dameter, Full scale speed.
Set all system System weights data:

6
weight data Cabin weight, Counter weight, Load weight, Rope weight,
Motor inertia, Gearbox inertia.
7 Set braking unit Braking Unit parameters: Braking unit type (internal /
parameters external), Braking unit resistance, Braking unit power.
8 Set speed profile A binary combination of three digital input allows to select
up to 8 different speed setpoints
9 Set ramp profile Accelerations jerk and decelerations jerk can be set in the ramp
profile
74 Chapter 7 Commissioning ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

NOTE! Drive Startup procedure below take as example an
AVy4220-KBL-AC4 drive (software revision 3.500).
7.1.1 Field Oriented mode
Power up the drive.This operation will take about 10 seconds and the drive
1 will display (LEDs blink for test):
Field oriented AC Drive Lift
mode set up Startup...
after 10 seconds
R: 0 S: 0
MONITOR
R: 0 S: 0
STARTUP
NOTE! Upon opening the STARTUP menu, the drive enters in the
parametrization mode.
STARTUP
Startup config
STARTUP
Regulation mode
Regulation mode
V/f control
Select new mode

V/f control
Select new mode

Field oriented
Press to confirm Regulation mode database selected.
Transfer param ?
Yes->Ent No->Esc
Press to transfer parameters from previous regulation mode to a newly
selected regulation mode. This operation is convenient only if some parameters
have been set in previous regulation mode. Otherwise press Esc to not transfer
parameters.

The drive will restart in the new regulation mode, this will take around 5
seconds:
Restart
Please wait
then
2 STARTUP
Regulation mode
Set Drive data Scroll and
STARTUP
Startup config
The drive will show:

Startup config
Enter setup mode
then press . The drive will restart to SETUP MODE menu, wait few
seconds, messages sequence will follow:
Restart
Please wait
then
SETUP MODE
Drive data
Press and set Drive data parameters:

SETUP MODE
Drive data
Mains voltage
400 V
Press or to select AC input voltage from the following list:

460 - 440 - 415 - 400 - 380 - 230V, press to confirm.
If necessary, it is also possible to change : Ambient temperature and
Ambient temp
40 C

Switching freq
8 KHz
Spd ref/fbk res

0.250 rpm
Press or to select a speed resolution value based on max motor

speed.
E.g.: if rated speed is 1460 rpm, set 0.125 rpm (see table)
Speed resolution Max speed value

(Spd ref/fbk res)
0.125 rpm 2048 rpm
0.25 rpm 4096 rpm
0.5 rpm 8192 rpm
1 rpm 16384rpm
0.03125 rpm 512 rpm
Spd ref/fbk res

0.125 rpm
Press to confirm the selection.
Press to exit from Drive data. The drive will show:
Busy
Please wait ...
then
SETUP MODE
Drive data
NOTE! If any changes have been made to Drive data menu parameters,
with this operation, internal drive values will be calculated and
autotune results will be initialized.

Set Motor nameplate parameters in Motor data menu (values accepted
3 depend on drive size):
Set Motor data

SETUP MODE
Motor data
Rated voltage
380.00 V
to edit motor voltage. To confirm the new value press , to cancel
Escape
edit press + or scroll to:
Rated frequency
50.00 Hz
to edit motor frequency, to confirm the new value press .
Rated current
43 A
to edit motor current, to confirm the new value press .
NOTE! The value should not be less than approx 0.3 times the drive rated
current, output current class 1 @400V on the drive nameplate.
Rated speed
1460.00 rpm
to edit motor speed, to confirm the new value press .
NOTE! The value is intended to be the motor full load speed at the
rated frequency. If Slip is available on the motor nameplate,
set Rated speed parameter as following:
Rated speed = Synchronous speed - Slip
Rated power
22 kW
to edit motor power, to confirm the new value press .
NOTE! For a motor nameplate rated in HP, set

Rated power kW = 0.736 x motor Hp rating.

Cosfi
0.85
to edit motor cos (power factor), to confirm the new value press .
NOTE! Leave default value for Cos if the data is not available from
the nameplate.
Efficiency
91.20 %
to edit motor efficiency, to confirm the new value press .
NOTE! Leave default value for efficiency if the data is not available
from the nameplate.
Press to exit from Motor data; for some seconds the drive will show:
Busy
Please wait ...
then
SETUP MODE
Motor data
NOTE! If any changes have been made to Motor data menu parameters,
4 with this operation internal drive values will be calculated and
autotune results will be initialized.
Autotune If the operation generates any error messages or alarm led comes
on, please check consistency of motor parameters and try again
or see specific directions in section 10, Troubleshooting.
Scroll to perform Autotune procedure; two options can be used for

this procedure: Complete still or Complete rot.
NOTE! When motor is coupled to gearbox and lift is installed, use

Complete still(motor still).
When motor is uncoupled or gearbox does not represent more
than 5% of load and lift car is not installed, use Complete
rot(motor in rotation).
WARNING ! Option Complete still may also cause limited shaft

rotation.

WARNING ! Option Complete rot causes motor shaft rotation close to rated
speed. It is preferred one for the higher accuracy, but it requires
free uncoupled rotation of the motor shaft.
SETUP MODE
Autotune
Select the desired option (scroll or ):

Complete still
Start?
or
Complete rot
Start?
As standard example with motor and machine installed on system, Complete

still are used. Connect terminal 12 (Enable) to terminal 19 (+24VDC)
through relays or local switch, switch on the output contactors and leave
the brake closed.
Complete still
Start?
Complete still
Press I Key
press to start
NOTE! Autotune can be aborted at any time by pressing .
The Autotune procedure will start; the drive will display:

from
Complete still 1
0%
to
Complete still 1
100 %
then
Complete still 2
0%
to
Complete still 2
100 %
after

End
Autotune
blinking
Press 2 times to exit from the procedure:
SETUP MODE
Autotune
Switch off the output contactors and disconnect terminal 12 (Enable).
NOTE! Autotune procedure can take up to different minutes to be

completed.
If the operation generates any error messages, for example when the drive
is disabled during procedure execution:
Autotune err#1:
Abort
and red LED alarm blinking
press to exit 2 times,
then try to repeat the autotune procedure. For more information about
error messages and alarms, please refer to section 10, Troubleshooting.
Press to Exit from SETUP MODE menu.

Wait few seconds, message sequence will follow:
Busy
Please wait ...
then
Restart
Please wait ...
then
R: S:
MONITOR
then
Load setup?
Yes->Ent No->Esc
Press to load Autotune data.
Busy
Please wait ...
then
Load setup?
Yes->Ent No->Esc

Press to exit from menu:
Startup config
Load setup
Scroll till:
5
Startup config
Mechanical data Mechanical data
Press to set Gearbox ratio, Pulley diameter and Full scale speed
of the system:
Travel unit sel
Revolution
Travel unit sel parameter determines all Speed and Ramp profile
parameters units:
Revolution = rpm, rpm/s and rpm/s2
Millimeters = mm/s, mm/s2 and mm/s3.
Gearbox ratio
35.00
Press and set gearbox ratio of the system, press to confirm.
Pulley diameter
500 mm
Press and set pulley diameter of the system, press to confirm.
Full scale speed

1460 rpm
Press to edit max speed (in lift application set this parameter to rated
motor speed), press to confirm .
NOTE! It defines the 100% of the application speed referenced. The

absolute speed handling range is 200% Full scale speed.
Press to exit from Mechanical data menu:
Busy
Please wait ...
then
Startup config
Mechanical data

For encoder type configuration go to step:
- 6.1 Feedback from encoder connected to XE connector on Regulation

card
or
- 6.2 Feedback from encoder connected to XFI connector on EXP-...

optional card
6.1
Scroll to Encoders config menu:
Encoder type Startup config
configuration Encoders config
(Encoder config)
Feedback from
encoder connected
Speed fbk sel
Std encoder
to XE connector on
Regulation card
Std enc type
Digital
Press to set from Digital to Sinusoidal, press to confirm:
Std enc type
Sinusoidal
Scroll to set encoder pulses per revolution (factory setting = 1024ppr):
Std enc pulses
1024 ppr
Press and set the new encoder pulses, press to confirm.
Press to exit from Encoders config menu.

Now go to step 6
up to step 9 of
chapter 7.1.3.

Scroll to Encoders config menu:
6.2
Encoder type
Startup config
Encoders config
configuration
(Encoder config)
Feedback from Speed fbk sel

Std encoder
encoder connected
to XFI connector on
EXP-... optional card
Speed fbk sel
Std encoder
Speed fbk sel

Exp encoder
Speed fbk sel

Exp encoder
Press seven times.
Exp enc pulses
1024 ppr
Press and set the new encoder pulses, press to confirm.
Press to exit from Encoders config menu.
Now go to step 6
up to step 9 of
chapter 7.1.3.

7.1.2 Sensorless vector mode
Sensorless vector
AC Drive Lift
Startup...
mode set up after 10 seconds
R:

0 S: 0
MONITOR
R: 0 S: 0
STARTUP
STARTUP
Startup config
STARTUP
Regulation mode
Regulation mode
V/f control
Select new mode

V/f control
Press two times.
Select new mode
Sensorless vect
Press to confirm Regulation mode database selected.
Transfer param ?
Yes->Ent No->Esc
Press to transfer parameters from previous regulation mode to a newly
selected regulation mode.
This operation is convenient only if some parameters have been set in previous
regulation mode. Otherwise press Esc to not transfer parameters.
The drive will restart in the new regulation mode, this will take around 5
seconds:
Restart
Please wait

then
Now go to step 2
STARTUP
Regulation mode
up to step 9 of
Press to exit from STARTUP menu.
chapter 7.1.3.
7.1.3 V/f Control mode

V/f Control
AC Drive Lift
Startup...
switch-on
after 10 seconds
R: 0 S: 0
MONITOR
R: 0 S: 0
2 STARTUP
V/f Control
mode set up
STARTUP
Startup config
STARTUP CONFIG
Enter setup mode
, wait few seconds:
SETUP MODE
Drive data
Mains voltage
400 V

If necessary, it is also possible to change : Ambient temperature and

Ambient temp
40 C
Switching freq
8 Khz
Press , the drive will show:

Busy
Please wait ...
then
SETUP MODE
Drive data

Set Motor data SETUP MODE

Motor data
Rated voltage
380.00 V
to edit motor voltage. To confirm the new value press , to cancel
Escape
edit press + or scroll to:
Rated frequency
50.00 Hz
to edit motor frequency, to confirm the new value press
Rated current
43 A
to edit motor current, to confirm the new value press .
NOTE! The value should not be less than approx 0.3 times the drive rated
current, output current class 1 @400V on the drive nameplate.
Rated speed
1460.00 rpm

to edit motor speed, to confirm the new value press .
NOTE! The value is intended to be the motor full load speed at the
rated frequency. If Slip value is available on the motor
nameplate data, set Rated speed parameter as following:
Rated speed = Synchronous speed - Slip
Rated power
22 kW
to edit motor power, to confirm the new value press .
NOTE! For a motor nameplate rated in HP, set

Rated power kW = 0.736 x motor Hp rating.
Cosfi
0.85
to edit motor cos (power factor), to confirm the new value press .
NOTE! Leave default value for Cos if the data is not available from
the nameplate.
Efficiency
91.20 %
to edit motor efficiency, to confirm the new value press .
NOTE! Leave default value for efficiency if the data is not available
from the nameplate.
Press to exit from Motor data; for some seconds the drive will show:
Busy
Please wait ...
then
SETUP MODE
Motor data
4
with this operation internal drive values will be calculated and
Autotune autotune results will be initialized.
If the operation generates any error messages or alarm led comes

on, please check consistency of motor parameters and try again
or refer to section 10, Troubleshooting.
Scroll to perform Autotune procedure; two options can be used for

this procedure: Complete still or Complete rot.
NOTE! When motor is coupled to gearbox and lift is installed, use

Complete still(motor still).
When motor is uncoupled or gearbox does not represent more
than 5% of load and lift car is not installed, use Complete
rot(motor on rotation).
WARNING ! Option Complete still may also cause limited shaft

rotation.
WARNING ! Option Complete rot causes motor shaft rotation close to rated
speed. It is preferred one for the higher accuracy, but it requires
free uncoupled rotation of the motor shaft.
SETUP MODE
Autotune
Select the desired option (scroll or ):

Complete still
Start?
or
Complete rot
Start?
As standard example with motor and machine installed on system, Complete

still are used. Connect terminal 12 (Enable) to terminal 19 (+24VDC)
through relays or local switch, switch on the output contactors and leave
the brake closed.
Complete still
Start?
Complete still
Press I Key
press to start
NOTE! Autotune can be aborted at any time by pressing .

The Autotune procedure will start through which the drive will display:
from
Complete still 1
0%
to
Complete still 1
100 %
then
Complete still 2
0%
to
Complete still 2
100 %
after
End
Autotune
blinking
SETUP MODE
Autotune
NOTE! Autotune procedure can take up to different minutes to be

completed.
If the operation generates any error messages, for example when the drive
is disabled during procedure execution:
Autotune err#1:
Abort
and red LED alarm blinking
press to exit 2 times,
then try to repeat the autotune procedure. For more information about
error messages and alarms, please refer to section 10, Troubleshooting.
Press to Exit from SETUP MODE menu.

Wait few seconds, message sequence will follow:
Busy
Please wait ...
then
Restart
Please wait ...
then

R: S:
MONITOR
then
Load setup?
Yes->Ent No->Esc
Press to load Autotune data.
Busy
Please wait ...
then
Load setup?
Yes->Ent No->Esc
Startup config
Load setup
Scroll till:
5
Startup config
Mechanical data Mechanical data
of the system:
Travel unit sel
Revolution
parameters units:
Gearbox ratio
35.00
Press and set gearbox ratio of the system, press to confirm.
Pulley diameter
500 mm
Press and set pulley diameter of the system, press to confirm.
Full scale speed

1460 rpm
Press to edit max speed (in lift application set this parameter to rated

motor speed), press to confirm.
NOTE! It defines the 100% of the application speed referenced. The

absolute speed handling range is 200% Full scale speed.
Press to exit from Mechanical data menu:
Busy
Please wait ...
then
Startup config
Mechanical data
6 Pulley diameter
Weight Gearbox ratio Rope weight
Motor Gearbox
Pulley
Car weight
Load weight
Counter weight
Scroll to Weights menu:

Startup config
Weights
Press to set Car weight (weight of the lift car), Counter weight, Load
weight, Rope weight, Motor and Gearbox inertia parameter:
Car weight
0 Kg
Press and edit the value of Car weight, press to confirm.
Counter weight
0 Kg
Press and the value of Counter weight (car weight to achive balance

system) parameter, press to confirm.
Load weight
0 Kg
Press and edit the value of Load weight (maximum lift load weight)
parameter, press to confirm.
Rope weight
0 Kg
Press and edit the value of Rope weight (total inertia of cabin rope)
Motor inertia
0.00 Kg*m 2

Press and edit the value of Motor inertia (if not available, leave to
default), press to confirm.
Gearbox inertia
0.00 Kg*m 2

Press and edit the value of Gearbox inertia (if not available, leave to
NOTE! Gearbox inertia is intended as inertia of all rotating masses

on slow side of gearbox, ex. pulley inertia, etc...
Press to exit from Weight menu.
Press 2 times.
Follow the points below to set the BU resistance parameters:
7
Braking unit setting
Startup config
BU protection
[BU protection]

BU control
Internal
BU resistance
15.40 ohm
Press and edit the resistance value, press to confirm.
NOTE! See section 4.9.2 for the minimum permissible value of the resistor.
For the thermal protection of the braking resistence, a time reverse

characteristic is defined. This requires definition of resistor power in
continous service, BU res cont pwr.
NOTE! Refer to chapter 9.2 for details on BU protection
BU res cont pwr

4.00 kW
Press to edit the power value, press to confirm.
Press to exit from Encoder Config menu.
Startup config
BU protection
Busy
Please wait ...
to
STARTUP
Save config?
The prompt displays Save config ? (Recommended).
For this operation the drive will take around 5 seconds.
Press to execute the procedure:

STARTUP
Save config?
R: S:
STARTUP
NOTE! Upon closing the STARTUP menu, the drive exits from
parametrization mode and becomes operational.

NOTE! The drive cannot be enabled when STARTUP menu is open.
AVyL drive allows to set a Speed profile trough 8 different speed point:
8 Multi speed 0 ... Multi speed 7
Speed setting R: S:
[Speed profile] STARTUP
R: S:
TRAVEL
TRAVEL
Speed profile
Smooth start spd

0 rpm
Multi speed 0
0 rpm
Press to set Multi speed 0 set point:
Multi speed 0
+00000000 rpm
Edit the value requested by the system and press to confirm.
Scroll to set Multi speed 1 set point:

Multi speed 1
0 rpm
Press and repeat the procedure as for Multi speed 0. Scroll to
set all the others Multi speed required by the system.
ATTENTION ! Through the combination of Mlt spd s0 src (equal Digital

input 4), Mlt spd s1 src (equal Digital input 5) and Mlt
spd s2 src (equal Digital input 6), is possible to select
Multi speed desired, according to next table:

Mtl spd sel Mtl spd sel Mtl spd sel
ACTIVE SPEED
2 src 1 src 0 src
0 0 0 Multi speed 0
0 0 1 Multi speed 1
0 1 0 Multi speed 2
0 1 1 Multi speed 3
1 0 0 Multi speed 4
1 0 1 Multi speed 5
1 1 0 Multi speed 6
1 1 1 Multi speed 7
TAV3i011
Press to exit from Speed profile menu.
AVyL drive allows to set a Ramp profile as the picture shows below:
9
Ramp setting
[Ramp profile] Multispeed
Speed ref MR0 acceleration
MR0 acc ini jerk MR0 acc end jerk
Acceleration
Multispeed
Speed ref
Multispeed
Acceleration MR0 dec end jerk
MR0 dec ini jerk MR0 deceleration

MR0 end decel
TRAVEL
Speed profile
TRAVEL
Ramp profile

MR0 acc ini jerk
1000 rpm/s 2

Press to set MR0 acc ini jerk parameter, press to confirm:
MR0 acceleration
500 rpm/s
Press to set MR0 acceleration parameter, press to confirm:
MR0 acc end jerk

1000 rpm/s 2

Press to set MR0 acc end jerk parameter, press to confirm:
MR0 dec ini jerk

1000 rpm/s 2

Press to set MR0 dec ini jerk parameter, press to confirm.
MR0 deceleration
500 rpm/s
Press to set MR0 deceleration parameter, press to confirm.
MR0 dec end jerk

1000 rpm/s 2

Press to set MR0 dec end jerk parameter, press to confirm.
MR0 end decel

1000 rpm/s
Press to set MR0 end decel parameter, press to confirm.
TRAVEL
Ramp profile
Press 9 times to open the saving procedure
TRAVEL
SAVE PARAMETERS

Busy
Please wait ...
to
TRAVEL
SAVE PARAMETERS
Press + .
R: 0 S: 0
MONITOR
Now the drive is
set with
commands for
standard
sequence.

7.2 Commissioning for AVy...BR / BR4 (Brushless Motors)
Commissioning Set-up Procedure
Set Drive data Drive Data parameters: Mains voltage, Ambient temp,
1 Switching freq, Speed reference resolution
Set Motor data Motor Data parameters: Rated voltage, Rated current,
2 Rated speed, Pole pairs, Torque constant, EMF constant,
Stator resistance and LsS inductance.
Run current Regulator Autotune procedure measures a real motor parameters:

3 Autotune - Curr Reg autotune can be used when motor is coupled
to gearbox and lift car is installed. It could cause limited
shaft rotation.
4 Escape setup mode During this operation a Load setup is required to load
all datas changes into SETUP MODE.

mechanical data Gearbox ratio, Pulley diameter, Full scale speed.
Set all system System weights data:

6 weight data Cabin weight, Counter weight, Load weight, Rope
weight, Motor inertia, Gearbox inertia
7 Encoder configuration Feedback source type selection: Sinusoidal Hall,

Sinusoidal SinCos, Sinusoidal Extern, Digital Hall,
DigitalExtern, SinCos, Resolver and Hyperface.
Set braking unit Braking Unit parameters: Braking unit type (internal /
8
parameters external), Braking unit resistance, Braking unit power
Save configuration Use Save Config ? to save all the changes made in the
9
made in startup menu Startup menu.
10 Set speed profile A binary combination of three digital input allows to

select up to 8 different speed setpoints
Accelerations jerk and decelerations jerk can be set in
11 Set ramp profile the ramp profile
12 Two options are available:

Encoder phasing - motor rotating or still.
Save all the parameters
13

NOTE! Drive Startup procedure below take as example an
AVyL 4220 BR4 drive (software revision 3.300).
Power up the drive, after few seconds the drive will display the main menu:
R: S:
1 MONITOR
Set drive
parameters
(Drive data) R: 0 S: 0
STARTUP
STARTUP
Startup config
Startup config
Enter setup mode
, wait few seconds:
SETUP MODE
Drive data
SETUP MODE
Drive data
Mains voltage
400 V

If necessary, it is also possible to change : Ambient temperature, Switching
frequency and Speed resolution.
Ambient temp
40 C
Switching freq
8 Khz

Spd ref/fbk res
0.250 rpm
Press or to select a speed resolution value based on max motor

speed.
E.g.: if rated speed is 144 rpm, set 0.03125 rpm (see table)
Speed resolution Max speed value

(Spd ref/fbk res)
0.125 rpm 2048 rpm
0.25 rpm 4096 rpm
0.5 rpm 8192 rpm
1 rpm 16384rpm
0.03125 rpm 512 rpm
Spd ref/fbk res

0.03125 rpm
Press to confirm the selection.
Press , the drive will show:
Busy
Please wait ...
then
SETUP MODE
Drive data

Set motor
parameters
(Motor data) Rated voltage
330.00 V
Press to edit rated motor voltage.
Press again to confirm the new value.
Rated current
35 A
Press to edit rated motor current. Press again to confirm.

Rated speed
2000.00 rpm
Press to edit rated synchronous motor speed. Press again to
confirm the value.
Pole pairs
4
Press to edit motor pole pairs. Press again to confirm the value.
Torque Constant
2.480 Nm/A
Press to edit motor torque value. Press again to confirm the value.
NOTE! If Torque Constant is not available, it should be calculated with

the following:
Pn Where:
KT1= Pn = Rated power [W]
2 p Sn In = Rated current [A]
In
60 Sn = Rated speed [rpm]
Tn Where:
KT1= Tn = Rated torque [Nm]
In In = Rated current [A]
EMF constant
1.430 V*s
Press to edit motor back EMF constant from motor type plate (*).
Press to confirm.
Stator resist
0.135 ohm
Press to edit motor stator resistance value (*). Press to confirm.
LsS inductance
0.00237 H
Press to edit motor stator value (*). Press to confirm.

(*) NOTE! If EMF costant, Stator resistance and LsSinductance
values are unknowed, set them to zero before running current
self-tuning procedure.
Press to exit from Motor data; for few seconds the drive will show:
Busy
Please wait ...
then
SETUP MODE
Motor data
with this operation internal drive values will be calculated and
3 autotune results will be initialized.
If the operation generates any error messages or alarm led comes
Autotune on, please check consistency of motor parameters and try again
or see specific directions in section 10, Troubleshooting.
Scroll to perform Current Regulator Autotune procedure.
This operation may cause limited shaft rotation.

Warning
SETUP MODE
Autotune
CurrReg
Start?
Connect terminal 12 (Enable) to terminal 19 (+24VDC) through relays

or local switch, then switch on the output contactors. It is suggested to
open the brake (the rope must be removed), if not possible leave the
brake closed.
CurrReg
Press I Key
Press to start the Autotune procedure.
NOTE! Autotune procedure can take different minutes to be completed.

Autotune can be aborted at any time by pressing .

The drive will display from:
CurrReg
0%
to
CurrReg
100 %
after
End
Autotune
blinking to show the end of procedure.
SETUP MODE
Autotune
Press and wait few seconds

4
Load setup Load setup?
Yes->Ent No->Esc
Busy
Please wait ...
then
Load setup?
Yes->Ent No->Esc
Startup config
Load setup
Scroll till:
5
Mechanical data Startup config
Mechanical data
of the system:
Travel unit sel
Revolution
parameters units:

Press and or to select the units, press to confirm.
Gearbox ratio
35.00
Press to set gearbox ratio of the system, press to confirm.
Pulley diameter
500 mm
Press and edit the pulley diameter of the system, press to
confirm.
Pulley diameter
+0000500 mm
to Full scale speed parameter
Full scale speed
2000 rpm
Press and edit the value of max speed (in lift application set this
parameter to rated motor speed), press to confirm. Press to

exit from Mechanical data menu.
Scroll to Weights menu:
6 Startup config
Weights
Weights
Pulley diameter
Gearbox ratio Rope weight
Motor Gearbox
Pulley
Car weight
Load weight
Counter weight
Press to set Car weight (weight of the lift car), Counter weight, Load
weight, Rope weight, Motor and Gearbox inertia parameter:

Car weight
0 Kg
Press and edit the value of Car weight, press to confirm.
Counter weight
0 Kg
Press and the value of Counter weight (car weight to achive balance
system) parameter, press to confirm.
Load weight
0 Kg
Press and edit the value of Load weight (maximum weight of lift
load) parameter, press to confirm.
Rope weight
0 Kg
Press and edit the value of Rope weight (total inertia of cabin rope)
Motor inertia
0.00 Kg*m 2

Press and edit the value of Motor inertia (if it is not available, leave to
Gearbox inertia
0.00 Kg*m 2

Press and edit the value of Gearbox inertia (if it is not available, leave
to default), press to confirm.
NOTE! Gearbox inertia is intended as inertia of all rotating masses

on slow rotating side of gearbox, e.g. pulley inertia, etc...
Press to exit from Weight menu.

7 Press 2 times.
Encoder type Startup config
configuration Encoders config
(Encoder config)
Speed fbk sel

Std encoder
Std enc type

Sinusoidal Hall
Press to select the parameter (see following list) according to the
encoder type, press to confirm.
Parameter Description
SinusoidalHall is a sinusoidal incremental encoder with A+/A-,B+/B-,C+/C-

traces and three digital Hall sensor absolute position
traces for initial synchronization (XE connector)
SinusoidalSinCos is a sinusoidal incremental encoderwith A+/A-,B+/B-
,C+/C- traces and two analog Sin Cos absolute position
traces for initial synchronization (XE connector).
SinusoidalExtern is a sinusoidal incremental encoder with A+/A-,B+/B-
traces and absolute position information through SSI serial
interface for initial synchronization (XE connector,
requires APC100y card).
DigitalHall is a digital incremental encoder with A+/A-,B+/B-,C+/
C- traces and three digital Hall sensor absolute position
traces for initial synchronization (XE connector).
DigitalExtern is a digital incremental encoder with A+/A-,B+/B- traces
and absolute position information through SSI serial
interface for initial synchronization (XE connector,
requires APC100y card).
SinCos is a sinusoidal absolute encoder with SinCos traces.
Resolver is resolver feedback, using option cards: EXP-RES, refer
its manual for details (XFR connector on EXP-RES
card).
SinusoidalHiperface Absolute encoder with Hiperface protocol (XE
connector).
Sinusoidal Intern sinusoidal incremental encoder with A+/A-,B+/B-,C+/
C- traces, absolute position traces are not necessary
because phasing is performed automatically at every start.
Digital Intern digital incremental encoder with A+/A-,B+/B-,C+/C-
traces, absolute position traces are not necessary because
phasing is performed automatically at every start.

CAUTION! For each encoder feedback, set the correct jumpers
configuration on the regulation card RV33.
Std enc type
SinusoidalSinCos
Std enc pulses

1024 ppr
Press to edit the number according to encoder data, press to
confirm.
NOTE! It is possible to use only encoder having pulses per revolution

equal to a multiple of 2.
Example: 512 ppr, 1024 ppr, 2048 ppr, etc.
Press 2 times.
Follow the points below to set the BU resistance parameters:
8 Startup config
BU protection
Braking unit setting
[BU protection]
BU control
Internal
BU resistance
15.40 ohm
Press and edit the resistance value, press to confirm.
NOTE! See section 4.9.2 for the minimum permissible value of the resistor.
For the thermal protection of the braking resistence, a time reverse

characteristic is defined. This requires definition of resistor power in
continous service, BU res cont pwr.
NOTE! Refer to chapter 9.2 for details on BU protection
BU res cont pwr

4.00 kW
Press to edit the power value, press to confirm.

Press to exit from Startup Config menu.

9
Save configuration STARTUP
Save config?
The prompt displays Save config ? (Recommended).
For this operation the drive will take around 5 seconds.
Busy
Please wait ...
to
STARTUP
Save config?
Press to exit from STARTUP menu:
R: 0 S: 0
STARTUP
AVyL drive allows to set a Speed profile through 8 different speed point:
10
Multi speed 0 ... Multi speed 7
Speed setting R: S:
[Speed profile] STARTUP
R: S:
TRAVEL
TRAVEL
Speed profile
Smooth start spd

0 rpm
Multi speed 0
0 rpm
Press to set Multi speed 0 set point:
Multi speed 0
+00000000 rpm
Edit the value requested by the system and press to confirm.
Scroll to set Multi speed 1 set point:

Multi speed 1
0 rpm
Press and repeat the procedure as for Multi speed 0. Scroll to
set all the others Multi speed required by the system.
ATTENTION ! Through the combination of Mlt spd s0 src (equal Digital

input 4), Mlt spd s1 src (equal Digital input 5) and Mlt
spd s2 src (equal Digital input 6), is possible to select
Multi speed desired, according to next table:
Mtl spd sel Mtl spd sel Mtl spd sel

ACTIVE SPEED
2 src 1 src 0 src
0 0 0 Multi speed 0
0 0 1 Multi speed 1
0 1 0 Multi speed 2
0 1 1 Multi speed 3
1 0 0 Multi speed 4
1 0 1 Multi speed 5
1 1 0 Multi speed 6
1 1 1 Multi speed 7
TAV3i011
11 Press to exit from Speed profile menu.

Ramp setting AVyL drive allows to set a Ramp profile as the picture shows below:
[Ramp profile] Multispeed
Acceleration
Multispeed
Speed ref
Multispeed

MR0 end decel

TRAVEL
Speed profile
TRAVEL
Ramp profile
MR0 acc ini jerk

1000 rpm/s 2

Press to set MR0 acc ini jerk parameter, press to confirm:
MR0 acceleration
500 rpm/s
Press to set MR0 acceleration parameter, press to confirm:
MR0 acc end jerk

1000 rpm/s 2

Press to set MR0 acc end jerk parameter, press to confirm:
MR0 dec ini jerk

1000 rpm/s 2

Press to set MR0 dec ini jerk parameter, press to confirm.
MR0 deceleration
500 rpm/s
Press to set MR0 deceleration parameter, press to confirm.
MR0 dec end jerk

1000 rpm/s 2

Press to set MR0 dec end jerk parameter, press to confirm.
MR0 end decel

1000 rpm/s
Press to set MR0 end decel parameter, press to confirm.

TRAVEL
Ramp profile
Press 9 times to open the saving procedure
TRAVEL
SAVE PARAMETERS
Busy
Please wait ...
to
TRAVEL
SAVE PARAMETERS
Press + .
R: 0 S: 0
MONITOR
Now the drive is set with commands for standard sequence.
12
R: 0 S: 0
SERVICE
Encoder phasing
.
[Autophase]
SERVICE
Insert password
Required only if
Press twice.
encoder / motor
are not aligned in Insert password
factory ! +00000
the last digit will blinking
Insert password
+12345
Insert the 12345 password and press

Insert password
+00000
Press twice
R: 0 S: 0
SERVICE
Press four times.

R: 0 S: 0
REGULATION PARAM
Press four times.

REGULATION PARAM
Flux config
Flux config
Magnetiz config
Now it is possible to select two different modes of phasing procedure:

rotation (brake opened) or still (brake closed)
Autophase rot
Start ?
or
Autophase still
Start ?
Switch on the output contactors and press .
Autophase
Waiting start ...
When the drive will display Waiting start ..., give Enable and Start
commands, then wait until the end of phasing procedure.
Autotune
End
When the drive will display Autotune End, close the brake, remove the
Enable and Start commands, switch off the output contactors.
Press three times.
REGULATION PARAM
Flux config
Press twice
REGULATION PARAM
13 SAVE PARAMETERS
Save all changes Press to save the changes.

NOTE:

Chapter 8 - Lift Sequencies
External contactor control

It is possible to delegate output contactor control to external devices like
PLC etc. In this case it must be ensured that contactor is closed prior drive
enable and is open only after drive disable signal has been issued. Contactor
mechanical opening and closing times must be taken into consideration.
External brake control

Also brake control can be accomplished by an external means. In this case,
brake can be opened only when Drive ready signal is asserted. Brake must
be closed after Start fwd/rev command is removed and Ref is zero or Ref is
zero dly signal programmed on digital output becomes active. In FOC and
BRS modes it is possible to refer to Ref is zero dly signal and adjust with
parameter Spd 0 ref delay time for signal activation when motor has come
to a complete stop, such that stopping shock is avoided. In case of SLS and
VF control since it is not possible to guarantee required torque at low
frequencies it is better to refer to signal Ref is zero. Threshold for signal
activation can be set by parameter Spd 0 ref thr. Brake opening time and
closing time must also be considered.
When output contactor or brake are not controlled by the drive it is possible
to set corresponding delay times to zero and implement required delay
intervals in external control.
Contactor & Brake drive control

Standard command sequence diagram shows most complete sequence in
which output contactor and brake are controlled by the drive.
Start of contactor control sequence in case that contactor is controlled by

the drive depends on parameter Seq start mode. In case that it is set as
Start fwd/rev contactor is closed when asserting the Start fwd or Start rev
command. Enable command is not required for closing contactors! It is
required only to start sequence of motor magnetization and therefore it can
be provided for example using auxiliary contact of output contactor. Drive
will wait until Enable command is given. In case that selection Enable is
made contactors sequence starts when Enable command is asserted.
Start fwd/rew commands are not required and one of them must be connected
to 24V or more easily set corresponding source to ONE. Since Start
command is not used, zero speed in this configuration must be obtained
through multi speed selection. Change of direction must be accomplished
by multi speed selection where some parameters are set to negative values
or through Ramp ref inv src parameter pointing to an digital input
controlling direction.
In case that selection Seq start mode = Mlt spd out!=0 is made, sequence
is started by selecting any multispeed value different from zero. When
output of multispeed selection is zero, it is equivalent to a stop command.

Start fwd/rev commands are not required and for their management is valid
what is written for selection Enable .
In general, direction is controlled by Start fwd/rew commands, but if
preferred only one of these commands can be used and delegate direction
control to a simple multispeed selection. Another possibility is to use digital
input controlling parameter Ramp ref inv src.
Figure 8.1: Standard Commands Sequence
Enable
PLC TO DRIVE SIGNALS
Start fwd src /

Start rev src
Mlt spd s 0 src
Mlt spd s 1 src
Mlt spd s 2 src
MR0 acc end jerk MR0 dec ini jerk
MR0 acceleration MR0 deceleration
MR0 dec end jerk

MR0 acc ini jerk
MR0 end decel
Speed ref Spd 0 ref thr
Slow Down dist Spd 0 ref delay
Brake open delay Cont open delay

Magn. current
Brake close dly
Cont close delay
RUN cont mon /

UP cont mon /
DOWN cont mon
DRIVE TO PLC SIGNALS
Lift Enable mon
BRAKE cont mon
Lift Start mon

(Only FOC/BRS)
Lift Landing mon
(Only V/F)
Lift DC brake mon
Start Fw / Rw
Start Fw / Rw
Start magnet.
Open contac.
Running
Close contac
Close brake
Open brake
Wait 0 ref

Figure 8.2: Detail Starting
Enable
Start fwd src
Mlt spd s 0 src
Brake open delay

Cont close delay
Magn ramp time

Multispeed 1
Spd 0 ref thr

Speed ref
MR0 acc ini jerk MR0 acceleration MR0 acc end jerk
Acceleration
Magnetization current
Lift Start mon
BRAKE cont mon
BRAKE 2 cont mon
Lift Enable mon
RUN cont mon

Figure 8.3: Detail Stopping
Mlt spd s 0 src
Start fwd src
Enable
Brake close delay
Cont open delay

Multispeed 1
Spd 0 ref delay

Speed ref
Multispeed 0
Spd 0 ref thr
Acceleration
MR0 deceleration
MR0 dec ini jerk
MR0 dec end jerk

MR0 dec ini jerk
MR0 dec end jerk
MR0 end decel
Lift Start mon
BRAKE cont mon
BRAKE 2 cont mon
Lift Enable mon
RUN cont mon
Lift Landing mon

(FOC/BRS only)
Lift DC brake mon

(V/F only)
118 Chapter 8 Lift Sequencies ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

Figure 8.4: Relation between Direction Commands and Contactor Control Signals
Start fwd src
Start rev src
For details see Figure 8.3. For details see Figure 8.3.
Speed ref
UP cont mon
DOWN cont mon
RUN cont mon
NOTE! To invert the sign of Speed ref corresponding to Start fwd and Start
rev commands set parameter in TRAVEL \ Ramp rev inv src = UP
cont mon.
Speed ref
ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Chapter 8 Lift Sequencies 119

Figure 8.5:Short floor function
MR1 acc end jerk > MR0 acc end jerk MR1 dec ini jerk > MR0 dec ini jerk
MR0 MR1 MR0
Mlt spd s0 src
Start fwd / rev src
Short floor mon
Mlt ramp sel mon
120 Chapter 8 Lift Sequencies ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

Chapter 9 - Parameter
9.1 Parameter Legend
Access mode parameter Parameter value

R read only D.Size value determined by drive size
W write type Calc value calculated in function of other
S saved in flash parameter
Z accessible with drive disabled DrvVer value dependent on drive fw version
Motr value dependent on motor
Parameter number List X signal list
Parameter name
Parameter unit of measure
IPA Description [Unit] Access Default Min Max Format Reg. Mode
TRAVEL
TRAVEL Main menu
TRAVEL / DC braking 2nd level

1836 DCbrake cmd src N/A RWS IPA 7125List 3 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 7125 Lift DC Brake mon = Default
It allows to select the origin of the signal to command DC braking function
(refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual)
The Pick List manual is available (pdf format) on the supplied CONF 99 cd-rom.
Validity DB
The reading keys are:

F Field oriented
S Sensorless
V V/f
A Autotuning (Setup mode)
B Brushless
Point type
AB
A can to be > F float type
> P float type
> D digital type (Integer with 16 bits)
B can to be > P parameter

> V variable
> K constant
PIN The parameter type is enumerative.

It has, therefore, a list of possible values (for example it is a source)
ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 121

9.2 Parameter Description
MONITOR
This menu displays a series of variables useful to check the Drive state. The variable function is clearly explained
by the variable name.
Monitor
3060 Output voltage [V] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Voltage on the drive output terminals
3070 Output current [A] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Current on the drive output terminals
3080 Output frequency [Hz] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Drive output frequency
3090 Output power R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Drive output power. UNIT: [kW] for AVy ... AC/AC4, [kVA] for AVy ... BR/BR4.
9406 Torque ref [Nm] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV F-S-B
Drive torque reference
9405 Norm Speed [rpm] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Speed of the motor
3210 Speed ref [rpm] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Drive speed reference
3200 Ramp ref [rpm] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Drive ramp reference
162 Enable SM mon N/A R 0 0 1 DV V-F-S-B
It shows the drive Enable state
163 Start SM mon N/A R 0 0 1 DV V-F-S-B
It shows the drive Start state
0 OFF
1 ON
164 FastStop SM mon N/A R 0 0 1 DV V-F-S-B
It shows the drive FastStop state
0 OFF
1 ON
MONITOR / I/O status

4028 DI 7654321E N/A R 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
Standard digital inputs status, from 0 to 7; E (Enable) = Digital Input 0
4064 DO 3210 N/A R 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
Standard digital outputs status, from 0 to 3
4057 DIX BA9876543210 N/A R 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
Expanded digital inputs status, from 0 to 11;
A = Digital InputX 10, B = Digital InputX 11 (X suffix means expanded)
4078 DOX 76543210 N/A R 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
Expanded digital outputs status, from 0 to 7 (X suffix means expanded)
122 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

MONITOR / Advanced Status
3100 DC link voltage [V] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Drive DC link voltage
3110 Magnetizing curr [A] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Drive magnetizing current
3120 Torque curr [A] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Drive torque current
3130 Magn curr ref [A] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV F-S-B
Drive magnetizing current reference
3140 Torque curr ref [A] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV F-S-B
Drive torque current reference
3180 Flux ref [Wb] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV F-S-B
Drive flux reference
3190 Flux [Wb] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV F-S-B
Drive flux
1670 Mot OL accum % [%] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Motor I2t overload accumulator. When 100% is reached Mot overload alarm is generated and output
inverter current is reduced to motor continuous current
1781 BU OL accum % [%] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Braking Unit I2t overload accumulator. When 100% is reached BU overload alarm is generated.
1540 Drv OL accum % [%] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Drive Unit I2t overload accumulator. When 100% is reached Drv overload alarm is generated and
output inverter current is reduced to drive continuous current. .
3222 Norm Std enc spd [rpm] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Encoder speed of standard feedback (connector XEon RV33 regulation board)
3223 Norm Exp enc spd [rpm] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Encoder speed of expanded feedback (encoder connector on expansion optional boards)
9553 Std enc position [cnt] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV F-B
Raw accumulated encoder pulses of the standard encoder, measured in ppr x 4
9554 Exp enc position [cnt] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV F-B
Raw accumulated encoder pulses of the expanded encoder, measured in ppr x 4
9204 Std sin enc mod [cnt] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV F-B
Module of A and B trace of sinusoidal encoder on std port. Encoder peak voltage is constantly
monitored and the alarm Speed feedback loss is generated if it is outside the range: min=IPA 1902/5,
max=IPA 1902 * 2.
9072 HT sensor temp [C] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Drive Heatsink temperature
9073 RG sensor temp [C] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Temperature on the regulation card RV33
9095 IA sensor temp [C] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Temperature of the heatsink incoming air temperature (available from 18.5kW up to 160kW)
9090 Sequencer status N/A R 0.00 0.00 --- DV V-F-S-B
Sequencer status of drive State Machine. It controls the drive running and starting, accounting for
protection & alarming, command sequence, and reset status.

State Sequencer status
1 Magnetization running
2 Magnetization completed, Stop
3 Start
4 Fast stop, Stop
5 Fast stop, Start
9 No alarm, drive is ready to accept all commands
10 Magnetization running and Start command already present
12 Alarm active
16 Alarm not active, waiting for reset
3230 CPU1 runtime [%] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Time needed by the CPU1 (microprocessor)
3240 CPU2 runtime [%] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PP V-F-S-B
Time needed by the CPU2 (microprocessor)
MONITOR - Drive ID Status

1460 Drive cont curr [A] RW CALC 0.00 0.00 FK V-F-S-B
Drive maximum continuos current rating; its default value depends by the drive size and applicable
derating factors.
114 Drive size N/A R D.Size 0 20 DK V-F-S-B
Drive size rating in kW (ULN = 400VAC, IEC 146 Class 1) of Hp (ULN = 460VAC, IEC 146 Class 2):
0 0.75 kW - 0.75 Hp
1 1.5 kW -1.5 Hp
2 2.2 kW - 2.0 Hp
3 3.0 kW - 3.0 Hp
4 4.0 kW - 5.0 Hp
5 5.5 kW - 7.5 Hp
6 7.5 kW - 10 Hp
7 11 kW - 15 Hp
8 15 kW - 20 Hp
9 22 kW - 25 Hp
10 30 kW - 30 Hp
11 37 kW - 40 Hp
12 45 kW - 50 Hp
13 55 kW - 60 Hp
14 75 kW - 75 Hp
15 90 kW - 100 Hp
16 110 kW - 125 Hp
17 132 kW - 150 Hp
18 160 kW - 200 Hp
19 250 kW - 300 Hp
20 315 kW - 450 Hp
21 18.5 kW - 22.5 Hp
22 400 kW - 500 Hp
23 500 kW - 600 Hp
24 630 kW - 700 Hp
300 Drive type N/A R 288 0 0 DK V-F-S-B
288 460V default settings for AVy ... AC/AC4
289 460V default settings for AVy ... BR/BR4
34 400V default settings for AVy ... AC/AC4
35 400V default settings for AVy ... BR/BR4

115 Drive name N/A RWS 0.00 0.00 0.00 FK V-F-S-B
ACDRV asynchronous firmware
ACDRVM brushless firmware
810 Actual setup N/A R 0 0 0 DK V-F-S-B
Setup motor file in use (reserved)
107 Software version
Drive software version (factory installed), example: V 3. 0. 0
110 Software type N/A R DrvVer 0 0 DV V-F-S-B
Software type factory use
111 Software status N/A R DrvVer 0 0 DV V-F-S-B
Software state factory use
99 Life time [hrs] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Drive life time accumulated with power on
98 Sys time-ddmmyy [h/m/s] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Time and date setting from PC configurator or serial communications.
Clock is active only when the Drive is powered on
NOTE! On a new regulation card the variable takes value: 00:00:00 (time) 010170 (date)
MONITOR / Alarm log

This function provides a list of last 30 drive trips or various system error messages. Together
with cause indications also time and data infornations is provided. Alarm log
message is referred to Sys time - dd mm yy variable.
Example:
01:02:36 01 02 00
Undervoltage
01:02:36 time of alarm
02 02 00 date of alarm
Undervoltage alarm description
MONITOR / Alarm log clear?

It deletes all the alarms listed in the Alarm log.

STARTUP
STARTUP
STARTUP / Startup config / Enter setup mode
Enter setup mode command allows the access to SETUP MODE to set drive basic parameters and motor plate
data. Drive will reboot and few seconds are required. All changes and operations done in the SETUP MODE will be
automatically saved, every time the user executes exits setup mode.
SETUP MODE / Drive data
380 Mains voltage [V] RW 2 0 5 DK V-F-S-B
Drive power supply voltage. Select supply voltage parameter accurately, according to actual drive
supply voltage. After changing this parameter, selftune data are initialized to default, self-tuning
must be repeated !
0 230 V
1 380 V
2 400 V
3 415 V
4 440 V
5 460 V
1350 Ambient temp [C] RW 0 0 1 DK V-F-S-B
Drive ambient temperature. Selecting 50C will result in drive derating, see chapter 2.3. After changing
this parameter selftune data are initialized to default, self-tuning must be repeated !
0 40C
1 50C
170 Switching freq [kHz] RW D.Size 0 3 DK V-F-S-B
Drive PWM switching frequency. Selecting higher switching frequency then default, results in drive
derating, see table 2.3.4.1. Selecting lower value results in higher continuous output current.
After changing this parameter, selftune data are initialized to default, self-tuning must be repeated !
0 2 kHz
1 4 kHz
2 8 kHz
3 16 kHz
4 12 kHz
1880 Spd ref/fbk res [rpm] RW 1 0 5 DK V-F-S-B
Resolution of the speed references referred to the maximum process speed (1885. Full
scale speed parameter). After changing this parameter, selftune data are initialized to default,
self-tuning must be repeated !
0 0.125 rpm -> 2048 rpm maximum process speed
SETUP MODE / Motor data (for AVy . AC series)

670 Rated voltage [V] RW D.Size Calc Calc FK V-F-S-B
Motor rated voltage
680 Rated frequency [Hz] RW D.Size Calc Calc FK V-F-S
Motor rated frequency
690 Rated current [A] RW D.Size Calc Calc FK V-F-S-B
Motor rated current

NOTE! The value should be not less then approx 0.3 times the drive rated current
(output current Class 1 @ 400V on the motor nameplate).
700 Rated speed [rpm] RW D.Size Calc Calc FK V-F-S-B
Motor full load speed at the rated frequency. If Slip is available on the motor nameplate data, set
Rated speed parameter as following: Rated speed = Synchronous speed - Slip
710 Rated power [kW] RW D.Size Calc Calc FK V-F-S
Motor rated power
NOTE! For a motor nameplate rated in Hp, set Rated power kW = motor Hp rating * 0.736
720 Cosfi N/A RW D.Size Calc Calc FK V-F-S
Motor rated power factor
730 Efficiency N/A RW D.Size Calc Calc FK V-F-S
Motor Efficiency (if not available, leave the default data)
Load default mot
It selects and loads the motor standard parameters:
0 Standard 400V
1 Standard 460V
NOTE! By selecting one of the two options, the motor standard parameters with 400V (or 460V) are
loaded making reference to the used Drive size. Through this process, motor data is
overwritten.
SETUP MODE / Motor data (for AVy . BR series)

670 Rated voltage [V] RW D.Size Calc Calc FK V-F-S-B
Motor rated voltage
690 Rated current [A] RW D.Size Calc Calc FK V-F-S-B
Motor rated current
NOTE! The value should be not less then approx 0.3 times the drive rated current
(output current Class 1 @ 400V on the drive nameplate).
700 Rated speed [rpm] RW D.Size Calc Calc FK V-F-S-B
Motor synchronous speed
930 Pole pairs N/A RW 4.0 0.0 0.0 FK B
Must be integer number.
990 Torque constant [Nm/A] RW D.Size 0.0 0.0 FK B
Motor torque costant. This parameter is usually stated by the motor manufacturer. If not, it can be
calculated from motor rated power, speed and current as:
P [W]
Torque Constant =
2p . S [rpm] . I [A]
60
Current in torque constant unit [Nm/A is RMS current.
775 EMF constant [V.s] RW D.Size 0.0 0.0 FK B
If the number is unknown, set the parameter to zero: the drive will automatically calculate an
approximate value.
970 Stator resistance [ohm] RW D.Size 0.0 0.0 FK B
Motor stator resistance value.
980 LsS inductance [H] RW D.Size 0.0 0.0 FK B
Motor stator inductance value

NOTE! If EMF costant, Stator resistance and LsSinductance values are unknown, set them to
zero before running the current self-tuning procedure.
Load default mot
It selects and loads the motor standard parameters:
0 Set 0
1 Set 1
NOTE! By this selection, the motor standard parameters with Set 1 (or Set 2) are loaded making
reference to the used Drive size. Through this process, motor data is overwritten.
SETUP MODE / Autotune

Complete still (for AVy . AC series)
Complete self-tuning of current and flux loop with a stopped rotor
Start ? enable data detection command (12 drive terminal must be cycle to +24Vdc)
Complete rot (for AVy . AC series)
Complete self -tuning of current and flux loop with a moving rotor
CurrReg (for AVy . AC and BR series)
Self-tuning of current loop only with stopped motor
FluxReg rot (for AVy . AC series)
Self-tuning of flux loop with a moving rotor only
FluxReg still (for AVy . AC series)
Self-tuning of flux loop with a stopped rotor only
SETUP MODE / Autotune / Results

2780 Measured Rs [ohm] RW Calc Calc Calc FK V-F-S-B
Value of the phase resistance detected on the stator of the motor
2790 Measured DTL [V] RW Calc 0 Calc FK V-F-S-B
IGBT dead time limit
2800 Measured DTS [ohm] RW Calc 0 Calc FK V-F-S-B
IGBT dead time slope
2810 Measured LsSigma [H] RW Calc Calc Calc FK V-F-S-B
Value of inductance detected on the stator of the motor
2820 Measured Rr [ohm] RW Calc Calc Calc FK V-F-S
Value of resistance detected on the rotor of the motor
2830 Measured Rr2 [ohm] RW Calc Calc Calc FK V-F-S
Value of resistance 2 detected on the rotor of the motor
2840 Measured P1 flux N/A RW Calc 0.00 1.000 FK V-F-S
P1 coefficient of the Flux curve measured
2850 Measured P2 flux N/A RW Calc 3 18 FK V-F-S
2860 Measured P3 flux N/A RW Calc 0.00 1.00 FK V-F-S
2870 Measured Im Nom [A] RW Calc 0.00 0.00 FK V-F-S
Value of the rated magnetizing current

2880 Measured Im Max [A] RW Calc 0.00 0.00 FK V-F-S
Value of the maximum magnetizing current
2890 Measured Flux Nom [Wb] RW Calc 0.00 0.00 FK V-F-S
Value of the rated Flux
2900 Measured Flux Max [Wb] RW Calc 0.00 0.00 FK V-F-S
Value of the maximumFlux
STARTUP / Startup config / Load setup

Load setup
Load setup command is required to load all SETUP MODE settings into the regulation mode selected.
Entering this parameter, on the display will appear:
Load setup?
Yes -> Ent No -> Esc
Press Enter to load the SETUP MODE settings.
Press Escape if you do not want to load the SETUP MODE settings
NOTE! The operation is required for every Regulation mode (V, F, S and B)
It is also required for every new setting made in the SETUP MODE.
If any changes / settings in Motor data and Drive data are detected, Load setup command is
presented automatically to the user, respond Yes to load data.
STARTUP / Startup config / Mechanical data

1015 Travel units sel N/A RWZ 0 0 1 DK V-F-S-B
0 Revolutions
1 Millimeters
It determines the units of TRAVEL / Speed profile and TRAVEL / Ramp profile menu parameters:
Revolutions = rpm, rpm/s and rpm/s2 - Millimeters = mm/s, mm/s2 and mm/s3
1002 Gearbox ratio N/A RWZ 35 1 100 FK V-F-S-B
Ratio between motor shaft speed and pulley speed. Eventual roping ratio must also be included.
1003 Pulley diameter [mm] RWZ 500 100 2000 FK V-F-S-B
Diameter of the pulley
1885 Full scale speed [rpm] RW 1500 Calc Calc PV V-F-S-B
It defines the 100% of the application speed referenced. The absolute speed handling range is 200%
Full scale speed.
For lift application set this parameter to maximum allowed motor speed, typically rated speed of the
motor. This parameter will also set the limit on all multispeed values IPA 7060 - 7067.
STARTUP / Startup config / Weights
1004 Car weight [kg] RWZ 0.00 0.00 0.00 FK V-F-S-B
Weight of the Lift car
1005 Counter weight [kg] RWZ 0.00 0.00 0.00 FK V-F-S-B
Weight of the counter mass to achieve balanced system
1006 Load weight [kg] RWZ 0.00 0.00 0.00 FK V-F-S-B
Maximum weight of Lift load (total persons weight)
1007 Rope weight [kg] RWZ 0.00 0.00 0.00 FK V-F-S-B
Total weight of Rope
1011 Motor inertia [kgm2] RWZ 0.000 0.000 0.000 FK V-F-S-B
Inertia of the motor, refer to motor manufacturer (if it is not available, leave to default)

1012 Gearbox inertia [kgm2] RWZ 0.000 0.000 0.000 FK V-F-S-B
Inertia of the gearbox, refer to manufacturer (if it is not available, leave to default).
Can be set here the inertia of all mechanical parts at slow side of gearbox (ex. pulley, etc...)
Pulley diameter
Gearbox ratio Rope weight
Motor Gearbox
Pulley
Car weight
Load weight
Counter weight
STARTUP / Startup config / Landing zone

9411 Landing control N/A RWZ 0 0 1 DP F-B
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Enable/Disable of accurate position control in landing zone
9419 Landing init src N/A RWSZ IPA 7124 List 3 PIN F-B
IPA 7124 Lift Landing mon = Default
It allows to select the signal to initialize the close loop position control in the Landing Zone
(leave to default if landing should be managed by internal lift control sequence;
refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual))
9412 Landing distance [mm] RWZ 100 10 1000 PP F-B
Total distance between landing zone signal and floor position. Higher value allows faster positioning.
9420 Landing ratio [%] RWZ 50 0 90 PP F-B
Percentage of landing distance during which car runs at constant speed
9417 Pos P gain [%] RWZ 1 0 100 PP F-B
Proportional gain of position regulator

9410 Pos speed limit [rpm] RWZ 200 0 Calc PP F-B
Maximum speed allowed to use by position controller
Lift car
1
Landing init src
0
Speed
t Landing distance
Position Floor level
Landing distance
Landing ratio
Landing sensor
Landing sensor output can be interfaced to the drive through digital input which can become
command to initialize landing control.
Speed +
Profile S LZ speed ref
Generator +
connected to Speed ref 1 src
Pos P Gain
Position +
Profile
Generation - Pos Speed Limit
Position
STARTUP / Startup config / Encoders config

1940 Speed fbk sel N/A RW 0 0 1 DV V-F-B
0 Std encoder
1 Exp encoder
It allows to switch the feedback between the encoder standard port XE (on RV33 regulation card) and
the encoder expanded (from encoder optional cards: EXP-F2E and EXP-D14A4F)
NOTE! Expansion encoder cannot be used for speed feedback in Brushless mode.
It can be used only for setting speed reference.
1925 Std enc type N/A RWZ 0 12 DK V-F-B
Encoder type connected to the standard input. Default: 1 for AVy ... AC/AC4, 4 for AVy ... BR/BR4
Set allowed for AVy ... AC/AC4:
0 Sinusoidal sinusoidal encoder, select the correct jumper settings on the reg. card, RV33
1 Digital digital encoder
2 Frequency input digital single channel frequency input: channel A. Signal +5V must
be connected between A and power supply common.
Set allowed for AVy ... BR/BR4:
3 Sinusoidal Hall sinusoidal incremental encoder with A+ / A-, B+ / B-, C+ /C traces and
three digital Hall sensor absolute position traces for initial synchronisation
(factory setting)
4 Sinusoidal SinCos sinusoidal incremental encoder with A+ / A-, B+ / B-, C+ /C- traces
and two Sin/Cos absolute position traces for initial synchronisation
5 Sinusoidal Extern sinusoidal incremental encoder with A+ / A-, B+ / B- traces and

absolute position information through SSI serial interface for initial
synchronisation (requires APC card)
6 Digital Hall digital incremental encoder with A+ / A-, B+ / B-, C+ / C- traces and
three digital Hall sensor absolute position traces for initial synchronisation
(factory setting)
7 DigitalExtern digital incremental encoder with A+ / A-, B+ / B- traces and absolute
position information through SSI serial interface for initial synchronisation
(requires APC card)
8 SinCos Sin / Cos absolute position traces for initial synchronisation, incremental
information is not used.
9 Resolver resolver using option cards: EXP-RES (refer its manual for jumpers 0
configurations)
10 Sinusoidal Hiperface absolute encoder with Hiperface protocol (from software rel. 3.300)
11 Sinusoidal Intern sinusoidal incremental encoder with A+/A-,B+/B-, C+/C- traces, absolute
position traces are not necessary because phasing is performed
automatically at every start (from software rel. 3.500)
12 Digital Interndigital incremental encoder with A+/A-,B+/B-, C+/C- traces,absolute position
traces are not necessary because phasing is performed automatically at
every start (from software rel. 3.500)
13 Sinusoidal EnDat sinusoidal incremental encoder with A+ / A-, B+ / B- traces and
absolute position information through EnDat serial interface for initial
synchronisation (requires EXP-ENDAT-AVy card) (from software rel. 3.600)
1890 Std enc pulses [ppr] RWZ 1024 Calc Calc FK V-F-S-B
Encoder pulses per revolution (ppr) value of the standard input.
For brushless motors it is possible to use only the following values: 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8192.
1931 Std dig enc mode N/A RWZ 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
0 FP mode frequency and period measuring
1 F mode frequency measuring
Measuring method of the digital encoder speed connected to the standard input
1927 Std enc supply N/A RWZ 0 0 3 DP V-F-S-B
0 5.41 / 8.16 V
1 5.68 / 8.62 V
2 5.91 / 9.00 V
3 6.16 / 9.46 V
Selection between 5V / 8V range is done through dip-switch S28.
Power supply voltage of the standard Encoder input. Increse this value in case of long encoder cable.
1902 Std sin enc Vp [V] RW 0.5 0 1.5 FK V-F-B
Peak voltage value of the sinusoidal encoder connected to the standard input
1300 Std enc cnt dir N/A RWSZ 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
Selection of standard encoder counting direction. It allows to change sign of measured speed, it is
equivalent of swaping encoder channels AA- <-> BB-.
1926 Exp enc type N/A RW 1 1 2 DK V-F-B
Encoder type connected to the expanded input
1 Digital digital encoder
2 Frequency input digital single channel frequency input: channel A. Signal +5V must
be connected between A and power supply common.

NOTE! For brushless motors expanded encoder cannot be used for speed feddback.
It can be used only for setting speed reference.
1900 Exp enc pulses [ppr] RWZ 1024 Calc Calc FK V-F-B
Encoder pulses per revolution (ppr) value of the expanded input.
1301 Exp enc cnt dir N/A RWSZ 0 0 1 DP V-F-B
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
Selection of expansion encoder counting direction. It allows to change sign of measured speed, it is
equivalent of swaping encoder channels AA- <-> BB-.
STARTUP / Startup config / Encoders config / Rep/Sim encoder

1962 Rep/Sim enc sel N/A RWZ 0 0 1 DK V-F
Selection of the encoder to be repeated using the optional card EXP-F2E.
0 Repeat std enc repeat standard encoder
1 Repeat exp enc repeat expanded encoder
2 Simulate std simulate digital incremental encoder in case of SinCos or Resolver
selections as feedback devices in Std enc type parameter.
1952 Sim enc pulses N/A RWZ 1024 1 Calc FK B
Simulated encoder pulses per revolution (ppr) value (factory setting = 1024 ppr)
STARTUP / Startup config / Encoders config / Index storing

9550 Index storing en N/A RWSZ 0 0 3 DV F-B
Index storing function.
The encoder counts can be latched allowing the user to determine the position of the encoder relative to
an absolute position.
0 Off
1 Storing enabled enables the capturing of the encoder count as described by the
setting of the control word. The control word is the value of
Int IS ctrl or the word selected by IS ctrl src
2 Control std enc it constantly reads all the generated pulses on the std encoder
3 Control exp enc it constantly reads all the generated pulses on the exp encoder
9551 Int IS ctrl N/A RWS 0 0 0X0000 DV F-B
Fixed programming at Index Storing Function according to following table.
9557 IS ctrl src N/A RWSZ IPA 9551 List 39 PIN F-B
IPA 9551 Int IS ctrl = Default
It allows to select the origin of the signal for Index storing function command.
For example a SBI word or DGFC word (refer to signals List 39 of Pick List manual)
NOTE! Digital inputs 6 and 7 (terminals 38 and 39) are dedicated to the use of the Index Qualifier
(home position switch) when Index storing is enabled.
In the next table are showed the values of IS ctrl src from SBI word, DGFC word or Int IS ctrl if:
IS ctrl src = Int IS ctrl

Access
No. bit Name Description (Read/Write Default
)
0-1 -
Not used - -
It indicates the encoder index edge polarity:
2 POLNLT 0= rising edge R/W 0
1= falling edge
3 - Not used - -
It sets the qualifier input state to activate the encoder index reading:
=0, switched off when dig.input 7 = 0
4-5 ENNQUAL =1, switched off when dig.input 7 = 1 W 0
=2, through signal = 0
=3, through signal = 1
It points out for which encoder the values of this parameter are reported:
Target Enc
6 =0, operations requested on the Std Encoder input R/W 0
Num
=1, operations requested on the Exp Encoder input
7 - Not used - -
Control function of the encoder index reading
=0, switched off, function disabled
8-9 ENNLT R/W 0
=1, once, enables the reading of the first index signal edge only.
=2, continuous, enables the reading of the index signal
TAV13241
For the Index storing function, the status Registers are not available via keypad and are to be used for
the configuration and the data reading. These are:
L index register IPA9556
H index register IPA9555
In the next table are showed the registers values:
Access
Ipa No. bit Name Description (Read/ Default
Write)
It indicates which encoder is used for index storing:
Source Enc
0 =0, register data are referred to the Std Encoder input R 0
Num
=1, register data are referred to the Exp Encoder input
Actual Qualifier input value (digital input 7):
1 MP_IN =0, qualifier input level is low R 0
9556 =1, qualifier input level is high
Status of the acquisition function; as:
0=OFF
2-3 STATNLT 1=Once, storing is not executed yet R 0
2=Once, storing is already executed
3=Continuous
Position counter value corresponding to the index.
9555 0-15 CNTNLT R 0
Value is only valid when STANLT is equal to 2 or 3
indexstorpar
1936 Motor pp/sens pp N/A RW Calc Calc 32 PP B

Ratio between motor pole pairs and feedback sensor pole pairs, typically used for resolver.
STARTUP / Startup config / SpdReg gain calc

2048 Calc method N/A RWZ 0 0 1 DK F-S-B
With Calc method two gain calculation methods can be selected:
0 Variable bandw speed regulation bandwidth is internally selected according to
the principle that bandwidth is decreased as inertia is increased
1 Fixed bandw speed regulation bandwidth is specified by parameter Bandwidth
It allows to perform the speed regulator gain calculation. Inertia must be entered throught the Calc
Inertia parameter or specifying parameters in Weights menu.

2610 Calc Inertia [kgm2] RWZ D.Size 0 0 FK F-S-B
Inertia of the load. When parameters in Weights menu have been set, the result of system inertia
referred to the motor shaft is set in this parameter.
2049 Bandwidth [rad/s] RWZ 50 1 400 FK F-S-B
Speed regulator bandwidth. Higher bandwidth value makes motor respond faster and overall result is
more stiff control.
STARTUP / Startup config / V/f config

3420 V/f voltage [V] RWZ Motr Calc Calc FK V
Base voltage for the V/f mode. This parameter is set according to motor nominal voltage, but can be
changed to modify V/f characteristic.
3430 V/f frequency [Hz] RWZ Motr 5 Calc FK V
Base frequency for the V/f mode. This parameter is set according to motor nominal frequency, but
can be changed to modify V/f characteristic.
V/f voltage
f
V/f frequency
STARTUP / Startup config / Motor protection

I2t function is similar to the protection of the motor by the thermal relay. It states the I2t typical behavior.
The integrator state is given by Mot OL accum %, it gives the percentage state of the Rms current
integration, 100 % = I2t alarm level. Mot OL trip signal is available in the pick-list selections.
It states that the trip condition of I2t has been reached and overload is not allowed.
The intervention time depends on the value of the motor current as follows:
(Motor Rated current * Service factor * Motor OL factor )^2* Motor OL time
Overload time =
(Motor current)^2
It is possible to generate an alarm condition or reduce eventual overload current to nominal current of the motor.
For various options of alarm configuration see menu ALARM CONFIG / Motor overload.
1612 Motor OL control N/A RW 0 0 1 DK V-F-S-B
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Enable / disable motor current limit control and overload I2t protection function
(from software rel. 3.300).
1611 Service factor N/A RW 1 0.5 1.5 FK V-F-S-B
Service factor. Some motors have a motor continuous current (Ic) higher than the rated current (In).
The service factor makes reference to the Ic/In ratio.
1610 Motor OL factor N/A RW 2 1.2 Calc FK V-F-S-B
Allowed motor overload factor referring to the Motor rated current * Service factor
1650 Motor OL time [sec] RW 30 10 Calc FK V-F-S-B
Allowed overload time with overload level equal to Motor OL factor.

IPA Description [Unit]
[%] Access Default Min Max Format Reg. Mode
300
250
(2) 200
150
(1) 100 t [sec]

0 15 30 45
(3)
(1) Rated current Service factor = 100%
(2) Motor OL factor
(3) Motor OL time
STARTUP / Startup config / BU protection

The function protects braking resistor by monitoring current in the resistor according to I2t
characteristic. When the protection becomes active, it is possible to generate an alarm condition.
According to the different cases it is possible to use the device internal IGBT (or external braking unit).
1700 BU control N/A RWZ 1 0 2 DP V-F-S-B
0 Off Function disabled
1 Internal Enable Braking Unit internal device (Default)
2 External Enable Braking Unit external BUy device
The parameter enables the Braking Unit function.
1740 BU resistance [ohm] RWZ D.Size Calc 10000 FK V-F-S-B
Braking Unit resistance value, mounted optional on the power section terminals or external (C & BR1)
1710 BU res cont pwr [kW] RWZ D.Size 0 0 FK V-F-S-B
Braking Unit resistance continuous power
1720 BU res OL time [sec] RWZ D.Size 1 1000 FK V-F-S-B
Resistance allowed overload time referring to the overload power. The control of the external braking unit
and of the resistance I2t protection is independent of BU type (BU digital output command, is available,
on the regulation card terminals ).
1730 BU res OL factor N/A RWZ D.Size 1.2 20 FK V-F-S-B
Allowed overload factor referring to the overload power of the braking resistance. Overload factor =
overload Power/ rated Power
(2)
(1) t [sec]
0 (3)
(1) BU res cont power

(2) BU res OL factor
(3) BU res OL time

STARTUP / Startup config / Load default ?

Load default ?
Drive reset with default parameter values in the selected regulation mode only.
Each regulation mode has its own Load default ? command.
NOTE! Load default ? command does not reset SETUP MODE with default parameter values; Drive,
Motor data and Autotune values are mantained.
Use Save config command to save default parameter values such that are preserved for next power up.
STARTUP / Startup config / Load saved ?

Load saved ?
Reload of the last saved database selected.
STARTUP / Regulation mode
100 Regulation mode N/A R 0 0 5 DK V-F-S-B
It allows to select the desired regulation mode. When the Regulation mode parameter is selected, the
active regulation mode is displayed; in order to change it to a new mode press Enter; Select new mode
will be displayed, then scroll the list:
0 V/f control
1 Field oriented
2 Sensorless
3 Setup mode (asynchronous motors)
4 Brushless
5 Setup mode (brushless motors)
After new regulation mode is selected, it is possible to copy (transfer) parameters from previous
regulation mode. This operation is convenient if drive has been parametrized in previous regulation mode
NOTE! Appropriate firmware is required using the drive in Brushless mode
STARTUP / Import recipe

In recipe user can store its configuration of parameters for a given application. By re-calling appropriate recipe file
all the necessary application parameters are set by a single command. Recipe files must be filled with parameters
in the factory (please contact drive manufacturer). Available are 7 recipe files that are empty in default
configuration. Only parameters outside STARTUP menu can be put to recipe files.
Select recipe:
1 User 1
2 User 2
3 User 3
4 User 4
5 User 5
6 User 6
7 User 7
STARTUP / Save config ?

AVyL drive allows two different commands to save the parameters modified in the regulation mode selected:
by STARTUP menu, Save Config? command

by all other menus, SAVE PARAMETERS command
Any changes made in STARTUP menu require Save Config? command, which saves all entire regulation mode
selected. It is recommended every time the user made any changes into STARTUP menu.
SAVE PARAMETERS command saves all the changes made out of STARTUP menu only.
When on the keypad display appears blinking message Use Save Config, use Save Config? command.

TRAVEL
TRAVEL
TRAVEL / Speed profile
The parameters unit is defined by IPA 1015 in STARTUP / Startup config / Mechanical data menu, changing the
IPA 1015 setting from [0] Revolutions (default) to [1] Millimeters, the units in this menu change as follows:
[rpm] becomes [mm/s], [rpm/s] becomes [mm/s2], [rpm/s2] becomes [mm/s3].
7110 Smooth start spd [rpm] RWS 0 Calc Calc PP V-F-S-B
Smooth start speed is selected automatically after start command independently from multispeed value.
Duration of this special speed depends on Smooth start dly parameter. If this parameter is zero, Smooth
start spd is not selected and multispeed values prevails. Smooth start speed can be used to optimise
feeling at starting in some types of installations.
Lift start mon

1
0
Speed ref
Time
Smooth start spd Smooth start dly
NOTE! Smooth start dly can be set in TRAVEL / Lift sequence menu.
7060 Multi speed 0 [rpm] RWS 0 Calc Calc PV V-F-S-B

Speed 0 value
7061 Multi speed 1 [rpm] RWS 0 Calc Calc PP V-F-S-B
Speed 1 value
Speed 2 value
Speed 3 value
Speed 4 value
Speed 5 value
Speed 6 value
Speed 7 value
7134 Max linear speed [mm/s] R Calc 0 0 FK V-F-S-B
TRAVEL / Ramp profile

The parameters unit is defined by IPA 1015 in STARTUP / Startup config / Mechanical data menu, changing the

IPA 1015 setting from [0] Revolutions (default) to [1] Millimeters, the units in this menu change as follows:
[rpm] becomes [mm/s], [rpm/s] becomes [mm/s2], [rpm/s2] becomes [mm/s3].
Two different sets of ramp profiles (MRO ... and MR1 ...) are available; the selection is done by parameter
Mlt ramp sel src (IPA 8090) into TRAVEL / Lift sequence menu. Default is MRO ... .
Multispeed
Acceleration
Multispeed
Speed ref
Multispeed

MR0 end decel
8046 MR0 acc ini jerk [rpm/s2] RWS 1000 0.349 750*100 PP V-F-S-B
Acceleration initial jerk, set 0
8040 MR0 acceleration [rpm/s] RWS 500 1 1.5*106 PP V-F-S-B
Acceleration ramp, set 0
8041 MR0 acc end jerk [rpm/s2] RWS 1000 0.349 750*106 PP V-F-S-B
Acceleration end jerk, set 0
8047 MR0 dec ini jerk [rpm/s2] RWS 1000 0.349 750*106 PP V-F-S-B
Deceleration initial jerk, set 0
8042 MR0 deceleration [rpm/s] RWS 500 1 1.5*106 PP V-F-S-B
Deceleration ramp, set 0
8043 MR0 dec end jerk [rpm/s2] RWS 1000 0.349 750*106 PP V-F-S-B
Deceleration end jerk, set 0
8044 MR0 end decel [rpm/s] RWS 1000 1 1.5*106 PP V-F-S-B
Final deceleration slope corresponding to removal of START command.
8056 MR1 acc ini jerk [rpm/s2] RWS 1000 0.349 750*106 PP V-F-S-B
Acceleration initial jerk, set 1
8050 MR1 acceleration [rpm/s] RWS 500 1 1.5*106 PP V-F-S-B
Acceleration ramp, set 1
8051 MR1 acc end jerk [rpm/s2] RWS 1000 0.349 750*106 PP V-F-S-B
Acceleration end jerk, set 1

8057 MR1 dec ini jerk [rpm/s2] RWS 1000 0.349 750*106 PP V-F-S-B
Deceleration initial jerk, set 1
8052 MR1 deceleration [rpm/s] RWS 500 1 1.5*106 PP V-F-S-B
Deceleration ramp, set 1
8053 MR1 dec end jerk [rpm/s2] RWS 1000 0.349 750*106 PP V-F-S-B
Deceleration end jerk, set 1
8054 MR1 end decel [rpm/s] RWS 1000 1 1.5*106 PP V-F-S-B
Final deceleration slope corresponding to removal of START command.
9421 SlowDown dist [mm] RW 0.00 0.00 0.00 FK V-F-S-B
It allows to calculate the distance from running speed to approach speed if for running speed and
approach speed Multispeed 1 and Multispeed 0 are used respectively.
SlowDown dist Calculate ?
Executing Calculate ? using Enter key, will be calculate the distance from running speed to approach speed.
NOTE! It is available only if IPA 1015 Travel units sel parameter is set to Millimeters.
TRAVEL / Lift sequence

7100 Cont close delay [ms] RWS 200 0.00 65535 PP V-F-S-B
Output contactor close delay. See Chapter 8 - Lift Sequencies
7101 Brake open delay [ms] RWS 0.00 0.00 65535 PP V-F-S-B
See Chapter 8 - Lift Sequencies
7102 Smooth start dly [ms] RWS 0.00 0.00 65535 PP V-F-S-B
See IPA 7110 into TRAVEL / Speed profile menu.
7103 Brake close dly [ms] RWS 200 0.00 65535 PP V-F-S-B
See Chapter 8 - Lift Sequencies
7104 Cont open delay [ms] RWS 200 0.00 65535 PP V-F-S-B
Output contactors open delay. See Chapter 8 - Lift Sequencies
7105 Seq start mode N/A RWS 0 0 2 DP V-F-S-B
0 Start fwd/rev
1 Enable
2 Mlt spd out !=0 (from software rel. 3.500).
It changes the way how contactor sequence starts:
Start fwd/rev selection allows to start contactor sequence without Enable command (Enable is required
only to run the motor). Enable signal can be given by an auxilary contact of output contactors Enable
selection allows to start contactor sequences only with Enable command.
Mlt spd out !=0 selection allows to start contactor sequencies with multispeed selection.
Non zero multi speed value will cause sequence start. Start command must be also asserted.
7106 Seq start sel N/A RWS 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
0 Standard inp Using Start fwd / rev src input
1 Alternative inp Using Start alt src input
7115 Start fwd src N/A RWS IPA 4021 List 3 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 4021 DI 1 monitor = Default (refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual)
7116 Start rev src N/A RWS IPA 4022 List 3 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 4022 DI 2 monitor = Default (refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual)
7117 Start alt src N/A RWS IPA 4000 List 3 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 4000 NULL = Default
7072 Mlt spd s 0 src N/A RWS IPA 4024 List 3 PIN V-F-S-B
DI 4 monitor = Default
It allows to select the origin of the signals stating the input combination of multispeed function.

(Mlt spd s 0 - 1 - 2 sources; refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual)
Mtl spd sel 2 src Mtl spd sel 1 src Mtl spd sel 0 src ACTIVE RAMP REF
0 0 0 Multi speed 0
0 0 1 Multi speed 1
0 1 0 Multi speed 2
0 1 1 Multi speed 3
1 0 0 Multi speed 4
1 0 1 Multi speed 5
1 1 0 Multi speed 6
1 1 1 Multi speed 7
7069 Mlt spd sel mon N/A R 0 0 7 DP V-F-S-B
Active selection displaying (Multispeed 0, Multispeed 1, etc.)
7070 Mlt spd out mon [rpm] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
It displays multispeed block output signal
8090 Mlt ramp sel src N/A RWS IPA 7149 List 3 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 7149 Short floor mon = Default
It allows to select the origin of the signals stating Multi ramp input combination (Mlt ramp s0-1 src;
refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual)
Multi Ramp sel src Active set
0 MR0
1 MR1
8078 Mlt ramp sel mon N/A R 0 0 3 DP V-F-S-B
Displaying of the selected ramp set
7147 Short floor spd1 N/A RWS 8 0 8 PP V-F-S-B
Selection of multispeed for which short floor function should be active. See Chapter 8, figure 8.5.
7148 Short floor spd2 N/A RWS 8 0 8 PP V-F-S-B
Selection of multispeed for which short floor function should be active. See Chapter 8, figure 8.5.
7143 Door open src N/A RWS IPA 4000 List 3 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 4000 NULL = Default (refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual)
Source to Enable the function through the digital input.
7138 Door open speed [rpm] RWS 0.00 0.00 Calc PP V-F-S-B
Door open speed threshold.
Door open src

Function enable signal
Speed
Door open speed
Door open control function.

This function allows anticipated door open control before the car arrival at the floor level. Door open signal can be

given on digital output when speed drops below settable threshold. The function must be enabled by the digital
input. Status of the speed checking command execution to open the door can be checked by providing the
feedback from door open mechanism to drive digital input.
Alarm can be generated if command and feedback dont match.
7118 Brake open src N/A RWS IPA 4001 List 3 PIN V-F-S-B
Source to enable brake release through the digital input. In standard sequence brake release is controlled
by the drive and therefore this parameter is set to ONE. In case that brake release should be conditioned
by some external control (e.g. PLC), set this parameter to digital input controlled by PLC.
Internal sequence for brake release will wait until this input is asserted.
During run brake will be closed whenever this input becomes not asserted.
TRAVEL / Speed reg gains

Allows to change speed regulation gain according to speed reference. Typically at low speed high gains are required
to have good starting behavior. At high speed lower gains are preferred to suppress eventual vibrations due to
mechanical imperfections. In case that values above 100% are required to achieve desired speed response increase
gains base values in menu REGULATION PARAM / Spd regulator / Base values, IPA 2075 and 2077.
When base values are increased percentage values are reduced such that resulting gain used by regulator
preserves original value. At this point percentage values can be increased.
NOTE! Bands % and Thr% can be set in TRAVEL/Speed threshold menu.
Default configuration (Spd 0 enable = Disable, only parameters 21 are set):

Gains #1 are used for middle (accel / decel) and high speed
Gains #2 are used at low speed (starting and approach speed)
Gain
SGP tran 21 band %
Spd P2 gain%
Spd P1 gain%
Speed ref
Spd I2 gain%
Spd I1 gain%
Speed ref
0
SGP tran 21 thr %

Possible configuration (Spd 0 enable = Disable, also parameters 32 are set):
Gains #1 are used for high speed (running)
Gains #2 are used for middle (accel / decel) speed
Gains #3 are used for low speed (starting / stopping)
Gain
SGP tran 32 band % SGP tran 21 band %
Spd P3 gain%
Spd P2 gain%
Spd P1 gain%
Speed ref
Spd I3 gain%
Spd I2 gain%
Spd I1 gain%
Speed ref
0
SGP tran 32 thr % SGP tran 21 thr %
Possible configuration (Spd 0 enable =Enable as spd 0, only parameters 21 are set):
Gains #0 are used for low speed (starting / stopping)
Gain
SGP tran 21 band %
Spd 0 P gain%
Spd P2 gain%
Spd P1 gain%
Speed ref
Spd 0 I gain%
Spd I2 gain%
Spd I1 gain%
Speed ref
0
Spd 0 ref thr
SGP tran 21 thr %

Possible configuration (Spd 0 enable =Enable as start, also parameters 32 are set):
Gains #3 are used for stopping
Gains #0 are used for starting
Gain
SGP tran 32 band % SGP tran 21 band %
Speed ref increasing
Spd 0 P gain%
Speed ref decreasing

Spd P2 gain%
Spd P3 gain%
Spd P1 gain%
Speed ref increasing Speed ref
Spd 0 I gain%
Speed ref decreasing

Spd I2 gain%
Spd I3 gain%
Spd I1 gain%
Speed ref
0
SGP tran 32 thr % SGP tran 21 thr %
3700 SpdP1 gain % [%] RWS 10 0 100 PP F-S-B

Proportional speed 1 regulator gain at high speed
3701 SpdI1 gain % [%] RWS 10 0 100 PP F-S-B
Integral speed 1 regulator gain at high speed
Proportional speed 2 regulator gain at medium speed
Integral speed 2 regulator gain at medium speed
Proportional speed 3 regulator gain at low speed
Integral speed 3 regulator gain at low speed
3720 Spd 0 enable N/A RWS 0 0 1 DP F-S-B
Apart from gain adaptive function, it is possible to have another set of gains when speed reference is
below Speed 0 reference threshold parameter. Function must be enabled by this parameter.
0 Disable
1 Enable as spd 0
2 Enable as start (from software rel. 3.300).
3722 Spd 0 P gain % [%] RWS Calc 0 100 PP F-S-B
Proportional speed 0 regulator gain at zero speed
3723 Spd 0 I gain % [%] RWS Calc 0 100 PP F-S-B
Integral speed 0 regulator gain at zero speed
2530 Sfbk der enable N/A RWSZ 0 0 1 DV F-S-B
Speed feedback derivative function enable / disable.

0 Disable
1 Enable
+ Speed
Speed ref S regulator
-
Sfbk der enable
Disable
Norm Speed
Enable
Speed feedback
derivative
1 + S T1
________ T1 = Sfbk der gain Sfbk der base
1 + S T2 T2 = Sfbk der filter
2540 Sfbk der gain [%] RWS 0 -100 100 PV F-S-B

Speed feedback derivative gain.
2550 Sfbk der base [ms] RWS 10000 0 10000 FK F-S-B
Base feedback derivative gain.
2560 Sfbk der filter [ms] RWS 5 0 1000 PP F-S-B
Speed feeedback derivative filter
2380 Prop filter [ms] RWS 1.5 0.15 1000 PP F-S-B
Filter on the proportional part of torque reference. Can be used to suppress the noise.
TRAVEL / Speed threshold

3726 Spd 0 ref thr [rpm] RWS 30 0 0 PP V-F-S-B
Speed 0 reference threshold
3727 Spd 0 ref delay [ms] RWS 500 0 30000 PP V-F-S-B
Speed 0 reference delay
Speed ref
Speed 0 ref thr
Ref is zero
Ref is zero dly

Spd 0 ref delay
1
Brake cont mon
0
NOTE! Ref is zero and Ref is zero dly signals are available in the pick-lists of the digital outputs.
Brake cont mon signal is available a digital relay output (83-85 terminals).
3724 Spd 0 speed thr [rpm] RWS 30 0 0 PP V-F-S-B
Speed 0 speed threshold.
3725 Spd 0 spd delay [ms] RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V-F-S-B
Speed 0 speed delay

Norm Speed
Speed 0 spd thr
Spd is zero
Spd 0 spd delay
Spd is zero dly
NOTE! Spd is zero and Spd is zero dly signals are available in the pick-lists of the digital and analog
outputs.
3706 SGP tran21 h thr [%] RWS 15 0 100 PP F-S-B

See Possible/Default configuration figures on TRAVEL / Speed reg gains menu.
3707 SGP tran32 l thr [%] RWS 0 0 100 PP F-S-B
3708 SGP tran21 band [%] RWS 10 0 100 PP F-S-B
3709 SGP tran32 band [%] RWS 0 0 100 PP F-S-B
TRAVEL / Pre-torque
Pre torque function helps to ensure smooth starting without initial jerk. This is achieved by setting the torque prior
to open the brake to a value that corresponds to the load. Pre torque value applied to the motor as well as direction
of applied torque can be provided by mounting load cell on the lift car. Load cell signal is acquired through analog
input and scaled appropriately, if pre-torque function is used.
If load cell is not available it is possible to work with fixed value of torque and provide only torque direction. In this
case fixed value is optimized only for one load condition.
Speed +
regulator S Torque ref
+
Pre-torque gain
PRE-TORQUE BLOCK Torque ref 2 src
Null Constant
Pre-torque src -1 Pre-torque out
t
+1
One
Ramp
Pre-torque sign src
9431 Int Pre-torque [%] RWS 0 0 100 PV F-S-B

Internal (fixed) motor pre-torque value
9432 Pre-torque time [sec] RWS 1.0 0.01 5 PP F-S-B
Pre-torque duration in case that IPA 9439 is selected as ramp.

9438 Pre-torque gain [%] RWS 1.0 0 4.0 PP F-S-B
Gain factor of the Pre-torque function to scale value from load sensor.
Pre-torque gain value is automatically calculated after mechanical and weights data have been entered.
9439 Pre-torque type N/A WSZ 0 0 1 DV F-S-B
0 Ramp Initial torque will be removed in ramp
1 Costant Initial torque remains constant
Pre-torque type control
9434 Pre-torque src N/A RWSZ IPA 9431 List 2 PIN F-S-B
IPA 9431 Int Pre-torque = Default
It allows to select an analog input to provide motor pre-torque value
9435 Pre-trq sign src N/A RWSZ IPA 4000 List 3 PIN F-S-B
It connects the selected signal to the selector of the multiplier input: if the signal is 0, multiply by +1, or if
the signal is 1, multiply by 1 (refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual).
TRAVEL / Inertia comp
Inertia compensation function can be used to compensate the inertia caused by the load of the motor during
acceleration / deceleration phase. It avoids also speed overshoot at the end of ramp.
2580 Inertia comp en N/A RWS 1 0 1 DV F-S-B
0 OFF Inertia compensation function is switched off
1 Internal Inertia compensation function is using speed reference to calculate
acceleration
2 External Inertia compensation function is using speed acceleration provided by
external control through SBI card.
It enables inertia compensation function
2054 Int Inertia [kgm2] RWS 0 0 Calc PV F-S-B
Internal value of the moment of Inertia.
Inertia value is automatically calculated after mechanical and weights data have been entered.
2590 Inertia comp flt [ms] RWS 30 0 1000 PP F-S-B
Filter on the compensation
2625 Inertia comp mon [Nm] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 DV F-S-B
It displays Inertia compensation torque contribution.
Inertia comp
Acceleration J
________
1 + S Tf
Inertia comp
SJ
________
1 + S Tf Internal External
Off
Inertia comp mon

+ +
Speed ref Speed +
S regulator S
-
J = Int inertia
Norm Speed Tf = Inertia comp flt
NOTE! Inertia comp mon signals is available in the pick-lists of the analog outputs.

TRAVEL / DC braking
DC current injection can help to stop the motor and ensure that lift car arrives exactly at floor level.
1836 DCbrake cmd src N/A RWS IPA 7125 List 3 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 7125 Lift DC Brake mon = Default
It allows to select the origin of the signal to command DC braking function, normally if is controled by lift
sequence. (refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual)
1833 DCbrake delay [sec] RWS 0.1 0.01 30 PP V-F-S-B
Delay between the injection command and the injection of the current itself
1834 DCbrake duration [sec] RWS 1 0.01 30 PP V-F-S-B
Duration of the current injection
1835 DCbrake current [%] RWS 100 0 100 PP V-F-S-B
Braking current as a percentage of Drive continuos current
1837 DCBrake state N/A R 0 0 1 DV V-F-S-B
0 non-active
1 active
State of DC Brake functon.
NOTE! Sequence available only when IPA 7105 set as Start fwd/rev.
Lift DC brake mon signal that controls DC current braking is not available.
Speed ref
Speed 0 ref thr
DC brake cmd src
Speed 0 ref dly + Brake close dly
Lift DC brake mon
Output current
DC brake
DC brake duration
delay A DC brake current
DC brake state
A = DC brake delay + DC brake duration > Spd 0 ref dly + Brake close dly
B = DC brake delay + DC brake duration < Spd 0 ref dly + Brake close dly

TRAVEL / Ramp function

8031 Ramp out enable N/A WSZ 1 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Ramp function enabling
8021 Ramp shape N/A RWS 1 0 1 DV V-F-S-B
0 Linear
1 S-Shaped
Ramp selection. Linear or S-shaped ramp
TRAVEL / Ramp setpoint

The Function of this block is to generate the Set point for the ramp. Set reference by algebraically adding its inputs.
All parameters in this menu have default values set for lift application.
TRAVEL / Ramp setpoint / Ramp ref src

7035 Ramp ref 1 src N/A RWS IPA 7130 List 7 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 7130 Lift out spd mon = Default
It select the origin of the signal of Ramp ref 1
IPA 7031 Int ramp ref 2 = Default
IPA 7038 Int ramp ref 3 = Default
7037 Ramp ref inv src N/A RWS IPA 4000 List 3 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 7121 DOWN Count mon = Default
It connects the selected signal to the selector of the multiplier input:if the signal is 0, multiply by +1,
or if the signal is 1, multiply by 1. The multiplier allows to invert Ramp reference signal (refer to signals
List 3 of Pick List manual). By using DOWN cont mon / Up cont mon it is possible to invert lift
movement direction that corresponds to commands Start fwd src (IPA 7115), Start rev src (IPA 7116).
TRAVEL / Ramp setpoint / Ramp ref cfg

7030 Int ramp ref 1 [rpm] RWS 0 Calc Calc PV V-F-S-B
Value of the Int ramp ref 1 variable
TRAVEL / Ramp setpoint / Ramp ref mon

7032 Ramp ref 1 mon [rpm] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PP V-F-S-B
Displaying of the Ramp ref 1 signal
7034 Ramp setpoint [rpm] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Displaying of the Ramp setpoint output signal

+1 Ramp setpoint
Ramp ref 1 mon
+ 1 + 2
Ramp ref = Ramp
Ramp ref 1 src S S out mon
+ + F
Lift out spd mon
Ramp ref 3 mon

Ramp shape
Ramp ref 3 src
-1
Int ramp ref 3
Ramp ref 2 mon
Ramp ref 2 src Ramp ref inv src
Int ramp ref 2 DOWN Cont mon
1. Switch is closed if Ramp out enable = Enabled & Start. Switch is opened if Ramp out enable = Enabled & Stop
2. Switch is closed if Ramp out enable = Enabled & (!Fast stop). Switch is opened if Ramp out enable = Enabled & Fast stop
Both switches are closed if Ramp out enable = Disabled
TRAVEL / Speed setpoint

The function of the block is to generate the set point for the speed regulator by algebraically adding its inputs, see
ramp set point. All parameters in this menu have default values set for lift application.
TRAVEL / Speed setpoint / Speed ref src

7050 Speed ref 1 src N/A RWS IPA 7040 List 9 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 7040 Int speed ref 1 = Default
It select the origin of the signal of Speed ref 1 in V/f, SLS. LZ speed ref (IPA 9408) in FOC, BRS
(refer to signals List 9 of Pick List manual)List 9)
7051 Speed ref 2 src N/A RWS IPA 7041 List 10 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 7041 Int speed ref 2 = Default
It select the origin of the signal of Speed ref 2. (Refer to signals List 10 of Pick List manual).
7053 Speedref inv src N/A RWS IPA 4000 List 3 PIN V-F-S-B
It connects the selected signal to the selector of the multiplier input: if the signal is 0, multiply by +1, or
if the signal is 1, multiply by 1. The multiplier allows to invert Speed reference signal (refer to signals
List 3 of Pick List manual)
TRAVEL / Speed setpoint / Speed ref cfg

7040 Int speed ref 1 [rpm] RWS 0 Calc Calc PV V-F-S-B
Value of the Int speed ref 1 variable
7041 Int speed ref 2 [rpm] RWS 0 Calc Calc PV V-F-S-B
Value of the Int speed ref 2 variable
TRAVEL / Speed setpoint / Speed ref mon

8022 Ramp out mon [rpm] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Displaying of Ramp output signal
7045 Speed ref 1 mon [rpm] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PP V-F-S-B
Displaying of the Speed ref 1 signal

7046 Speed ref 2 mon [rpm] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PP V-F-S-B
Displaying of the Speed ref 2 signal
+1
Ramp out enable
+ 1 + 2
Ramp out mon S S Speed setpoint
F + + F
Speed ref 1 src
Zero
LZ speed ref Speed ref 1 mon
Int speed ref 1
0 rpm
-1
Speed ref 2 src Speed ref inv src=null

Ramp ref 2 mon
Int speed ref 2
Int speed ref 2 1. Switch is closed if Ramp out enable = Disabled & Start
Switch is opened if Ramp out enable = Disabled & Stop
0 rpm 2. Switch is closed if Ramp out enable = Disabled & (!Fast stop)
Switch is opened if Ramp out enable = Disabled & Fast stop
Both switches are closed if Ramp out enable = Enabled
SAVE PARAMETERS
Any changes made in STARTUP menu require Save Config? command, which saves all entire regulation mode selected.
It is recommended every time the user made any changes into STARTUP menu.
When on the keypad display appears blinking message Use Save Config, use Save Config? command

REGULATION P
REGULATION ARAM
PARAM
Most of the parameters in this menu are initialized by autotune procedure. The access to REGULATION PARAM
menu is allowed by Level 1 password: 12345. It must to be set in the SERVICE menu.
REGULATION PARAM / V/f reg param

3400 Voltage boost [%] RWS Calc 0.00 0.00 PV V
Torque boost at low speed. It allows to increase the output voltage at zero Hz.
Initialized by autotune procedure
3531 Slip comp [rpm] RWS Calc 0.00 Calc PV V
Compensation of speed drop due to load. Initialized by autotune procedure.
When Slip comp mode = Encoder, it acts as a limit on the amount of speed correction obtained from
encoder feedback. In general parameter must be increased to about 4 times of rated motor slip.
Low values of Slip comp parameter may cause instability.
3541 Slip comp filter [sec] RWS 0.50 Calc 10 PP V
Slip compensation filter.
3411 Slip comp mode N/A RWS 0 0 2 DP V
0 Normal Standard slip compensation using load current
1 Encoder Slip compensation using encoder feedback in closed loop speed control,
see IPA 3531
2 Lift Slip compensation using load current, suitable for lift application
3412 Slip P gain [%] RWS 2.0 0 100 PP V
Proportional gain of slip regulator. It must be adjusted according to actual load conditions (inertia).
In general, if there are oscillations, the proportional gain must be increased.
3413 Slip I gain [%] RWS 0.5 0 100 PP V
Integral gain of slip regulator. It must be adjusted according to actual load conditions (inertia). In
general, if there are oscillations, the integral gain must be reduced.
3585 Antioscill gain [%] RWS 0 0 100 PP V
It allows to damp the current oscillations in the motor, which could be developed in the middle range of
the rated speed
3520 V/f ILim P gain [rpm_A] RWS Calc Calc Calc PP V
Proportional gain of the pseudo current loop regulator in V/f mode
3530 V/f ILim I gain [rpm_A] RWS Calc Calc Calc PP V
Integral gain of the pseudo current loop regulator in V/f mode
REGULATION PARAM / Spd regulator
REGULATION PARAM / Spd regulator / Percent values

3700 SpdP1 gain % [%] RWS Calc 0.00 00 PP F-S-B
Proportional speed 1 gain regulator at high speed
3701 SpdI1 gain % [%] RWS Calc 0.00 00 PP F-S-B
Integral speed 1 gain regulator at high speed
REGULATION PARAM / Spd regulator / Base values

2075 SpdP base value [A/rpm] RWS Calc 0.00 0.00 FK F-S-B
Basic value of the speed Proportional gain
2077 SpdI base value [A/rpm] RWS Calc 0.00 Calc FK F-S-B
Basic value of the speed Integral gain

REGULATION PARAM / Spd regulator / In use values
2063 InUse SpdP gain% [%] R 10 0 100 PV F-S-B
In use value of the speed Proportional gain
2065 InUse SpdI gain% [%] R 10 0 100 PV F-S-B
In use value of the speed Integral gain
REGULATION PARAM / Curr regulator
REGULATION PARAM / Curr regulator / Percent values

1999 CurrP gain % [%] RWS Calc 0.00 100 PP V-F-S-B
Proportional gain of current loop
2000 CurrI gain % [%] RWS Calc 0.00 100 PP V-F-S-B
Integral gain of current loop
REGULATION PARAM / Curr regulator / Base values

2005 CurrP base value [V/A] RWS Calc 0.00 Calc FK V-F-S-B
Basic value of the proportional gain of current loop
2007 CurrI base value [V/A/s] RWS Calc 0.00 Calc FK V-F-S-B
Basic value of the integral gain of current loop
REGULATION PARAM / Curr regulator / Dead time comp

The function allows for compensation of the output voltage distortion due to IGBT voltage drop and
its switching characteristics.
530 Dead time limit [V] RWS Calc 0.00 50 PP V-F-S-B
Value of the voltage compensation
540 Dead time slope [V/A] RWS Calc 0.00 100 PP V-F-S-B
Compensation Gradient
REGULATION PARAM / Flux regulator
REGULATION PARAM / Flux regulator / Percent values

2013 FlxP gain % [%] RWS Calc 0 100 PP F-S
Proportional gain of flux loop
2015 FlxI gain % [%] RWS Calc 0 100 PP F-S
Integral gain of flux loop
REGULATION PARAM / Flux regulator / Base values

2021 FlxP base value [A/Wb] RWS Calc 0.00 Calc FK F-S
Basic value of the proportional gain of flux loop
2023 FlxI base value [A/Wb/s]RWS Calc 0.00 Calc FK F-S
Basic value of the integral gain of flux loop
REGULATION PARAM / Vlt regulator
REGULATION PARAM / Vlt regulator / Percent values

2031 VltP gain % [%] RWS Calc 0.00 100 PP F-S-B
Proportional gain of voltage loop
2033 VltI gain % [%] RWS Calc 0.00 100 PP F-S-B
Integral gain of voltage loop

REGULATION PARAM / Vlt regulator / Base values
2039 VltP base value [A/V] RWS Calc 0.00 0.00 FK F-S-B
Basic value of the proportional gain of voltage loop
2041 VltI base value [A/V/s] RWS Calc 0.00 0.00 FK F-S-B
Basic value of the integral gain of voltage loop
REGULATION PARAM / Torque config

Inuse Tcurr lim+
Prop filter
+ +
Speed reg out Filter S S Tcurr ref
+ +
Inuse Tcurr lim- Torque ref
Off Inertia comp Torque ref 2 mon
T lim +/- Torque ref 2 src
T lim mot/gen
T lim sym var
T lim pos var Tcurr lim sel
T lim neg var
REGULATION PARAM / Torque config / Torque setpoint / T setpoint src

2441 Torque ref 2 src N/A RWS IPA 9433 List15 PIN F-S-B
IPA 9433 Pre-torque out = Default
It allows to select the origin of the signal for torque reference
REGULATION PARAM / Torque config / Torque setpoint / T setpoint cfg

2440 Int torque ref 2 [Nm] RWS 0.00 Calc Calc PV F-S-B
It allows to set an alternative reference to connect to Torque ref 2 src
REGULATION PARAM / Torque config / Torque setpoint / T setpoint mon

2442 Torque ref 2 mon [Nm] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PP F-S-B
Torque ref 2 variable displaying
2450 Torque ref [Nm] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV F-S-B
Overall Torque ref variable displaying
REGULATION PARAM / Torque config / Torque curr lim / Trq curr lim src
1195 Trq curr lim src N/A RWS IPA 4000 List15 PIN V-F-S-B
It allows to select the origin of the signal for torque current limit
(refer to signals List 15 of Pick List manual) (from software rel. 3.300).
REGULATION PARAM / Torque config / Torque curr lim / Trq curr lim cfg
1190 Tcurr lim sel N/A RWS 0 0 4 DV V-F-S-B
0 Off None Limits depend on drive rating.
1 T lim +/- Positive or negative limit Limits depend on IPA 1210, IPA1220
2 T lim mot/gen Motor or Generator limit Limits depend on IPA 1210, IPA1220
3 T lim sym var Limits are controlled by IPA 1195. (from software rel. 3.300).
4 T lim pos var Limits are controlled by IPA 1195. (from software rel. 3.300).
5 T lim neg var Limits are controlled by IPA 1195. (from software rel. 3.300).
Selection of the torque Current limit type
1210 Tcurr lim + [A] RWS Calc 0.00 Calc PV V-F-S-B
Positive current limit or Motor (Positive power) limit.

1220 Tcurr lim - [A] RWS Calc 0.00 Calc PV V-F-S-B
Negative current limit or Generator (Negative power) limit.
REGULATION PARAM / Torque config / Torque curr lim / Trq curr lim mon
1250 Inuse Tcurr lim+ [A] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Monitor of the positive current limit in use
1260 Inuse Tcurr lim- [A] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Monitor for the negative current limit in use
2445 Tcurr lim state N/A R 0 0 1 DV V-F-S-B
Current limit state
0 Not-reached
1 Reached
REGULATION PARAM / Flux config
REGULATION PARAM / Flux config / Magnetiz config

Autophase rot / Start ?
Autophasing command to phase brushless motors. After pressing Start, give the Enable and Start
command to drive. Motor must be free of any load, brake must be released.
Motor will first align and then rotate slightly at very low speed.
Autophase still / Start ?
Autophasing command to phase brushless motors. After pressing Start, give the Enable and Start
command to drive. Drive will perform phasing procedure without rotation. Brake can be locked
1810 Magn ramp time [sec] RWS D.Size 0.01 5 PP F-S
Set of the ramp time of the magnetizing current
1815 Lock flux pos N/A RWSZ 0 0 1 DP F-S-B
0 Off No locking of flux position
1 At magnetization Flux position is locked during magnetization
2 At Spd = 0 Flux positon is locked when stop command has been issued and
signal "Speed is zero delayed" becomes TRUE
3 At Magn & Spd = 0 Flux positon is locked during magnetization or when stop
command has been issued and signal "Speed is zero delayed"
becomes TRUE
4 At magn & Ref=0 Flux positon is locked during magnetization or when both signals
"Speed reference is zero delayed" and "Speed is zero delayed"
become TRUE
The function is useful for undesidered motor shaft rotation. It allows to lock the Flux position.
REGULATION PARAM / Flux config / Flux max limit / Flux max lim src
This Function allows the user to control the maximum value of the Flux current.
It is linked to the control of the voltage loop. In a condition where the Flux is = 100%, the voltage regulator prevails
by controlling the motor. It means that it is only possible to further limit the requirement of the voltage loop. In case
the Drive is active in the constant torque area, it is possible to set an overflux up to 115% of the rated flux. Such
control is possible, obviously, only if the motor/drive combination is in a position to supply a sufficient magnetizing
current.
1121 Flux level src N/A RWS IPA 1120 List 24 PIN F-S-B
IPA 1120 Int flx maxlim = Default
It allows to select the origin of the signal to control the function

REGULATION PARAM / Flux config / Flux max limit / Flux max lim cfg
1120 Int flx maxlim [%] RWS 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV F-S-B
It allows to set an alternative signal to connect to Flux level src
REGULATION PARAM / Flux config / Flux max limit / Flux max lim mon
1150 Inuse flx maxlim [%] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV F-S-B
Monitor of flux limit value in use
REGULATION PARAM / Flux config / Output vlt ref

The Function allows the regulation of the flux in the constant power area where a voltage margin must be
available for the regulation. This value is usually equal to 2% of the maximum output voltage.
A higher value allows a faster response of the voltage regulator but with a lower amount of available voltage on the
output. A lower value allows a higher output voltage with a decrease of the dynamic performances
REGULATION PARAM / Flux config / Output vlt ref / Out vlt ref src
1141 Outvlt lim src N/A RWS IPA 1140List 42 PIN F-S-B
IPA 1140 Int Outvlt lim = Default
It allows to select the origin of the signal to control the function
REGULATION PARAM / Flux config / Output vlt ref / Out vlt ref cfg
1140 Int Outvlt lim [V] RWS Calc Calc Calc PV F-S-B
Internal output voltage limit. initialized from motor rated voltage.
This parameter determines the start of flux weakening. Connected to Outvlt lim src
1130 Dyn vlt margin [%] RWS 2 1 10 PV F-S-B
Voltage margin for the flux regulation
REGULATION PARAM / Flux config / Output vlt ref / Out vlt ref mon
1170 Available Outvlt [V] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV F-S-B
Monitor for the maximum available output voltage.
It is calculated directly starting from the DC link voltage
1180 Inuse Outvlt ref [V] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV F-S-B
Limit in use on the output voltage
2044 Magn curr lim [A] RWS 0.00 0.00 Calc PP B
Limit for magnetizing current reference.
Set to value different from zero to enable operation above rated speed for brushless motors field
weakening.
REGULATION PARAM / Sls SpdFbk gains
In the Sensorless regulation mode the motor speed is estimated through an observer algorithm based on a speed
gains profile. The procedure below allows the user to improve the gains profile of the observer circuit at low,
medium and high Motoring/Regen speed.
REGULATION PARAM / Sls SpdFbk gains / Motoring gains
1090 SLS mot HPgain [%] RWS 5 0 100 PP S
Motor Proportional High gain
1091 SLS mot HIgain [%] RWS 5 0 100 PP S
Motor Integral High gain
1092 SLS mot MPgain [%] RWS 5 0 100 PP S
Motor Proportional Medium gain

1093 SLS mot MIgain [%] RWS 5 0 100 PP S
Motor Integral Medium gain
1094 SLS mot LPgain [%] RWS 1 0 100 PP S
Motor Proportional Low gain
1095 SLS mot LIgain [%] RWS 0 0 100 PP S
Motor Integral Low gain
REGULATION PARAM / Sls SpdFbk gains / Regen gains

1101 SLS regen HPgain [%] RWS 5 0 100 PP S
Regen Proportional High gain
1102 SLS regen HIgain [%] RWS 5 0 100 PP S
Regen Integral High gain
1103 SLS regen MPgain [%] RWS 5 0 100 PP S
Regen Proportional Medium gain
1104 SLS regen MIgain [%] RWS 5 0 100 PP S
Regen Integral Medium gain
1105 SLS regen LPgain [%] RWS 1 0 100 PP S
Regen Proportional Low gain
1106 SLS regen LIgain [%] RWS 0 0 100 PP S
Regen Integral Low gain
REGULATION PARAM / Sls SpdFbk gains / Gain transitions

1096 SLS H/M tran level [rpm] RWS Calc 0.00 Calc PP S
Transition level from High to Medium profile
1097 SLS M/L tran level [rpm] RWS Calc 0.00 Calc PP S
Transition level from Medium to Low profile
1098 SLS H/M tran bnd[rpm] RWS Calc 0.00 Calc PP S
Transition band from High to Medium profile
1099 SLS M/L tran bnd [rpm] RWS Calc 0.00 Calc PP S
Transition band from Medium to Low profile
1107 SLS 0 tran bnd [rpm] RWS Calc 0.00 Calc PP S
Speed 0 transition band (Motoring/Regen/Motoring)
1111 Observer filter [ms] RWS 100 Calc Calc PP S
Time constant of the first-order Filter on both gains profile
REGULATION PARAM / Sls SpdFbk gains / Gain monitor

1085 Inuse S P gain [%] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV S
In use Proportional gains of speed observer.
1086 Inuse S I gain [%] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV S
In use Integral gains of speed observer.
1112 Observer ref mon [%] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PP S
Observer adapt gain reference monitor.
REGULATION PARAM / Test generator

The tuning of the regulators can be done using an internal test signal generator in order to evaluate the
regulator response. This operation requires the use of a digital oscilloscope. The Test generator generates
signal shaped as a rectangular wave with a programmable frequency and amplitude.

Using the Test generator function it is possible to carry out the manual tunings of Current regulator, Flux regulator
Voltage regulator and Speed regulator.
REGULATION PARAM / Test generator / Test gen mode

2756 Test gen mode N/A RWS 0 0 6 DK V-F-S-B
0 Off
1 Ramp ref 1 Ramp reference 1
2 Speed ref 1 Speed reference 1
3 Torque ref 2 Torque reference 2
4 Magn curr ref Magnetizing current reference
5 Flux ref Flux reference
6 Outvlt lim Voltage reference
This parameter defines where the test signal is connected in the control scheme.
REGULATION PARAM / Test generator / Test gen cfg

2745 Gen Hi ref [cnt] RWS 0 32767 -32767 PV V-F-S-B
Value in count of the higher amplitude signal value
2750 Gen Low ref [cnt] RWS 0 32767 -32767 PV V-F-S-B
Value in count of the lower amplitude signal value
2755 Gen Period [sec] RWS 10 0 10000 PV V-F-S-B
Period of the square wave
REGULATION PARAM / Test generator / Test gen mon

2760 Gen output [cnt] R 0.00 0.00 0.00 PV V-F-S-B
Monitorig the test generator output signal.
Gen output
Gen period
Gen Hi ref
Gen Low ref
SAVE PARAMETERS

I/O CONFIG
The access to I/O CONFIG menu is allowed by Level 1 password: 12345. It must all be set in the SERVICE menu.
I/O CONFIG / Commands
Configuration of Enable, Start commands. All parameters in this menu have default values set for lift application.
I/O CONFIG / Commands / Commands src

153 Term StrStp src N/A RWS IPA 4001 List 16 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 4001 ONE = Default
It allows to select the signal to generate the Start (1) command and of the terminal strip Stop (0) command
9210 Term Start src N/A RWS IPA 4000 List 16 PIN V-F-S-B
It allows to select the signal to generate the terminal strip Start command
9211 Term Stop src N/A RWS IPA 4000 List 16 PIN V-F-S-B
It allows to select the signal to generate the terminal strip Stop command
156 Dig Enable src N/A RWS IPA 7128 List 17 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 7128 Lift Enable mon= Default
It allows to select the signal to generate a digital Enable command
157 Dig StrStp src N/A RWS IPA 7129 List 17 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 7129 Lift Start mon = Default
It allows to select the signal to generate the a digital Start (1) command and a digital Stop (0) command
154 FastStop src N/A RWS IPA 4000 List 18 PIN V-F-S-B
It allows to select the signal to generate the FastStop command
I/O CONFIG / Commands / Commands cfg

Commands select parameter determines the logic for the Start/Stop Edge sensitive signal or
Level sensitive signal or I O keys keypad commands control
4002 Commands select N/A RWS 2 0 4 DV V-F-S-B
0 Terminals Level The drive is controlled via terminal strip using a Level sensitive signals
1 Terminals Edge The drive is controlled via terminal strip using a Edge sensitive signals
2 Digital Level The drive is controlled from a communication or application card using a
Level sensitive signals
3 Digital Edge The drive is controlled from a communication or application card using a
Edge sensitive signals
4 I O keys The drive is controlled from the keyboard using the I O keys;
terminal 12 to and terminal 13 to 24Vdc are required
Setting of this parameter is not allowed while terminal enable is active.
4004 En/Disable mode N/A RWS 0 0 3 DP V-F-S-B
0 Off
1 Stop/FS & Spd=0
2 Stop & Spd=0
3 FS & Spd=0
It controls the action time of the stop condition.
Setting of this parameter is not allowed while terminal enable is active.

4006 Spd 0 dis dly [ms] RWS 1000 16 10000 PP V-F-S-B
Delay time between the zero speed and the disabling procedure
I/O CONFIG / Commands / Commands mon

150 Enable cmd mon N/A R 0 0 1 DV V-F-S-B
It displays the Enable command state
151 Start cmd mon N/A R 0 0 1 DV V-F-S-B
It displays the Start command state
152 FastStop cmd mon N/A R 0 0 1 DV V-F-S-B
It displays the FastStop command state
I/O CONFIG / Analog inputs

Drive has 3 standard and 2 expanded analog inputs. Each AI block has the following structure.
Analog inputs can also be used as non isolated digital inputs by using An inp X<thr as output and setting
appropriately parameter Anp inp X thr.
AI 1 sgn src
An inp 1 < thr NULL
SET BY AI 1 alt sel src
An inp 1 NULL
AUTOTUNE
An inp 1 offset An inp 1 thr
+1
+ An inp 1 output
An inp 1 type + F
S (*)
INPUT
An inp 1 scale -1 AI 1 alt value

An inp 1 filter An inp 1 hi lim
An inp 1 gain
An inp 1 output
SET BY An inp 1 lo lim (*)
An inp 1 CALIBRATION
AUTOTUNE An inp 1 hi lim OF
ANALOG INPUT
HARDWARE JUMPER -16384 16384
: Off --> AI1 +/- 10V

S8 An inp 1 lo lim (Input[V] * 16384 /10[V]) * Gain * Scale
: On --> AI1 0-20mA ;4 - 20mA
Analog inputs / Std analog inps / Analog input 1 / An inp 1 src

5011 AI 1 sgn src N/A RWS IPA 4000 List 3 PIN V-F-S-B
It connects the selected signal to the selector of the multiplier input: if the signal is 0,
multiply by +1, or if the signal is 1, multiply by 1. The multiplier allows to invert Analog Input 1 signal
5012 AI 1 alt sel src N/A RWS IPA 4000 List 3 PIN V-F-S-B
It connects the selected signal to the selector of the alternative reference for An. Inp. 1 block
Analog inputs / Std analog inps / Analog input 1 / An inp 1 cfg

5000 An inp 1 type N/A RWS 0 0 2 DP V-F-S-B
0 -10V...+10V Input connects a signal with a maximum voltage of +/-10V. (The change in

the motor rotation direction is obtained according to the signal polarity).
Input voltage > 10V or >-10V cause saturation of the count value.
1 0..20mA,0..10V On the input its possible to connect a max voltage of +10V or a 020mA
current signal. The signal must always have a positive sign, through which,
if used as a reference, it is possible to change the motor rotation direction via
AI 1 sgn src
2 4..20mA On the input it is possible to connect a 4 20mA current signal.
The signal must always have a positive sign through which, if used as a
reference, it is possible to change the motor rotation direction via AI 1 sgn src.
Through the An inp X <thr output it is possible to state if the current signal is
lower than the one of the set threshold. If the current is <= 4mA , the
output supplies a signal (error signal). This, for example, can be combined
with a digital output
NOTE! An inp 1 type selection requires a correct jumpers configuration of RV33 regulation card:
-10V...+10V & 0..10V S8=OFF S9=OFF S10=OFF
0..20mA & 4..20mA S8=ON S9= ON S10= ON
5002 AI 1 alt value [cnt] RWS 0 32767 -32767 PV V-F-S-B
Alternative reference value in count for Analog input 1
5003 An inp 1 thr [cnt] RWS 3277 -16384 16383 PP V-F-S-B
Analog Input 1 threshold value in count
5004 An inp 1 scale N/A RWS 1 -16 16 PP V-F-S-B
Analog Input 1 scale factor
5006 An inp 1 filter [sec] RWS 0.0064 0.00 4.096 PP V-F-S-B
Time constant of the Analog Input 1 filter
5007 An inp 1 low lim [cnt] RWS -16384 -32768 32767 PP V-F-S-B
Lower limit of the Analog Input 1 block output in count (see figure below)
5008 An inp 1 hi lim [cnt] RWS 16383 -32768 32767 PP V-F-S-B
Upper limit of the Analog Input 1 block output in count (see figure below)
AI 1 offs tune / Start?
Autotune command for the Analog Input 1 offset. Input automatic fine-tuning.
To run the autotune, put the input signal to its minimum value and execute Start ? command
AI 1 gain tune / Start?
Autotune command for the Analog Input 1 gain. Conditions containing an offset can be compensated.
To run the autotune, put the input signal to its maximum value and execute Start ? command
Analog inputs / Std analog inps / Analog input 1 / An inp 1 mon

5009 An inp 1 output [cnt] R 0.00 -32768 32767 PV V-F-S-B
Analog Input 1 output count displaying
5010 An inp 1 < thr N/A R 0 0 1 DV V-F-S-B
Display of threshold compensator state of Analog Input 1 (1 = the condition is true)
5001 An inp 1 offset [cnt] RWS 0 -16384 16383 PP V-F-S-B
Analog Input 1 offset count value displaying
5005 An inp 1 gain N/A RWS 1 -16 16 PP V-F-S-B
Analog Input 1 gain count value displaying


5032 AI 2 alt sel src N/A RWS IPA 4000List 3 PIN V-F-S-B

0 -10V ... +10V
1 0..20mA,0..10V
3 4..20mA
For An inp 2 type description refer to An inp 1 type description above
5027 An inp 2 lo lim [cnt] RWS -16384 -32768 32767 PP V-F-S-B
Lower limit of the Analog Input 2 block output in count (see figure of Analog Input 1 above)
Upper limit of the Analog Input 2 block output in count (see figure of Analog Input 1 above)
AI 2 offs tune / Start?
Refer to AI 1 offs tune description above
AI 2 gain tune / Start?
Refer to AI 1 gain tune description above

5025 An inp 2 gain N/A RWS 1 -16 16 PP V-F-S-B

5052 AI 3 alt sel src N/A RWS IPA 4000 List 3 PIN V-F-S-B


0 -10V ... +10V
1 0..20mA,0..10V
2 4..20mA
For An inp 3 type description refer to An inp 1 type description above
5047 An inp 3 lo lim [cnt] RWS -16384 -32768 32767 PP V-F-S-B
Lower limit of the Analog Input 3 block output in count (see figure of Analog Input 1 above)
Upper limit of the Analog Input 3 block output in count (see figure of Analog Input 1 above)
AI 3 offs tune
AI 3 gain tune
Refer to AI 1 gain tune description above

5045 An inp 3 gain - RWS 1 -16 16 PP V-F-S-B
Analog inputs / Exp analog inps / Analog input 1X / An inp 1X src

5069 AI 1X sgn src N/A RWS IPA 4000 List 3 PIN V-F-S-B
multiply by +1, or if the signal is 1, multiply by 1. The multiplier allows to invert Analog Input 1X signal.
Analog inputs / Exp analog inps / Analog input 1X / An inp 1X cfg

5060 An inp 1X type N/A RWS 0 0 2 DP V-F-S-B
0 -10V ... +10V
1 0..20mA,0..10V
3 4..20mA
For An inp 1X type description refer to An inp 1 type description above

5062 An inp 1X thr [cnt] RWS 3277 -16384 16383 PP V-F-S-B
Analog Input 1X threshold value in count
5063 An inp 1X scale N/A RWS 1 -16 16 PP V-F-S-B
Analog Input 1X scale factor
5065 An inp 1X lo lim [cnt] RWS -16384 -32768 32767 PP V-F-S-B
Lower limit of the Analog Input 1X block output in count (see figure of Analog Input 1 above)
5066 An inp 1X hi lim [cnt] RWS 16383 -32768 32767 PP V-F-S-B
Upper limit of the Analog Input 1X block output in count (see figure of Analog Input 1 above)
AI 1X offs tune
AI 1X gain tune
Refer to AI 1 offs gain description above
Analog inputs / Exp analog inps / Analog input 1X / An inp 1X mon

5067 An inp 1X output [cnt] R 0.00 -32768 32767 PV V-F-S-B
Analog Input 1X output count displaying
5068 An inp 1X < thr N/A R 0 0 1 DV V-F-S-B
Display of threshold compensator state of Analog Input 1X (1 = the condition is true)
5061 An inp 1X offset [cnt] RWS 0 -16384 16383 PP V-F-S-B
Analog Input 1X offset count value displaying
5064 An inp 1X gain [cnt] RWS 0 -16384 16383 PP V-F-S-B
Analog Input 1X gain count value displaying
Analog inputs / Exp analog inps / Analog input 2X / An inp 2X src

5089 AI 2X sgn src N/A RWS IPA 4000 List 3 PIN V-F-S-B
multiply by +1, or if the signal is 1, multiply by 1. The multiplier allows to invert Analog Input 2X signal.
Analog inputs / Exp analog inps / Analog input 2X / An inp 2X cfg

5080 An inp 2X type N/A RWS 0 0 2 DP V-F-S-B
0 -10V ... +10V
1 0..20mA,0..10V
2 4..20mA
For An inp 2X type description refer to An inp 1 type description above
5082 An inp 2X thr [cnt] RWS 3277 -16384 16383 PP V-F-S-B
Analog Input 2X threshold value in count
5083 An inp 2X scale N/A RWS 1 -16 16 PP V-F-S-B
Analog Input 2X scale factor
5085 An inp 2X lo lim [cnt] RWS -16384 -32768 32767 PP V-F-S-B
Lower limit of the Analog Input 2X block output in count (see figure of Analog Input 1 above)
5086 An inp 2X hi lim [cnt] RWS 16383 -32768 32767 PP V-F-S-B
Upper limit of the Analog Input 2X block output in count (see figure of Analog Input 1 above)
AI 2X offs tune
AI 2X gain tune
Refer to AI 1 offs gain description above

Analog inputs / Exp analog inps / Analog input 2X / An inp 2X mon

5087 An inp 2X output [cnt] R 0.00 -32768 32767 PV V-F-S-B
Analog Input 2X output count displaying
5088 An inp 2X < thr N/A R 0.00 0.00 0.00 DV V-F-S-B
Display of threshold compensator state of Analog Input 2X (1 = the condition is true)
5081 An inp 2X offset [cnt] RWS 0 -16384 16383 PP V-F-S-B
Analog Input 2X offset count value displaying
5084 An inp 2X gain [cnt] RWS 0 -16384 16383 PP V-F-S-B
Analog Input 2X gain count value displaying
Analog inputs / Exp analog inps / Exp ana inp en

3900 Exp ana inp en N/A RWS 0 0 1 DV V-F-S-B
0 Disabled
2 Enabled
It enables Expanded Analog Inputs
Analog inputs / Destinations

This read-only menu allows the user to see where the Analog inputs are connected. If more then one source
is connected to an Analog Input, only one is shown. If no sources are connected the message Not used is displayed.
4500 An inp 1 dst
It displays the Analog Input 1 destination
4501 An inp 2 dst
4502 An inp 3 dst
4503 An inp 1X dst
It displays the Analog Input 1X destination
4504 An inp 2X dst
It displays the Analog Input 2X destination
I/O CONFIG / Analog outputs

CALIBRATION TO +/-10 V OUTPUT
An out 1 mon (in counts) * An out 1 scale = An out 1 hi lim (in counts) = 10 V
An out 1 mon (in counts) * An out 1 scale = An out 1 lo lim (in counts) = -10 V
Software version 3.200
An out 1 hi lim
16383 cnt
An out 1 mon
An out 1 lo lim
-16384 cnt
An out 1 src Analog Output 1

NULL
An out 1 scale
1

Software version 3.300
An out 1 mon
1
NULL
An out 1 src
ONE
-1
An out 1 sgn src

NULL
Drive has 2 standard (voltage outputs) and 4 expanded analog outputs (1x and 2x = volatge outputs, 3x and
4x=current outputs). Each Analog output block has the following structure.
Analog outputs / Std analog outs / Analog output 1 / An out 1 src

3570 An out 1 src N/A RWS IPA 4000 List 2 V-F-S-B
It allows to connect the selected signal to the Analog output 1(refer to signals List 2 of Pick List manual)
3575 An out 1 sgn src N/A RWS IPA 4000 List 2 V-F-S-B
It allows to select the sign of the signal connected on analog output. (from software rel. 3.300)
Analog outputs / Std analog outs / Analog output 1 / An out 1 cfg

6012 An out 1 scale N/A RWS 1 -10 10 PP V-F-S-B
Scale or multiplicative factor of Analog output 1
6010 An out 1 hi lim [cnt] RWS 16383 0 32767 PP V-F-S-B
Analog output 1 count value aimed at obtaining +10V. Value must be higher than zero
6011 An out 1 lo lim [cnt] RWS -16384 -32768 0 PP V-F-S-B
Analog output 1 count value aimed at obtaining -10V. Value must be higher than zero
Analog outputs / Std analog outs / Analog output 1 / An out 1 mon

6013 An out 1 mon [cnt] R 0 -32768 32767 PP V-F-S-B
Analog output 1 count value displaying
Analog outputs / Std analog outs / Analog output 2 / An out 2 src

3580 An out 2 src N/A RWS IPA 4000 List 2 V-F-S-B
It allows to connect the selected signal to the Analog output 2
3576 An out 2 sgn src N/A RWS IPA 4000 List 2 V-F-S-B
It allows to select the sign of the signal connected on analog output. (from software rel. 3.300)
Analog outputs / Std analog outs / Analog output 2 / An out 2 cfg

6017 An out 2 scale N/A RWS 1 -10 10 PP V-F-S-B
Scale or multiplicative factor of Analog output 2
6015 An out 2 hi lim [cnt] RWS 16383 0 32767 PP V-F-S-B
Analog output 2 count value aimed at obtaining +10V. Value must be higher than zero
6016 An out 2 lo lim [cnt] RWS -16384 -32768 0 PP V-F-S-B
Analog output 2 count value aimed at obtaining -10V. Value must be higher than zero

Analog outputs / Std analog outs / Analog output 2 / An out 2 mon
6018 An out 2 mon [cnt] R 0.00 -32768 32676 PP V-F-S-B
Analog output 2 count value displaying
Analog outputs / Exp analog outs / Analog output 1X / An out 1X src

4090 An out 1X src N/A RWS IPA 4000 List 2 V-F-S-B
It allows to connect the selected signal to the Analog output 1X
Analog outputs / Exp analog outs / Analog output 1X / An out 1X cfg

6022 An out 1X scale N/A RWS 1 -10 10 PP V-F-S-B
Scale or multiplicative factor of Analog output 1X
6020 An out 1X hi lim [cnt] RWS 16383 0 32767 PP V-F-S-B
Analog output 1X count value aimed at obtaining +10V. Value must be higher than zero
6021 An out 1X lo lim [cnt] RWS -16384 -32768 0 PP V-F-S-B
Analog output 1X count value aimed at obtaining -10V. Value must be higher than zero
Analog outputs / Exp analog outs / Analog output 1X / An out 1X mon

6023 An out 1X mon [cnt] R 0.00 -32768 32676 PP V-F-S-B
Analog output 1X count value displaying





6034 An out 3X type N/A RWS 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
0 0..20 mA
1 4..20 mA
It allows to select the Analog output 3X type (EXP-D20A6 optional card is required)




6039 An out 4x type N/A RWS 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
0 0..20 mA
1 4..20 mA
It allows to select the Analog output 4X type (EXP-D20A6 optional card is required)

Analog outputs / Exp analog outs / Exp ana out en

3901 Exp ana out en N/A RWS 0 0 1 DV V-F-S-B
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
It enables the expanded analog outputs

I/O CONFIG / Digital inputs
Digital Input Block function allows to invert the signal on the terminal strip.
For example, if the potential available on the terminal strip is +24V, and the inversion is disabled (not inverted) the
input state is 1 (ONE), standard configuration; if the inversion is enabled (inversion) the input state is 0 (NULL). The
Drive ENABLE is set on the Digital input 0; such condition can not be changed as it is performed via the hardware.
Its function, anyway, can be combined with a command signal in the sources of the other Blocks. DI 0 Enable
mon signal (Digital input 0 signal) is available in the List 3.
En/ DI 0
DI 0 Enable mon
Hw Drive Enable
DI 1 inversion
Di 1
DI 1 monitor
F
DI 2 inversion DI 2 monitor
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
DI 7 inversion
DI 7 monitor
Not inverted
I/O CONFIG / Digital inputs / Std digital inps / Std dig inp cfg
4011 DI 1 inversion N/A RWS 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted

0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
I/O CONFIG / Digital inputs / Std digital inps / Std dig inp mon
4020 DI 0 Enable mon N/A R 0 0 1 DV V-F-S-B
Enable terminal displaying
4021 DI 1 monitor N/A R 0 0 1 DV V-F-S-B
Digital Input 1 terminal displaying

4028 DI 7654321E N/A R 0 0 - DP V-F-S-B
Standard digital inputs displaying. Under each number the logical state of each single input is displayed.
I/O CONFIG / Digital inputs / Exp digital inps / Exp dig inp cfg
4030 DI 0X inversion N/A RWS 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted

0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
I/O CONFIG / Digital inputs / Exp digital inps / Exp dig inp mon
4045 DI 0X monitor N/A R 0 0 1 DV V-F-S-B
Digital Input 0X terminal displaying
4057 DIX BA9876543210 N/A R 0 0 - DV V-F-S-B
Expanded digital inputs displaying. Under each number the logical state of each single input is
displayed.

I/O CONFIG / Digital inputs / Exp dig inp en
3902 Exp dig inp en N/A RWS 0 0 1 DV V-F-S-B
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
It enables the expanded digital inputs
I/O CONFIG / Digital inputs / Destinations

This read-only menu allows the user to see where the Digital inputs are connected. If more then one source is connected to
the Digital Input, only first one is shown. If no sources are connected the message Not used is displayed.
4505 DI 0 Enable dst
It displays the Digital Input 0 (Enable) destination
4506 DI 1 dst
It displays the Digital Input 1 destination
4507 DI 2 dst
4508 DI 3 dst
4509 DI 4 dst
4510 DI 5 dst
4511 DI 6 dst
4512 DI 7 dst
4513 DI 0X dst
It displays the Digital Input 0X destination
4514 DI 1X dst
4515 DI 2X dst
4516 DI 3X dst
4517 DI 4X dst
4518 DI 5X dst
4519 DI 6X dst
4520 DI 7X dst
4521 DI 8X dst
4522 DI 9X dst
4523 DI 10X dst
4524 DI 11X dst

I/O CONFIG / Digital outputs
The blocks of the digital outputs allow to turn an internal signal into a signal available on the terminal strip.
DO 0 src Exp dig out en

Drive OK Disabled
.
DO 0 inversion DO 0
.
. F
DO 1 src DO 1 inversion
Spd is zero dly Not inverted
NULL Not inverted
NULL Not inverted
DO 0X src DO 0X inversion
NULL Not inverted
NULL Not inverted
NULL Not inverted
NULL Not inverted
NULL Not inverted
NULL Not inverted
NULL Not inverted
NULL Not inverted
I/O CONFIG / Digital outputs / Std digital outs / Std dig out src
4065 DO 0 src N/A RWS IPA 9097List 1 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 9097 Drive OK = Default
It allows to connect the selected signal to the Digital output 0 and it can also defines the conditions
that the relay contacts will close. For example:
Drive OK The contact closes when the drive is powered up with no failure alarms.
Drive Ready The contact closes when the following conditions are fulfilled:
- The drive is powered up
- There are no failure alarms present
- The drive is enabled. The enable operation is defined by parameters
[En/disable mode] & [Commands sel]
- The magnetizing procedure has been completed (Drive is ready to deliver torque)
NOTE! The contact opens immediately on a drive failure, or when the drive is disabled.

4066 DO 1 src N/A RWS IPA 7123 List 1 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 7123 BRAKE cont mon = Default
It allows to connect the selected signal to the Digital output 2
IPA 161 Drive ready = Default
IPA 3728 Speed is zero = Default
I/O CONFIG / Digital outputs / Std digital outs / Std dig out cfg
4060 DO 0 inversion N/A RWS 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
I/O CONFIG / Digital outputs / Std digital outs / Std dig out mon
4064 DO 3210 N/A RWS 0 0 - DP V-F-S-B
The digital output logical state is displayed under each number
I/O CONFIG / Digital outputs / Exp digital outs / Exp dig out src
4080 DO 0X src N/A RWS IPA 7122 List 1 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 7122 RUN cont mon = Default
It allows to connect the selected signal to the Digital output 0X
IPA 7120 UP cont mon = Default
IPA 7121 DOWN cont mon = Default
IPA 7139 Door open mon = Default

I/O CONFIG / Digital outputs / Exp digital outs / Exp dig out cfg
4070 DO 0X inversion N/A RWS 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
I/O CONFIG / Digital outputs / Exp digital outs / Exp dig out mon
4078 DOX 76543210 N/A R 0 0 - DP V-F-S-B
The digital output logical state (of expansion board) is displayed under each number.

I/O CONFIG / Digital outputs / Exp dig out en

3903 Exp dig out en N/A RWS 0 0 1 DV V-F-S-B
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
It enables the expanded digital outputs
I/O CONFIG / Bits->Word

The Word Composing Block, Bits->Word, is useful to communicate, for example, between Drive and
APC card: it is possible to compose a word made of Drive ready, Drive ok, Ref is zero, Speed is zero, by
communicating on a single word.
The Bits->Wordn Block has 16 inputs, where each of them can be connected to a signal; the output of the
Word compn Block contains the packed input bits.
Two Bits->Word blocks are available.
Word0 B0 src BIT_0 WORD_0 W0 comp out

WORD_1 W1 comp out
Word0 B1 src BIT_1
............... .......
Word0 B14 src BIT_14

Word0 B15 src BIT_15
I/O CONFIG / Bits->Word / Bits->Word0 src

2100 Word0 B0 src N/A RWS IPA 4000 List 1 PIN V-F-S-B
It allows to connect the Bit 0 signal selected to the Word 0

I/O CONFIG / Bits->Word / Bits->Word0 mon

2116 W0 comp out N/A R 0 0 - DV V-F-S-B
Monitor for the hexadecimal output value of Word 0
I/O CONFIG / Bits->Word / Bits->Word1 src



I/O CONFIG / Bits->Word / Bits->Word1 mon

9356 W1 comp out N/A R 0 0 - DV V-F-S-B
Monitor for the hexadecimal output value of Word 1
I/O CONFIG / Word->Bits

The Word Decomposing Block, Word->Bits, allows to set some signals on a digital word; each signal
composing the word, on the Block input, can be combined with an output channel.
It is useful to communicate, for example, between APC card and Drive.
The Wordn->Bits block has an input word and 16 Bx Wn decomp output bits.
Two Word->Bits blocks are available.
W0 decomp src WORD_0 BIT_0 B0 W0 decomp -> Bits

W1 decomp src WORD_1 BIT_1 B1 W0 decomp -> Bits
...... ................
BIT_14 B14 W0 decomp -> Bits

BIT_15 B15 W0 decomp -> Bits
I/O CONFIG / Word->Bits / Word0->Bits src

2120 W0 decomp src N/A RWS IPA 2121 List 26 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 2121 W0 decomp inp = Default
It allows to connect the word that will be input to decomposing block
I/O CONFIG / Word->Bits / Word0->Bits cfg

2121 W0 decomp inp N/A RWS 0X0000 - - DV V-F-S-B
It allows to set the W0 decomp inp value
I/O CONFIG / Word->Bits / Word0->Bits mon

2122 W0 decomp mon N/A R 0 0 - DP V-F-S-B
Monitor of the hexadecimal input value of the Word 0 decomposed
2123 B0 W0 decomp N/A R 0 0 1 DV V-F-S-B
Bit 0 of Word 0 decomposed displaying

I/O CONFIG / Word->Bits / Word1->Bits src

9361 W1 decomp src N/A RWS IPA 9360 List 27 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 9360 W1 decomp inp = Default
It allows to connect the word that will be input to decomposing block
I/O CONFIG / Word->Bits / Word1->Bits cfg

9360 W1 decomp inp N/A RWS 0X0000 - - DV V-F-S-B
It allows to set the W1 decomp inp value
I/O CONFIG / Word->Bits / Word1->Bits mon

9362 W1 decomp mon N/A R 0 0 - DP V-F-S-B
Monitor of the hexadecimal input value of the Word 1 decomposed

SAVE PARAMETERS

ALARM CONFIG
The access to ALARM CONFIG menu is allowed by Level 1 password: 12345. It must to be set in the SERVICE menu.
In the ALARM CONFIG menu it is possible to configure Drive alarms behavior through the following functions:
- Activity It allows to set the action to be performed after the alarm intervention as:
0 Only msg alarmq Actions: Message
1 Ignore Actions: none
2 Warning Actions: Message Status
3 Disable drive Actions: Message Commands for SM Status
4 Stop Actions: Message Commands for SM Status
5 Fast stop Actions: Message Commands for SM Status
6 Curr limstop Actions: Message Commands for SM Status
Actions meaning:
Message It means that the message has been sent to the Alarm
Listand to the Alarm log list.
Commands for SM State Machine commands : A change in the drive state
has been forced (alarm intervention).
Status The active alarm signal is immediately set; it is reset
when the alarm is not more present and the state
machine is not in an alarm condition.
- Restart It allows to enable the automatic start after the alarm cause has been removed.
0 Off
1 On
- Restart Time It allows to set a period of time, within which the alarm state has to be removed, in order to
perform an automatic start.
- Hold Off Time It allows to set a period of time, in which a specific alarm condition has to remain
active (it has to persist) in order to be considered an alarm situation.
It is possible to set a millisecond period of time, in which the Drive does not recognize
the alarm state. Therefore, the alarm is recognized only if it persists for a period longer
than the set Hold off time
ALARM CONFIG / Fault reset

9076 Fault reset src N/A RWS IPA 4027 List 3 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 4027 DI 7 monitor = Default
By using the Fault reset src source, it is possible to select the origin of the reset command signal, for
example a command via the terminal strip through a digital Input
ALARM CONFIG / Undervoltage

It trips when the voltage on the drive DC link is lower than the minimum threshold according to the
Mains voltage setting
9050 UV restart N/A RWS 1 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
0 off
1 on
Undervoltage restart
9051 UV restart time [ms] RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V-F-S-B
Undervoltage restart time
396 UV select src N/A RWSZ IPA 4001 List 3 PIN V-F-S-B
Source to disable Undervoltage alarm through digital input.
To be used exclusivelly with Emergency Module Supply. Main power supply must be off !

ALARM CONFIG / Overvoltage

It trips when the voltage on the drive DC link is higher than the maximum threshold according to the
Mains voltage setting
9052 OV restart N/A RWS 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
0 off
1 on
Overvoltage restart
9053 OV restart time [ms] RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V-F-S-B
Overvoltage restart time
ALARM CONFIG / IGBT desaturat

It trips when the IGBT instantaneous overcurrent is detected by gate desaturation sensing circuit
9046 DS restart N/A RWS 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
0 off
1 on
IGBT desaturation restart
9047 DS restart time [ms] RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V-F-S-B
IGBT desaturation restart time
ALARM CONFIG / Inst overcurrent

It trips when the IGBT instantaneous overcurrent is detected by output current sensor
9063 IOC restart N/A RWS 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
0 off
1 on
Instantaneous overcurrent restart
9064 IOC restart time [ms] RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V-F-S-B
Instantaneous overcurrent restart time
ALARM CONFIG / Ground fault

It trips when the output phase discharge to ground
9640 GF activity N/A RWS 2 1 6 DP V-F-S-B
1 Ignore
2 Warning
3 Disable drive
4 Stop
5 Fast stop
6 Curr limstp
Ground fault activity
9641 GF threshold [A] RWS D.Size Calc D.Size PP V-F-S-B
Ground fault threshold
ALARM CONFIG / External fault

It trips when the External fault input is active
9075 EF src N/A RWS IPA 4023 List 3 PIN V-F-S-B
It allows to connect the External fault input terminal strip
9060 EF activity N/A RWS 3 2 6 DP V-F-S-B
1 Ignore
2 Warning

3 Disable drive
4 Stop
5 Fast stop
6 Curr limstp
External fault activity
9061 EF restart N/A RWS 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
0 off
1 on
External fault restart
9062 EF restart time [ms] RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V-F-S-B
External fault restart time
9600 EF hold off [ms] RWS 0 0 30000 PP V-F-S-B
External fault hold off
ALARM CONFIG / Motor OT

Motor Over-Temperature indicated via thermal contact or PTC thermistor on
78-79 drive regulation board terminals
9065 MOT activity N/A RWS 2 2 6 DP V-F-S-B
2 Warning
3 Disable drive
4 Stop
5 Fast stop
6 Curr limstp
Motor Over-Temperature activity
9066 MOT restart N/A RWS 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
0 off
1 on
Motor Over-Temperature restart
9067 MOT restart time [ms] RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V-F-S-B
Motor Over-Temperature restart time
9603 MOT hold off [ms] RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V-F-S-B
Motor Over-Temperature hold off
ALARM CONFIG / Heatsink S OT

Heatsink Sensor Over-Temperature (detected by a sensor)
9054 HTS activity N/A RWS 3 2 6 DP V-F-S-B
2 Warning
3 Disable drive
4 Stop
5 Fast stop
6 Curr limstp
Heatsink Sensor Over-Temperature activity
9055 HTS restart N/A RWS 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
0 off
1 on
Heatsink Sensor Over-Temperature restart
9056 HTS restart time [ms] RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V-F-S-B
Heatsink Sensor Over-Temperature restart time
9604 HTS hold off [ms] RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V-F-S-B
Heatsink Sensor Over-Temperature hold off

ALARM CONFIG / Regulation S OT
Regulation card Sensor Over-Temperature
9057 RGS activity N/A RWS 3 2 6 DP V-F-S-B
2 Warning
3 Disable drive
4 Stop
5 Fast stop
6 Curr limstp
Regulation card Sensor Over-Temperature activity
9058 RGS restart N/A RWS 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
0 off
1 on
Regulation card Sensor Over-Temperature restart
9059 RGS restart time [ms] RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V-F-S-B
Regulation card Sensor Over-Temperature restart time
9605 RGS hold off [ms] RWS 10000 0 30000 PP V-F-S-B
Regulation card Sensor Over-Temperature hold off
ALARM CONFIG / Intake air S OT

Intake air Sensor Over-Temperature (only for model AVyL 4185 and over)
9087 IAS activity N/A RWS 3 2 6 DP V-F-S-B
2 Warning
3 Disable drive
4 Stop
5 Fast stop
6 Curr limstp
Intake air Sensor Over-Temperature activity
9088 IAS restart N/A RWS 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
0 off
1 on
Intake air Sensor Over-Temperature restart
9089 IAS restart time [ms] RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V-F-S-B
Intake air Sensor Over-Temperature restart time
9606 IAS hold off [ms] RWS 10000 0 30000 PP V-F-S-B
Intake air Sensor Over-Temperature hold off
ALARM CONFIG / Contact feedback

It trips when the contact feedback signal is not detected .
Can be used to monitor the status of output contactor and give alarm if command and feedback dont match.
OUTPUT CONTACTOR
Digital output Digital input
set as RUN cont mon CNT feedback src set as Digital input X
AUX
CONTACTS
K1M
K2M MAIN CONTACTS
7141 CNT feedback src N/A RWS IPA 7122 List 3 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 7122 RUN cont mon = Default
It allows to select the origin of Contact feedback signal

9068 CNT activity N/A RWS 3 1 6 DP V-F-S-B
1 Ignore
2 Warning
3 Disable drive
4 Stop
5 Fast stop
6 Curr limstp
Contact feedback alarm activity
7135 CNT hold off [ms] RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V-F-S-B
Contact feedback hold off
RUN cont mon
No Alarm No Alarm
Alarm Alarm Cont fbk fail Alarm
CNT feedback src Alarm
CNT Alarm CNT

Hold No Alarm Hold
off off
ALARM CONFIG / Brake feedback

It trips when the brake feedback signal is not detected
7142 BRK feedback src N/A RWS IPA 7123 List 3 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 7123 BRAKE cont mon = Default
It allows to select the origin of Brake feedback signal (refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual)
9086 BRK activity N/A RWS 3 1 6 DP V-F-S-B
1 Ignore
2 Warning
3 Disable drive
4 Stop
5 Fast stop
6 Curr limstp
Brake feedback alarm activity
7136 BRK hold off [ms] RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V-F-S-B
Brake feedback hold off
BRAKE cont mon
No Alarm No Alarm
Alarm Alarm Brake fbk fail Alarm
BRK feedback src Alarm
BRK BRK
Hold No Alarm Hold

off off
NOTE! During brake active state eventual alarms are latched and are reported only in brake idle
state, see IPA 7145.
7145 BRK RUN hold off N/A RNS 1 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
Brake feedback holdoff configuration.
0 Off brake feedback trip is reported immediately
1 On eventual brake feedback trip is reported at the end of run. This allows the car to
arrive at floor in case of faulty brake status switch.

ALARM CONFIG / Brake feedback / Door feedback

7144 Door fbk src N/A RWS IPA 7139 List 3 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 7139 Door open mon = Default. (Refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual)
Source to provide Feedback to check status of the command provided through the input.
9099 Door activity N/A RWS 3 1 6 DP V-F-S-B
1 Ignore
2 Warning
3 Disable drive
4 Stop
5 Fast stop
6 Curr limstp
Door feedback alarm activity. (from software rel. 3.300)
7137 Door hold off [ms] RWS 200 0.00 65535 PP V-F-S-B
Alarm hold off time: during this time mismatch in command and feedback is ignored.
Door open mon

Command to open the door
No Alarm
Alarm Door fbk fail
Door fbk src
Door
Hold
off
ALARM CONFIG / Comm card fault

It trips when LAN communication is interrupted (LAN communication between drive and Field Bus optional card)
9074 CCF activity N/A RWS 3 2 6 DP V-F-S-B
2 Warning
3 Disable drive
4 Stop
5 Fast stop
6 Curr limstp
Comm card fault activity
4200 CCF restart N/A RWS 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
0 off
1 on
Comm card fault restart
4201 CCF restart time [ms] RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V-F-S-B
Comm card fault restart time
ALARM CONFIG / Appl card fault

It trips when optional coprocessor communication is interrupted
(coprocessor communication between drive and APC 100 optional card)
9049 ACF activity N/A RWS 3 2 6 DP V-F-S-B
2 Warning
3 Disable drive
4 Stop
5 Fast stop
6 Curr limstp
Appl card fault activity

ALARM CONFIG / Drive overload

It trips when Drive overload accumulator exceeded trip threshold
9040 DOL activity N/A RWS 1 1 6 DP V-F-S-B
1 Ignore
2 Warning
3 Disable drive
4 Stop
5 Fast stop
6 Curr limstp
Drive overload activity
ALARM CONFIG / Motor overload

It trips when Motor overload accumulator exceeded trip threshold
9041 MOL activity N/A RWS 2 1 6 DP V-F-S-B
1 Ignore
2 Warning
3 Disable drive
4 Stop
5 Fast stop
6 Curr limstp
ALARM CONFIG / BU overload

It trips when Brake resistor overload accumulator exceeded trip threshold
9071 BUOL activity N/A RWS 3 1 6 DP V-F-S-B
2 Warning
3 Disable drive
4 Stop
5 Fast stop
6 Curr limstp
Braking Unit overload activity
ALARM CONFIG / Overspeed

It trips when the speed of the motor exceeded speed limit threshold
9220 OS activity N/A RWS 3 1 6 DP V-F-S-B
2 Warning
3 Disable drive
4 Stop
5 Fast stop
6 Curr limstp
Overspeed activity
9221 OS threshold [rmp] RWS Calc 0.00 8192 PP V-F-S-B
Overspeed threshold
9608 OS hold off [ms] RWS 0 0 30000 PP V-F-S-B
Overspeed hold off
ALARM CONFIG / Spd fbk loss

It trips when the speed feedback is not detected or encoder supply failed
9042 SFL activity N/A RWS 3 1 6 DP V-F-S-B
1 Ignore
2 Warning
3 Disable drive
4 Stop
5 Fast stop
6 Curr limstp
Spd fbk loss activity

ALARM CONFIG / UV repetitive

It trips when more than a programmable number, with UVR attempts parameter,
of Undervoltage faults are detected in 4 minutes (time programmable with UVR delay parameter)
9043 UVR attempts N/A RWS 5 1 1000 PP V-F-S-B
It determines the number of Undervoltage faults accepted
9044 UVR delay [sec] RWS 240 1 262.14 PP V-F-S-B
It determines the time window of UVR attempts parameter
ALARM CONFIG / Hw fault

It trips when the communication between drive regulation card and one of its option cards in not detected
4202 Hw fault mon N/A R 0 0 0 DP V-F-S-B
0 communication OK
1 communication failed
ALARM CONFIG / Alarm status

The alarm state can be reported via three Words. Each bit determines an alarm state. It is therefore possible to
determine the state of 48 alarms. Each single bit can be controlled if the corresponding bit of a specific mask is set
with 1, otherwise their setting is always 0.
When an alarm becomes active, the word corresponding bit is set with 1. Its setting remains equal to 1 till the alarm
becomes inactive and the State Machine or Sequencer is not in an alarm condition (see the previous paragraphs).
If the state of a single alarm has to be controlled via an output, then only the mask needed bit has to be set with 1.
If the state of several alarms has to be controlled via an output, then the mask corresponding bits have to be set with 1.
The alarms have to be controlled by the Word itself.
Ex: the state of the External fault alarm has to be read.
Mask W1 S1 = 0x0100 => 0000 0001 0000 0000
Mask W2 S1 = 0x0000 => 0000 0000 0000 0000
Mask W3 S1 = 0x0000 => 0000 0000 0000 0000
DO 0 src = Select ipa Alm W1 S1.
The state of the Undervoltage and Overvoltage alarm has to be read.
Mask W1 S1 = 0x0100 => 0000 0000 0000 0110
Mask W2 S1 = 0x0000 => 0000 0000 0000 0000
Mask W3 S1 = 0x0000 => 0000 0000 0000 0000
DO 0 src = Select ipa Alm W1 S1.
The state of the External fault and F_R_C alarm has to be read.
Mask W1 S1 = 0x0100 => 0000 0001 0000 0000
Mask W2 S1 = 0x0000 => 0000 0000 1000 0000
DO 0 src = Select ipa Alm W1 S1
DO 1 src = Select ipa Alm W2 S1
Alarm status / Alm status cfg

9610 Mask W1 S1 N/A RWS 0XFFF 0 -1 DP V-F-S-B
Alarm status / Alm status mon
9630 Alm W1 S1 N/A R 0 0 Calc DP V-F-S-B

activity after
Restart time
in the alarm
Acknowledg
BIT position
Code in the
alarm LIST
HOLD OFF
request
Restart
Msg ad
DigOut
Alarm
alarm
Drive
Word
ment
ALARM NAME
Failure supply 1 21 Dis. drive No No No Yes Yes Yes

Undervoltage 2 22 Dis. drive No Yes. logic on n times Yes Yes Yes Yes
Overvoltage 3 23 Dis. drive No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
IGBT desaturat 4 24 Dis. drive No Yes. logic on 2 alarms in 30 second Yes Yes Yes Yes
Inst overcurrent 5 25 Dis. drive No Yes. logic on 2 alarms in 30 second Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ground fault 6 26 Prog. No No No Yes Yes Yes
Curr fbk loss 7 27 Dis. drive No No No Yes Yes Yes
External fault 8 28 Prog. Yes. Prog. Yes Yes. Prog. Yes Yes Yes
Spd fbk loss 9 29 Prog. No No No Yes Yes Yes
Yes Fixed 10
Module OT 10 30 Dis. drive No No Yes Yes Yes
msec
Yes Fixed
Heatsink OT 11 31 Dis. drive Yes Yes Yes
1000 msec
Motor OT 12 32 Prog. Yes. Prog. Yes Yes. Prog. Yes Yes Yes
Heatsink S OT 13 33 Prog. Yes. Prog. Yes Yes. Prog. Yes Yes Yes
Regulation S OT 14 34 Prog. Yes. Prog. Yes Yes. Prog. Yes Yes Yes
Intake air S OT 15 35 Prog. Yes. Prog. Yes Yes. Prog. Yes Yes Yes
Cont fbk fail 16 36 Prog. No Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Comm card fault 17 37 Prog. No Yes Yes. Prog. Yes Yes Yes
Appl card fault 18 38 Dis. drive No No No Yes Yes Yes
Drive overload 19 39 Prog. No No No Yes Yes Yes
Motor overload 20 40 Prog. No No No Yes Yes Yes
BU overload 21 41 Prog. No No No Yes Yes Yes
Data lost 22 42 Dis. drive No No No Yes Yes Yes
Brake fbk fail 23 43 Prog. No No No Yes Yes Yes
Max time 24 44 Dis. drive No No No Yes Yes Yes
Sequencer 25 45 Dis. drive No No No Yes Yes No
Door fbk fail 26 46 Prog. Yes No No Yes Yes Yes
Overspeed 27 47 Prog. Yes. Prog. No No Yes Yes Yes
UV repetitive 28 48 Dis. drive No No No Yes Yes Yes
IOC repetitive 29 49 Dis. drive No No No Yes Yes Yes
IGBTdesat repet 30 50 Dis. drive No No No Yes Yes Yes
WatchDog user 31 51 Dis. drive No No No Yes Yes Yes
Hw fail 32 52 Dis. drive No No No Yes Yes Yes
Alarms status

COMMUNICATION
COMMUNICATION
The access to COMMUNICATION menu is allowed by Level 1 password: 12345. It must be set in the SERVICE menu.
RS485: The communication protocol can be chosen between Slink4, Modbus, Jbus or ISO 1745 through the
Protocol type parameter. Each of these protocols allow a multipoint network. See the specific protocol manual for
further details.
The Drive address can be defined via the Slave address parameter. Editing parameter 105, Slave address, and saving the
new value perform the address change. The new address becomes active after the Drive has been switched off and then back
on. A temporary address change is also possible when using the Slink4 protocol with an Slink4 command.
When using the Slink4 protocol, the RS485 serial line operates in half-duplex, where the data cannot be transmitted
and received simultaneously. It is sometimes possible during the transition from transmission to reception modes,
the Master (PC or PLC) reaches the reception condition after the Drive has already started to send its data
package. As a consequence, the package received by the master is not correct. In order to avoid such
occurrences, the Slave res time parameter can be adjusted to delay the drive response so the Master has
sample mode switching time. This situation does not occur with the Modbus and Jbus protocols as the
synchronization pause between messages is specified by the protocol and is guaranteed.
SBI: The communication with the SBI Field Bus option cards (Serial Bus Interface) is performed via two channels:
Synchronous or Process channel (PDC Process Data Channel) for a cyclical value interchange.
Asynchronous or Configuration channel for a low priority access to all the Drive parameters.
As for the data exchange modes between the SBI card and the Network see the SBI card documentation.
The process data exchange between the Drive and the SBI has the following structure:
- the interface is made of six writing Words and six reading Words.
- the source Drive parameter has to be defined for the six Words: Drv -> SBI word transmitting the
data from the Drive to the SBI.
- Six Words move the data from the SBI to the Drive: SBI -> Drv word
For more information to see the following documents for related information on SBI:
SBI-PDP 33 Interface card Profibus- DP instruction manual
SBI-DN 33 DeviceNet card instruction manual
SBI-COP CANopen card instruction manual
COMMUNICATION / RS485
105 Slave address N/A RWS 1 0 255 DK V-F-S-B
It define the drive slave address
106 Slave res time N/A RWS 1 0 255 DK V-F-S-B
It define the drive slave address time
104 Protocol type N/A RWS 0 0 2 DK V-F-S-B
0 Slink 4
1 Modbus
2 Jbus
3 ISO 1745
4 Hiperface protocol(Used to communicate with Stegmann absolute encoders)
It defines the drive communication protocol type
103 Modbus regs mode N/A RWS 0 0 3 DK V-F-S-B
Mapping of modbus register to parameter index.
0 MSW : LSW reg=IPA
1 LSW : MSW reg=IPA
2 MSW : LSW reg=2*IPA
3 LSW : MSW reg=2*IPA

MSW = most significant word
LSW = least significant word
COMMUNICATION / SBI config

8999 SBI enable N/A RWS 0 0 1 DK V-F-S-B
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
It allows to enable SBI Field Bus option cards
(SAVE PARAMETERS command and drive recycle power are required)
COMMUNICATION / SBI monitor

8998 Last SBI error N/A R 0 0 2 DP V-F-S-B
It defines the last found error:
0 = OK (no error)
1 = Hardware fault
2 = Bus Loss
COMMUNICATION / Drv->SBI word
COMMUNICATION / Drv->SBI word / Drv->SBI W src

9010 Drv SBI W0 src N/A RWS IPA 9020 List 40 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 9020 Int Drv SBI W0 = Default
It allows to select the origin of Word 0 to be transmitted from Drive to SBI card
COMMUNICATION / Drv->SBI word / Drv->SBI W cfg

9020 Int Drv SBI W0 N/A RWS 0.00 - - PV V-F-S-B
Internal Word 0 value configuration (default connected to Drv SBI W0 src)

COMMUNICATION / Drv->SBI word / Drv->SBI W mon

9030 Drv SBI W0 mon N/A R 0.00 - - PP V-F-S-B
Word 0 monitor of the PDC channel on the Drive output
COMMUNICATION / SBI->Drv word
COMMUNICATION / SBI->Drv word / SBI->Drv W mon

9000 SBI Drv W0 mon N/A R 0.00 - - PP V-F-S-B
Word 0 monitor of the PDC channel on the Drive input
SAVE PARAMETERS

APPL CARD CONFIG

The access to APPL CARD CONFIG menu is allowed by Level 1 password: 12345. It must to be set in the
SERVICE menu.
APC option card is used for advanced lift applications.
The communication between the Drive and the APC is performed via two channels for each direction.
from drive to APC: Drv->DGFCS writing to drive 5 Synchronous words
Drv->DGFCA writing to drive 10 Asynchronous words
from APC to drive: DGFCS->Drv reading from APC 5 Synchronous words
DGFCA->Drv reading from APC 10 Asynchronous words
The Words move the data from the APC to the Drive can be found in the source selecting lists.
For more information following the instructions on DGFC-386y-1 card (APC100 card) manual
APPL CARD CONFIG / DGFC / DGFC config

4129 DGFC enable N/A RWS 0 0 1 DK V-F-S-B
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
It allows to enable APC option cards
(SAVE PARAMETERS command and drive recycle power are required)
APPL CARD CONFIG / DGFC / DGFC sync Ch
APPL CARD CONFIG / DGFC / Drv->DGFCS W src

4100 Drv DGFC-S W0src N/A RWS IPA 4105 List 29 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 4105 Int DrvDGFC-S W0 = Default
It allows to select the origin of Synchronous Word 0 to be transmitted from Drive to APC card
APPL CARD CONFIG / DGFC / Drv->DGFCS W cfg

4105 Int DrvDGFC-S W0 N/A RWS 0.00 - - PV V-F-S-B
Internal Synchronous Word 0 value configuration (default connected to Drv DGFC-S W0src)

APPL CARD CONFIG / DGFC / Drv->DGFCS W mon

4110 Drv DGFC-S W0mon N/A R 0.00 - - PP V-F-S-B
Synchronous Word 0 monitor (from Drive to DGFC)
APPL CARD CONFIG / DGFC / DGFCS->Drv W mon

4120 DGFC-S Drv W0mon N/A R 0.00 - - PV V-F-S-B
Synchronous Word 0 monitor (from DGFC to Drive)
APPL CARD CONFIG / DGFC / DGFC async Ch
APPL CARD CONFIG / DGFC / Drv->DGFCA W src

4130 Drv DGFC-A W0src N/A RWS IPA 4140 List 30 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 4140 Int DrvDGFC-A W0 = Default
It allows to select the origin of Asynchronous Word 0 to be transmitted from Drive to DGFC card

IPA 4145 Int DrvDGFC-A W5 = Default. It allows to select the origin of Asynchronous Word 5 to be
transmitted from Drive to DGFC card (refer to signals List 30 of Pick List manual)
APPL CARD CONFIG / DGFC / Drv->DGFCA W cfg

4140 Int DrvDGFC-A W0 N/A RWS 0.00 - - PV V-F-S-B
Internal Asynchronous Word 0 value configuration (default connected to Drv DGFC-A W0src)

APPL CARD CONFIG / DGFC / Drv->DGFCA W mon
4150 Drv DGFC-A W0mon N/A R 0.00 - - PP V-F-S-B
Asynchronous Word 0 monitor (from Drive to DGFC)
APPL CARD CONFIG / DGFC / DGFCA->Drv W mon

4160 DGFC-A Drv W0mon N/A R 0.00 - - PV V-F-S-B
Asynchronous Word 0 monitor (from DGFC to Drive)

SAVE PARAMETERS

CUSTOM FUNCTIONS
The access to CUSTOM FUNCTIONS menu is allowed by Level 1 password: 12345. It must to be set in the
SERVICE menu.
COMPARE: The Block supplies two signal Comparators, Compare 1 and Compare 2, with the same features.
Each Comparator is in a position to compare two or three input signals (INP0, INP1, INP2).
Some comparisons allow to set via Cmp x window a window, in count, stating an acceptable range among the signals.
Example:
-INP0 and INP1 have to be compared as INP0 = INP1
INP0 = +1000count
INP1 = +1000count
Window = 100count
In this case the equality is true for a maximum overall variation of INP1 between 1100 and 900 counts.
Possible variations:
None none
I0 = = I1 INP0-window INP1 INP0+window
I0 != I1 INP1 lower INP0-window or INP1 higher INP0+window
I0 < I1 INP0 lower INP1
I0 > I1 INP0 higher INP1
I0 < I1 > I2 INP0<INP1<INP2 (INP1 included between..)
|I0| == |I1| INP0| -window |INP1| |INP0| +window
|I0| != |I1| INP1| lower |INP0| -window,or |INP1| higher |INP0| +window
|I0| < |I1| INP0| lower |INP1|
|I0| > |I1| INP0| higher |INP1|
|I0| < |I1| < |I2| INP0| <|INP1| <|INP2| (|INP1|
I0 AND I1 AND I2 AND logic between I0, I1 and I2
I0 OR I1 OR I2 OR logic between I0, I1 and I2
I0 XOR I1 XOR logic between I0 and I1
CUSTOM FUNCTIONS / Compare / Compare 1
CUSTOM FUNCTIONS / Compare / Compare 1 / Compare 1 src

6049 Cmp 1 inp 0 src N/A RWS IPA 6041 List 5 PIN V-F-S-B
IPA 6041 Cmp 1 inp 0 = Default
It allows to select the origin of the input signal 0 to be compared of the Compare 1 block
CUSTOM FUNCTIONS / Compare / Compare 1 / Compare 1 cfg

6041 Cmp 1 inp 0 N/A RWS 0.00 - - PV V-F-S-B
Value of the internal input signal 0, default connected to Cmp 1 inp 0 src

6044 Cmp 1 function N/A RWS 0 0 10 DP V-F-S-B
0 None
1 I0 == I1
2 I0 != I1
3 I0 < I1
4 I0 > I1
5 I0 < I1 < I2
6 |I0| == |I1|
7 |I0| != |I1|
8 |I0| < |I1|
9 |I0| > |I1|
10 |I0|< |I1| <|I2|
11 I0 AND I1 AND I2
12 I0 OR I1 AND I2
13 I0 XOR I1
6045 Cmp 1 window [cnt] RWS 0.00 0.00 - PP V-F-S-B
It allows to set a window stating an acceptable range among the signals of the Compare 1 block
6046 Cmp 1 delay [sec] RWS 0.00 0.00 30 PP V-F-S-B
It allows to set a delay in seconds on the comparison transition in the Compare 1 block
6047 Cmp 1 inversion N/A RWS 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
It allows to invert the Compare 1 block output signal
CUSTOM FUNCTIONS / Compare / Compare 1 / Compare 1 mon

6048 Compare 1 output N/A R 0 0 1 DV V-F-S-B
It allows to monitor the state of Compare 1 block output signal
0 = FALSE
1 = TRUE
CUSTOM FUNCTIONS / Compare / Compare 2
CUSTOM FUNCTIONS / Compare / Compare 2 / Compare 2 src


CUSTOM FUNCTIONS / Compare / Compare 2 / Compare 2 cfg

6059 Cmp 2 function N/A RWS 0 0 10 DP V-F-S-B
0 None
1 I0 == I1
2 I0 != I1
3 I0 < I1
4 I0 > I1
5 I0 < I1 < I2
6 |I0| == |I1|
7 |I0| != |I1|
8 |I0| < |I1|
9 |I0| > |I1|
10 |I0|< |I1| <|I2|
11 I0 AND I1 AND I2
12 I0 OR I1 AND I2
13 I0 XOR I1
6060 Cmp 2 window [cnt] RWS 0.00 0.00 - PP V-F-S-B
It allows to set a window stating an acceptable range among the signals of the Compare 2 block
6061 Cmp 2 delay [sec] RWS 0.00 0.00 30 PP V-F-S-B
It allows to set a delay in seconds on the comparison transition in the Compare 2 block
6062 Cmp 2 inversion N/A RWS 0 0 1 DP V-F-S-B
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
It allows to invert the Compare 2 block output signal
CUSTOM FUNCTIONS / Compare / Compare 2 / Compare 2 mon

6063 Compare 2 output N/A R 0 0 1 DV V-F-S-B
It allows to monitor the state of Compare 2 block output signal
0 = FALSE
1 = TRUE
CUSTOM FUNCTIONS / Pad parameters

The use variables, Pads, are used for the data exchange with the option cards
CUSTOM FUNCTIONS / Pad parameters / Pad param word
9100 Pad 0 N/A RWS 0 - - PV V-F-S-B
Analog Pad 0
Analog Pad 1
Analog Pad 2
Analog Pad 3

Analog Pad 4
Analog Pad 5
Analog Pad 6
Analog Pad 7
Analog Pad 8
Analog Pad 9
9110 Pad 10 N/A RWS 0 - - PV V-F-S-B
Analog Pad 10
9111 Pad 11 N/A RWS 0 - - PV V-F-S-B
Analog Pad 11
9112 Pad 12 N/A RWS 0 - - PV V-F-S-B
Analog Pad 12
9113 Pad 13 N/A RWS 0 - - PV V-F-S-B
Analog Pad 13
9114 Pad 14 N/A RWS 0 - - PV V-F-S-B
Analog Pad 14
9115 Pad 15 N/A RWS 0 - - PV V-F-S-B
Analog Pad 15
CUSTOM FUNCTIONS / Pad parameters / Pad param bit

9116 Dig pad 0 N/A RWS 0 0 1 DV V-F-S-B
Digital Pad 1
Digital Pad 2
Digital Pad 3
Digital Pad 3
Digital Pad 4
Digital Pad 5
Digital Pad 6
Digital Pad 7
Digital Pad 8
Digital Pad 9

Digital Pad 10
Digital Pad 11
Digital Pad 12
Digital Pad 13
Digital Pad 14
Digital Pad 15
CUSTOM FUNCTIONS / Connect

This block function connects signals to programmable block area, using drive parameters that are
accessible through the Conf99 PC program or drive keypad menu.
Connect A, connects up to 7 analog input signals
Connect B, connects up to 7 digital signals inputs
CUSTOM FUNCTIONS / Connect/ Connect A

6070 ConnectA inp 0 src N/A RWS IPA 4000 List 2 PIN V-F-S-B
CUSTOM FUNCTIONS / Connect/ Connect B

6078 ConnectB inp 0 src N/A RWS IPA 4000 List 1 PIN V-F-S-B

SAVE PARAMETERS

SERVICE
SERVICE menu allows the setting of the password to enable Level 1 drive menus: 12345.
To have the access of Level 1 drive menus, edit 12345 password into Insert Password parameter and confirm it
using Enter button.
NOTE! Level 1 password must be edit every recycle drive supply
SERVICE menu allows also the setting of the password to enable Level 2 drive menu: ask Level 2 password to the
technical support.
To have the access of Level 2 drive menus:
1_ edit 12345 password into Insert Password parameter and confirm it using Enter button
2_ check the password through Check password parameter using Enter button

Chapter 10 - Troubleshooting
When the red Alarm LED blinks, it is indicating one (or more) alarm
conditions.
Figure 10.1: Led Status and Keypad
Alarm led is lighted
In case an alarm occurs, this led is lighed
up with an intermittent red colour.
See following steps to view alarm and reset it:

Alarm
Acknowledged
R: S: Alarm list
MONITOR Spd fbk Loss If still active
If not active the enty

is deleted from the list
Alarm list
Sequencer
Sequencer is reset by
using the 0 key
Alarm list
<no alarm>
1) Press Shift + Alarm . The Alarm list will be displayed.
2) Press Enter one or more times untill Sequencer message appears, to

acknowledge the alarms.
NOTE! If the alarm is still active, red LED will blink again. If it not active, red
LED will stop.
3) Press [O] key to reset the Sequencer. The Alarm List shows all the occurred
alarms, both if they are due to protections and to errors when limit values are
exceeded.In order to disappear from the alarm list, alarm have to be
acknowledged. The acknowledgement is possible only if the alarm is no longer
active. The alarms are automatically acknowledged after two minutes.
NOTE! Pressing Enter will acknowledge the alarm. Acknowledging the alarm
206 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

will only remove it from the active alarm list. If the alarm condition also
resulted in a drive trip, the sequence will also need to be reset. This can
be done by pressing the [O] key. The drive cannot be re-enabled or
started after a trip condition unless the drive sequencer is reset.
The drive State Machine, controls the drive running and starting,
accounting for protection & alarming, command sequence, and reset
status.
The table below displays various operation states by Sequencer status
number:
Sequencer status State

1 Magnetization running
2 Magnetization completed, Stop
3 Start
4 Fast stop, Stop
5 Fast stop, Start
9 No alarm, drive is ready to accept all commands
10 Magnetization running and Start command already present
12 Alarm active
16 Alarm not active, waiting for reset
TAV3i020
To read the sequencer status of the State Machine, go to menu:
R: S:
MONITOR
Output voltage
0V
3 times to
MONITOR
Advanced status
DC link voltage
580 V
3 times to
Sequencer status
12
10.1 List of Regulation Alarm Events
Table 10.1.1 provides a description of regulation alarm events and
information on how to configure the intended drive behaviour on their
occurrence (where applicable).
ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Chapter 10 Troubleshooting 207

Table 10.1.1 Regulation Alarm Events
Bit position in
Drive activity
theAlarm list
Alarm name
Restart time
after alarm
Description
Alarm list
Hold off
Code in
Restart
Failure supply Disable drive No No NA 21 1
One or more of the power supply circuits in the control section failed
Undervoltage Disable drive Yes No Yes 22 2
Logic is based on the number of attempts
Voltage on the drive DC link is lower than the minimum threshold for the given Mains voltage setting.
Overvoltage Disable drive No Yes Yes 23 3
Voltage on the drive DC link is higher than the maximum threshold for the given Mains voltage setting
IGBT desat flt Disable drive Yes No Yes 24 4
No more than 2 attempts in 30 seconds
IGBT instantaneous overcurrent was detected by gate desaturation sensing circuit
Inst Overcurrent Disable drive Yes No Yes 25 5
No more than 2 attempts /30sec.
IGBT instantaneous overcurrent was detected by output current sensor
Ground fault Programmable No No Yes 26 6
Output phase discharge to ground
Curr fbk loss Disable drive No No No 27 7
A failure of current sensor feeedback or power supply was detected
External fault Programmable Programmable Yes Programm. 28 8
External fault input is active
Spd fbk loss Programmable No No No 29 9
A failure of the speed feedback sensor or power supply was detected
Module OT Disable drive Constant, 10 msec No No 30 10
IGBT overtemperature was detected by internal sensor (models 0.75 to 20 Hp only)
Heatsink OT Disable drive Constant, 1000 msec No No 31 11
Heatsink overtemperature was detected by thermal contact (only for models 18.5 kW and over)
Motor OT Programmable Programmable Yes Programm. 32 12
Motor overtemperature was detected by thermal contact or PTC thermistor
Heatsink S OT Programmable Programmable Yes Programm. 33 13
Heatsink linear temperature sensor threshold was exceeded
Regulat S OT Programmable Programmable Yes Programm. 34 14
Regulation board linear temperature sensor threshold was exceeded
Intake Air S OT Programmable Programmable Yes Programm. 35 15
Cooling air intake linear temperature sensor threshold was exceeded (only for models 18.5 kW and over)
Cont fbk fail Programmable No Yes No 36 16
It trips when the contact feedback signal is not detected
Comm card fault Programmable No Yes Programm. 37 17
Fault of optional LAN communication board
Appl card fault Disable drive No No No 38 18
Fault of optional application coprocessor board
Drv overload Programmable No No No 39 19
Drive overload accumulator exceeded trip threshold

Bit position in
Drive activity
theAlarm list
Alarm name
Restart time
after alarm
Description
Alarm list
Hold off
Code in
Restart
Mot overload Programmable No No No 40 20
Motor overload accumulator exceeded trip threshold
BU overload Programmable No No No 41 21
Braking resistor overload accumulator exceeded trip threshold
Data lost Disable drive No No No 42 22
Data corrupted in non-volatile memory
Brake fbk fail Programmable No No No 43 23
It trips when the brake feedback signal is not detected
Max time Disable drive No No No 44 24
Software task time overrun was detected
Sequencer Disable drive No No No 45 25
Alarm event caused drive disable
Door fbk fail Disable drive Yes No No 46 26
It trips when the door feedback signal is not detected
Overspeed No Yes No No 47 27
Maximum speed threshold was exceeded while drive in RUN state
UV repetitive Disable drive No No No 48 28
If n. of faults is set to max the Alarm is disabled.
More than a programmable number of UV fault were detected in 5 minutes
IOC repetitive Disable drive No No No 49 29
More than 2 OC faults were detected in 30 sec.
IGBTdesat repet Disable drive No No No 50 30
More than 2 IGBT desat faults were detected in 30 sec.
WatchDog user Disable drive No No No 51 31
The drive failed to retrigger the communication watchdog within the specified time
Hw fail Disable drive No No No 52 32
Communication failure between Drive Regulation board and one of its options or I/O expansions.

10.2 List of Configuration and DataBase Error Alarm Events
Entering bad data or conflicting data into the drive configuration will
cause user errors to be displayed.
These type of errors can be:
- Configuration errors
- Database errors (DB errors)
Refer to the following paragraphs for descriptions.
Drive size setting
NOTE! If the User changes the Drive size, the drive will display: Drv size: new
size - old size. For example: Drive size: 0 - 1
10.2.1 Configuration Errors

Configuration errors can occur by entering incompatible or invalid
parameter data.
The drive reports configuration error by the following example description:
Calc error: Calc error number
Param: Param error number
The Calc error number denotes the cause of invalid calculation. The Calc
error number is composed as follows:
Calc error number = Offset + Error code
The Offset denotes the type of error:

0 for specific errors
100 for errors originated by the database calculation
(see DB error paragraph)
500 for errors due to floating point calculation
(exception, divide by zero etc..)
600 for errors originated by the configuration calculations
(range and so on).
The Error code denotes the origin cause of the error, see values list
below.
Error code values lists
Error code values for Offset 0 :

0 no error
1 signal not managed in current configurator state
2 cannot stop regulation
3 recipe export error
4 recipe import error
5 error while loading selftune data
6 error while loading motor data
7 reserved

8 error while loading customer specific data
9 error while loading drive size data
10 error while writing file size.ini
11 error while apply database. The operation is refused because
errors arised during group calculation.To reset the errors it is
necessary re-enter the data, and confirm correctness
12 error while saving too changes
Error code values for Offset 100: See DB errors, section 10.2.3
Error code values for Offset 500 (500 + error code):
3 Integer overflow
4 Floating overflow
5 Floating underflow
7 Divide by zero
9 Undefined float
10 Conversion error
11 Floating point stack underflow
12 Floating point stack overflow
Error code values for Offset 600 (600 + error code):
0 no error
1 switching freq. error
2 mains voltage error
3 ambient temperature error
4 regulation mode error
5 take selection error
6 base speed error
7 drive size error
For example, Calc error number 606 is a configuration error (600)

caused by speed base value (6) out of range.
The Param error number is not meaningful.
10.2.2 Database Errors (DB Errors)

DB errors are caused by a incorrect setting in a single parameter. This
problem is originated in the database calculation. For example the most
common are:
- DB error Limit HIGH
- DB error Limit LOW
The message DB error is displayed by the drive in this format:
DB ERR IPA: error code
Note ! The IPA denotes the parameter number which caused the DB error
See chapter 12 calculation. The error code denotes the type error.
Parameter index Example of message DB error displayed: DB ERR 3420: 5
This means that the DB error is caused by IPA 3420 (V/f voltage) which
is below the low limit; Error code 5 denotes the type error (for the DB
error code values list see below). To find the low limit, which depends
on drive configuration, it is possible to go to the V/f voltage parameter

on the keypad. Press the Shift key and then the Help key, the following
will be displayed:
Max Value
Min Value
Def(ault) Value
Unit
Raw value
IPA
Description
(Access) mode
In most cases it is enough to set a new value which is within the limits.
DB error code list
0 No error
1 SBI PROBLEM 0x01
2 Generic error
3 Attribute not exist
4 Limit High
5 Limit Low
11 Division by zero
12 Int Overflow
13 Int Underflow
14 Long Overflow
15 Long Underflow
16 Domain Error
17 Indirection Error
18 Reached wrong eof
19 Dbase not configured
20 Value not valid
21 Process doesnt reply
22 Wrong record size
23 Attribute read only
24 SBI PROBLEM 0x18
25 Command not yet implemented
26 Command wrong
27 Read file error
28 Header wrong
29 Reserved for internal use
30 Parameter not exist
31 Parameter read only
32 Parameter z only
48 SBI PROBLEM 0x30

10.2.3 List of Error Codes for All Autotune Procedures
The different autotune procedures for Current regulator, Flux regulator,
Speed regulator or Analog input calibration may generate error messages
that are described in section 10.2.2 .
Table 10.2.3.1: Error Messages from Autotune Procedures
Error text Description

No error
Abort The user entered Escape or O key, or removed enable permissive (term 12 low)
DB access <IPA> An attempt to access the database at the speficied index occurred during autotune procedure
No break point Failure in measuring inverter voltage distortion
Rs high lim Failure in measuring motor stator Resistance
Rs low lim Failure in measuring motor stator Resistance
DTL high lim Failure in computing compensation for the inverter voltage distortion
DTL low lim Failure in computing compensation for the inverter voltage distortion
DTS high lim Failure in computing compensation for the inverter voltage distortion
DTS low lim Failure in computing compensation for the inverter voltage distortion
LsS high lim Failure in calculating motor leakage inductance
LsS low lim Failure in calculating motor leakage inductance
ImNom not found Identification of rated magnetizing current failed
ImNom not found Identification of maximum magnetizing current failed
RrV low lim Voltage limit exceeded during measurement for the calculation of motor rotor resistance
RrV high lim Voltage limit exceeded during measurement for the calculation of motor rotor resistance
Rr high lim Failure in calculating motor rotor resistance
Rr low lim Failure in calculating motor rotor resistance
AI too high Value of analog input is too high for full scale autocalibration
AI too low Value of analog input is too low for full scale autocalibration
Rr2 high lim Failure in calculating motor rotor resistance
Rr2 low lim Failure in calculating motor rotor resistance
Drive disabled Enable permissive (term 12) was found low when attempting to start autotune procedure
Rr timeout Timeout occurred during measurement for the calculation of motor rotor resistance
Rr2 timeout Timeout occurred during measurement for the calculation of motor rotor resistance
LsS timeout Timeout occurred during measurement for the calculation of motor leakage inductance
Drive enabled Drive was found to be already enabled when attempting to initiate autotune procedure
Calc error An error occurred when processing measurement data
Config error<errcode> The specified Configurator error occurred during database configuration based on autotune
data
Cmd not supported Command not supported in the current state

Chapter 11 - EMC Directive
EMC Directive
The possible Validity Fields of the EMC Directive (89/336) applied to PDS CE
marking summarises the presumption of compliance with the Essential Requirements of the
EMC Directive, which is formulated in the EC Declaration of Conformity Clauses numbers [.]
refer to European Commission document Guide to the Application of Directive 89/336/EEC
1997 edition. ISBN 92-828-0762-2
Validity Field Description
Placed on the market as a single commercial unit for distribution and final use.
-1- Free movement based on compliance with the EMC Directive
Finished Product/ Complex - EC Declaration of conformity required - CE marking required
component - PDS or CDM/BDM should comply with IEC 1800-3/EN 61800-3
available to general public The manufacturer of the PDS (or CDM/BDM) is responsible for the EMC behaviour of the PDS (or CDM/
[Clauses: 3.7, 6.2.1, 6.2.3.1 & BDM), under specified conditions. EMC measures outside the item are described in an easy to understand
Relates to PDS or CDM or BDM directly
6.3.1] fashion and could actually be implemented by a layman in the field of EMC.
The EMC responsibility of the assembler of the final product is to follow the manufacturers recommenda-
A PDS (or CDM/BDM) of the tions and guidelines.
Unrestricted Distribution class Note: The manufacturer of the PDS (or CDM/BDM) is not responsible for the resulting behaviour of any
system or installation which includes the PDS, see Validity Fields 3 or 4.
-2-
Finished Product/Complex Not placed on the marked as a single commercial unit for distribution and final use.
component Intended only for professional assemblers who have a level of technical competence to correctly install.
only for professional assemblers - No EC Declaration of conformity - No CE marking
[Clauses: 3.7, 6.2.1, 6.2.3.2 & - PDS or CDM/BDM should comply with IEC 1800-3/EN 61800-3
6.3.2] The manufacturer of the PDS (or CDM/BDM) is responsible for the provision of installation guidelines that
A PDS (or CDM/BDM) will assist the manufacturer of the apparatus, system or installation to achieve compliance.
of the Restricted Distribution class The resulting EMC behaviour is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the apparatus, system, or installa-
sold to be included as part of a tion, for which its own standards may apply.
system or installation
-3-
Installation Not intended to be placed on the market as a single functional unit (no free movement).
Relates to application of PDS or CDM or BDM
[Clause: 6.5] Each system included is subject to the provisions of the EMC Directive.
Several combined items of system, - No EC Declaration of conformity - No CE marking
finished product or other - For the PDSs or CDM/BDMs themselves see Validity Fields 1 or 2
components brought together at a - Responsibility of the manufacturer of the PDS may include commissioning
given place. May include PDSs The resulting EMC behaviour is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the installation in co-operation with
(CDM or BDM), possibly of different the user (e.g. by following an appropriate EMC plan). Essential protection requirements of EMC Directive
classes -Restricted or Unrestricted apply regarding the neighbourhood of the installation.
-4- Has a direct function for the final user. Placed on the market for distribution as a single functional unit, or as
System units intended to be easily connected together.
[Clause: 6.4] - EC Declaration of conformity required - CE marking required for the system
- For the PDSs or CDM/BDMs themselves see Validity Fields 1 or 2
Ready to use finished item(s). May The resulting EMC behaviour, under specified conditions is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the
include PDSs (CDM or BDM), system by using a modular or system approach as appropriate.
possibly of different classes Note: The manufacturer of the system is not responsible for the resulting behaviour of any installation
- Restricted or Unrestricted which includes the PDS, see Validity Field 3.
Examples of application in the different Validity Fields:
1 BDM to be used anywhere: (example in domestic premises, or BDM available from commercial distributors), sold without any knowledge of the
purchaser or the application. The manufacture is responsible that sufficient EMC can be achieved even by any unknown customer or layman (snap-
in, switch-on).
2 CDM/BDM or PDS for general purpose: to be incorporated in a machine or for industrial application This is sold as a subassembly to a professional
assembler who incorporates it in a machine, system or installation. Conditions of use are specified in the manufacturers documentation. Exchange
of technical data allows optimization of the EMC solution.. (See restricted distribution definition).
3 Installation: It can consist of different commercial units (PDS, mechanics, process control etc.). The conditions of incorporation for the PDS (CDM
or BDM) are specified at the time of the order, consequently an exchange of technical data between supplier and client is possible. The combination
of the various items in the installation should be considered in order to ensure EMC. Harmonic compensation is an evident example of this, for both
technical and economical reasons. (E.g. rolling mill, paper machine, crane, etc.)
4 System: Ready to use finished item which includes one or more PDSs (or CDMs/BDMs); e.g. household equipment, air conditioners, standard
machine tools, standard pumping systems, etc.
214 Chapter 11 EMC Directive - Declaration of Conformity ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

Chapter 12 - Parameters Index
IPAs
1220 p.155 2000 p.153 2135 p.180 3223 p.123
100 p.137
1250 p.155 2005 p.153 2136 p.180 3230 p.124
1002 p.129
1260 p.155 2007 p.153 2137 p.180 3240 p.124
1003 p.129
1300 p.132 2013 p.153 2138 p.180 3400 p.152
1004 p.129
1301 p.133 2015 p.153 2380 p.145 3411 p.152
1005 p.129
1350 p.126 2021 p.153 2440 p.154 3412 p.152
1006 p.129
1460 p.124 2023 p.153 2441 p.154 3413 p.152
1007 p.129
150 p.160 2031 p.153 2442 p.154 3420 p.135
1011 p.129
151 p.160 2033 p.153 2445 p.155 3430 p.135
1012 p.130
152 p.160 2039 p.154 2450 p.154 3520 p.152
1015 p.129
153 p.159 2041 p.154 2530 p.144 3530 p.152
103 p.191
154 p.159 2044 p.156 2540 p.145 3531 p.152
104 p.191
1540 p.123 2048 p.134 2550 p.145 3541 p.152
105 p.191
156 p.159 2049 p.135 2560 p.145 3570 p.166
106 p.191
157 p.159 2054 p.147 2580 p.147 3575 p.166
107 p.125
1610 p.135 2063 p.153 2590 p.147 3576 p.166
1085 p.157
1611 p.135 2065 p.153 2610 p.135 3580 p.166
1086 p.157
1612 p.135 2075 p.152 2625 p.147 3585 p.152
1090 p.156
162 p.122 2077 p.152 2745 p.158 3700 p.144, 152
1091 p.156
163 p.122 2100 p.176 2750 p.158 3701 p.144, 152
1092 p.156
164 p.122 2101 p.176 2755 p.158 3702 p.144
1093 p.157
1650 p.135 2102 p.176 2756 p.158 3703 p.144
1094 p.157
1670 p.123 2103 p.176 2760 p.158 3704 p.144
1095 p.157
170 p.126 2104 p.176 2780 p.128 3705 p.144
1096 p.157
1700 p.136 2105 p.176 2790 p.128 3706 p.146
1097 p.157
1710 p.136 2106 p.176 2800 p.128 3707 p.146
1098 p.157
1720 p.136 2107 p.177 2810 p.128 3708 p.146
1099 p.157
1730 p.136 2108 p.177 2820 p.128 3709 p.146
110 p.125
1740 p.136 2109 p.177 2830 p.128 3720 p.144
1101 p.157
1781 p.123 2110 p.177 2840 p.128 3722 p.144
1102 p.157
1810 p.155 2111 p.177 2850 p.128 3723 p.144
1103 p.157
1815 p.155 2112 p.177 2860 p.128 3724 p.145
1104 p.157
1833 p.148 2113 p.177 2870 p.128 3725 p.145
1105 p.157
1834 p.148 2114 p.177 2880 p.129 3726 p.145
1106 p.157
1835 p.148 2115 p.177 2890 p.129 3727 p.145
1107 p.157
1836 p.148 2116 p.177 2900 p.129 380 p.126
111 p.125
1837 p.148 2120 p.179 300 p.124 3900 p.165
1111 p.157
1880 p.126 2121 p.179 3060 p.122 3901 p.168
1112 p.157
1885 p.129 2122 p.179 3070 p.122 3902 p.172
1120 p.156
1890 p.132 2123 p.179 3080 p.122 3903 p.176
1121 p.155
1900 p.133 2124 p.179 3090 p.122 396 p.182
1130 p.156
1902 p.132 2125 p.179 3100 p.123 4002 p.159
114 p.124
1925 p.131 2126 p.180 3110 p.123 4004 p.159
1140 p.156
1926 p.132 2127 p.180 3120 p.123 4006 p.160
1141 p.156
1927 p.132 2128 p.180 3130 p.123 4011 p.169
115 p.125
1931 p.132 2129 p.180 3140 p.123 4012 p.169
1150 p.156
1936 p.134 2130 p.180 3180 p.123 4013 p.169
1170 p.156
1940 p.131 2131 p.180 3190 p.123 4014 p.169
1180 p.156
1952 p.133 2132 p.180 3200 p.122 4015 p.169
1190 p.154
1962 p.133 2133 p.180 3210 p.122 4016 p.169
1210 p.154
1999 p.153 2134 p.180 3222 p.123 4017 p.170
ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Chapter 12 Parameters Index 215

4020 p.170 4082 p.174 4153 p.197 5009 p.161 6012 p.166
4021 p.170 4083 p.174 4154 p.197 5010 p.161 6013 p.166
4022 p.170 4084 p.175 4155 p.197 5011 p.160 6015 p.166
4023 p.170 4085 p.175 4156 p.197 5012 p.160 6016 p.166
4024 p.170 4086 p.175 4157 p.197 5020 p.162 6017 p.166
4025 p.170 4087 p.175 4158 p.197 5021 p.162 6018 p.167
4026 p.170 4090 p.167 4159 p.197 5022 p.162 6020 p.167
4027 p.170 4091 p.167 4160 p.197 5023 p.162 6021 p.167
4028 p.122, 170 4092 p.167 4161 p.197 5024 p.162 6022 p.167
4030 p.170 4093 p.168 4162 p.197 5025 p.162 6023 p.167
4031 p.170 4100 p.194 4163 p.197 5026 p.162 6025 p.167
4032 p.170 4101 p.194 4164 p.197 5027 p.162 6026 p.167
4033 p.170 4102 p.194 4165 p.197 5028 p.162 6027 p.167
4034 p.170 4103 p.194 4166 p.197 5029 p.162 6028 p.167
4035 p.170 4104 p.194 4167 p.197 5030 p.162 6030 p.168
4036 p.170 4105 p.194 4168 p.197 5031 p.161 6031 p.168
4037 p.171 4106 p.194 4169 p.197 5032 p.162 6032 p.168
4038 p.171 4107 p.194 4200 p.187 5040 p.163 6033 p.168
4039 p.171 4108 p.195 4201 p.187 5041 p.163 6034 p.167
4040 p.171 4109 p.195 4202 p.189 5042 p.163 6035 p.168
4041 p.171 4110 p.195 4500 p.165 5043 p.163 6036 p.168
4045 p.171 4111 p.195 4501 p.165 5044 p.163 6037 p.168
4046 p.171 4112 p.195 4502 p.165 5045 p.163 6038 p.168
4047 p.171 4113 p.195 4503 p.165 5046 p.163 6039 p.168
4048 p.171 4114 p.195 4504 p.165 5047 p.163 6041 p.199
4049 p.171 4120 p.195 4505 p.172 5048 p.163 6042 p.200
4050 p.171 4121 p.195 4506 p.172 5049 p.163 6043 p.200
4051 p.171 4122 p.195 4507 p.172 5050 p.163 6044 p.200
4052 p.171 4123 p.195 4508 p.172 5051 p.162 6045 p.200
4053 p.171 4124 p.195 4509 p.172 5052 p.162 6046 p.200
4054 p.171 4129 p.194 4510 p.172 5060 p.163 6047 p.200
4055 p.171 4130 p.195 4511 p.172 5061 p.164 6048 p.200
4056 p.171 4131 p.195 4512 p.172 5062 p.164 6049 p.199
4057 p.122, 171 4132 p.195 4513 p.172 5063 p.164 6050 p.199
4060 p.174 4133 p.195 4514 p.172 5064 p.164 6051 p.199
4061 p.174 4134 p.196 4515 p.172 5065 p.164 6056 p.201
4062 p.174 4135 p.196 4516 p.172 5066 p.164 6057 p.201
4063 p.174 4136 p.196 4517 p.172 5067 p.164 6058 p.201
4064 p.122, 174 4137 p.196 4518 p.172 5068 p.164 6059 p.201
4065 p.173 4138 p.196 4519 p.172 5069 p.163 6060 p.201
4066 p.174 4139 p.196 4520 p.172 5080 p.164 6061 p.201
4067 p.174 4140 p.196 4521 p.172 5081 p.165 6062 p.201
4068 p.174 4141 p.196 4522 p.172 5082 p.164 6063 p.201
4070 p.175 4142 p.196 4523 p.172 5083 p.164 6064 p.200
4071 p.175 4143 p.196 4524 p.172 5084 p.165 6065 p.200
4072 p.175 4144 p.196 5000 p.160 5085 p.164 6066 p.200
4073 p.175 4145 p.196 5001 p.161 5086 p.164 6070 p.203
4074 p.175 4146 p.196 5002 p.161 5087 p.165 6071 p.203
4075 p.175 4147 p.196 5003 p.161 5088 p.165 6072 p.203
4076 p.175 4148 p.196 5004 p.161 5089 p.164 6073 p.203
4077 p.175 4149 p.196 5005 p.161 530 p.153 6074 p.203
4078 p.122, 175 4150 p.197 5006 p.161 540 p.153 6075 p.203
4080 p.174 4151 p.197 5007 p.161 6010 p.166 6076 p.203
4081 p.174 4152 p.197 5008 p.161 6011 p.166 6077 p.203
216 Chapter 12 Parameters Index ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

6078 p.203 7117 p.140 9023 p.193 9105 p.202 9364 p.180
6079 p.203 7118 p.142 9024 p.193 9106 p.202 9365 p.180
6080 p.203 7134 p.138 9025 p.193 9107 p.202 9366 p.180
6081 p.203 7135 p.186 9030 p.193 9108 p.202 9367 p.181
6082 p.204 7136 p.186 9031 p.193 9109 p.202 9368 p.181
6083 p.204 7137 p.187 9032 p.193 9110 p.202 9369 p.181
6084 p.204 7138 p.141 9033 p.193 9111 p.202 9370 p.181
6085 p.204 7141 p.185 9034 p.193 9112 p.202 9371 p.181
670 p.126, 127 7142 p.186 9035 p.193 9113 p.202 9372 p.181
680 p.126 7143 p.141 9040 p.188 9114 p.202 9373 p.181
690 p.126, 127 7144 p.187 9041 p.188 9115 p.202 9374 p.181
700 p.127 7145 p.186 9042 p.188 9116 p.202 9375 p.181
7029 p.149 7147 p.141 9043 p.189 9117 p.202 9376 p.181
7030 p.149 7148 p.141 9044 p.189 9118 p.202 9377 p.181
7031 p.149 720 p.127 9046 p.183 9119 p.202 9378 p.181
7032 p.149 730 p.127 9047 p.183 9120 p.202 9405 p.122
7033 p.149 775 p.127 9049 p.187 9121 p.202 9406 p.122
7034 p.149 8021 p.149 9050 p.182 9122 p.202 9410 p.131
7035 p.149 8022 p.150 9051 p.182 9123 p.202 9411 p.130
7036 p.149 8031 p.149 9052 p.183 9124 p.202 9412 p.130
7037 p.149 8040 p.139 9053 p.183 9125 p.202 9417 p.130
7038 p.149 8041 p.139 9054 p.184 9126 p.203 9419 p.130
7039 p.149 8042 p.139 9055 p.184 9127 p.203 9420 p.130
7040 p.150 8043 p.139 9056 p.184 9128 p.203 9421 p.140
7041 p.150 8044 p.139 9057 p.185 9129 p.203 9431 p.146
7045 p.150 8046 p.139 9058 p.185 9130 p.203 9432 p.146
7046 p.151 8047 p.139 9059 p.185 9131 p.203 9434 p.147
7050 p.150 8050 p.139 9060 p.183 9204 p.123 9435 p.147
7051 p.150 8051 p.139 9061 p.184 9210 p.159 9438 p.147
7053 p.150 8052 p.140 9062 p.184 9211 p.159 9439 p.147
7060 p.138 8053 p.140 9063 p.183 9220 p.188 9550 p.133
7061 p.138 8054 p.140 9064 p.183 9221 p.188 9551 p.133
7062 p.138 8056 p.139 9065 p.184 930 p.127 9553 p.123
7063 p.138 8057 p.140 9066 p.184 9340 p.177 9554 p.123
7064 p.138 8078 p.141 9067 p.184 9341 p.177 9557 p.133
7065 p.138 8090 p.141 9068 p.186 9342 p.178 9600 p.184
7066 p.138 810 p.125 9071 p.188 9343 p.178 9603 p.184
7067 p.138 8998 p.192 9072 p.123 9344 p.178 9604 p.184
7069 p.141 8999 p.192 9073 p.123 9345 p.178 9605 p.185
7070 p.141 9000 p.193 9074 p.187 9346 p.178 9606 p.185
7072 p.140 9001 p.193 9075 p.183 9347 p.178 9608 p.188
7073 p.141 9002 p.193 9076 p.182 9348 p.178 9610 p.189
7074 p.141 9003 p.193 9086 p.186 9349 p.178 9611 p.189
710 p.127 9004 p.193 9087 p.185 9350 p.178 9612 p.189
7100 p.140 9005 p.193 9088 p.185 9351 p.178 9614 p.189
7101 p.140 9010 p.192 9089 p.185 9352 p.178 9615 p.189
7102 p.140 9011 p.192 9090 p.123 9353 p.178 9616 p.189
7103 p.140 9012 p.192 9095 p.123 9354 p.179 9630 p.189
7104 p.140 9013 p.192 9099 p.187 9355 p.179 9631 p.189
7105 p.140 9014 p.192 9100 p.201 9356 p.179 9632 p.189
7106 p.140 9015 p.192 9101 p.201 9360 p.180 9634 p.189
7110 p.138 9020 p.192 9102 p.201 9361 p.180 9635 p.190
7115 p.140 9021 p.192 9103 p.201 9362 p.180 9636 p.190
7116 p.140 9022 p.193 9104 p.202 9363 p.180 9640 p.183

9641 p.183 An inp 1 offset p.161 An inp 3 offset p.163 B
970 p.127 An inp 1 output p.161 An inp 3 output p.163
98 p.125 An inp 1 scale p.161 An inp 3 scale p.163 B0 W0 decomp p.179
980 p.127 An inp 1 src p.160 An inp 3 src p.162 B0 W1 decomp p.180
99 p.125 An inp 1 thr p.161 An inp 3 thr p.163 B1 W0 decomp p.179
990 p.127 An inp 1 type p.160 An inp 3 type p.163 B1 W1 decomp p.180
An inp 1X < thr p.164 An out 1 cfg p.166 B10 W0 decomp p.180
A An inp 1X cfg p.163 An out 1 hi lim p.166 B10 W1 decomp p.181
An inp 1X dst p.165 An out 1 lo lim p.166 B11 W0 decomp p.180
Abort ? p.137 B11 W1 decomp p.181
An inp 1X gain p.164 An out 1 mon p.166
ACF activity p.187 B12 W0 decomp p.180
An inp 1X hi lim p.164 An out 1 scale p.166
Actual setup p.125 B12 W1 decomp p.181
An inp 1X lo lim p.164 An out 1 sgn src p.166
Advanced Status p.123 B13 W0 decomp p.180
An inp 1X mon p.164 An out 1 src p.166
AI 1 alt sel src p.160 B13 W1 decomp p.181
An inp 1X offset p.164 An out 1X cfg p.167
AI 1 alt value p.161 B14 W0 decomp p.180
An inp 1X output p.164 An out 1X hi lim p.167
AI 1 gain tune p.161 B14 W1 decomp p.181
An inp 1X scale p.164 An out 1X lo lim p.167
AI 1 offs tune p.161 B15 W0 decomp p.180
An inp 1X src p.163 An out 1X mon p.167
AI 1 sgn src p.160 B15 W1 decomp p.181
An inp 1X thr p.164 An out 1X scale p.167
AI 1X gain tune p.164 B2 W0 decomp p.179
An inp 1X type p.163 An out 1X src p.167
AI 1X offs tune p.164 B2 W1 decomp p.180
An inp 2 < thr p.162 An out 2 cfg p.166
AI 1X sgn src p.163 B3 W0 decomp p.180
An inp 2 cfg p.162 An out 2 hi lim p.166
An inp 2 dst p.165 An out 2 lo lim p.166
An inp 2 filter p.162 An out 2 mon p.167
An inp 2 gain p.162 An out 2 scale p.166
An inp 2 hi lim p.162 An out 2 sgn src p.166
An inp 2 lo lim p.162 An out 2 src p.166
AI 2X gain tune p.164 B6 W0 decomp p.180
An inp 2 mon p.162 An out 2X cfg p.167
AI 2X offs tune p.164 B6 W1 decomp p.181
An inp 2 offset p.162 An out 2X hi lim p.167
AI 2X sgn src p.164 B7 W0 decomp p.180
An inp 2 output p.162 An out 2X lo lim p.167
An inp 2 scale p.162 An out 2X mon p.167
An inp 2 src p.161 An out 2X scale p.167
An inp 2 thr p.162 An out 2X src p.167
An inp 2 type p.162 An out 3X cfg p.167
An inp 2X < thr p.165 An out 3X hi lim p.168
ALARM CONFIG p.182 Bandwidth p.135
An inp 2X cfg p.164 An out 3X lo lim p.168
Alarm log p.125 Base values p.152, 153,
An inp 2X dst p.165 An out 3X mon p.168
Alarm log clear? p.125 154
An inp 2X gain p.165 An out 3X scale p.168
Alarm status p.189 Bits->Word p.176
An inp 2X hi lim p.164 An out 3X src p.167
Alm status cfg p.189 Bits->Word / Bits-
An inp 2X lo lim p.164 An out 3X type p.167
Alm status mon p.189 >Word0 mon
An inp 2X mon p.165 An out 4X cfg p.168
Alm W1 S1 p.189 p.177
An inp 2X offset p.165 An out 4X hi lim p.168
Alm W1 S2 p.189 Bits->Word / Bits-
An inp 2X output p.165 An out 4X lo lim p.168
Alm W2 S1 p.189 >Word0 src p.176
An inp 2X scale p.164 An out 4X mon p.168
Alm W2 S2 p.190 Bits->Word / Bits-
An inp 2X src p.164 An out 4X scale p.168
Alm W3 S1 p.189 >Word1 mon
An inp 2X thr p.164 An out 4X src p.168
Alm W3 S2 p.190 p.179
An inp 2X type p.164 An out 4x type p.168
Ambient temp p.126 Brake close dly p.140
An inp 3 < thr p.163 Analog inputs p.160
An inp 1 < thr p.161 Brake feedback p.186
An inp 3 cfg p.163 Analog outputs p.165
An inp 1 cfg p.160 Brake open delay p.140
An inp 3 dst p.165 Antioscill gain p.152
An inp 1 dst p.165 Brake open src p.142
An inp 3 filter p.163 APPL CARD CONFIG
An inp 1 filter p.161 BRK activity p.186
An inp 3 gain p.163 p.194
An inp 1 gain p.161 BRK feedback src p.186
An inp 3 hi lim p.163 Appl card fault p.187
An inp 1 hi lim p.161 BRK hold off p.186
An inp 3 lo lim p.163 Autotune p.128
An inp 1 low lim p.161 BRK RUN hold off p.186
An inp 3 mon p.163 Available Outvlt p.156
An inp 1 mon p.161

BU control p.136 Compare 2 mon p.201 DGFC enable p.194 DI 0 Enable mon p.170
BU OL accum % p.123 Compare 2 output p.201 DGFC sync Ch p.194, DI 0X dst p.172
BU overload p.188 Compare 2 src p.200 195, 196, 197 DI 1 dst p.172
BU protection p.136 Complete rot p.128 DGFC-A Drv W0mon DI 1 inversion p.169
BU res cont pwr p.136 Complete still p.128 p.197 DI 1 monitor p.170
BU res OL factor p.136 Connect p.203 DGFC-A Drv W1mon DI 10X dst p.172
BU res OL time p.136 Connect A p.203 p.197 DI 10X inversion p.171
BU resistance p.136 Connect B p.203 DGFC-A Drv W2mon DI 10X monitor p.171
BUOL activity p.188 ConnectA inp 0 src p.203 p.197 DI 11X dst p.172
ConnectA inp 1 src p.203 DGFC-A Drv W3mon DI 11X inversion p.171
C ConnectA inp 2 src p.203 p.197 DI 11X monitor p.171
ConnectA inp 3 src p.203 DGFC-A Drv W4mon DI 1X dst p.172
Cabin weight p.129
ConnectA inp 4 src p.203 p.197 DI 2 dst p.172
Calc Inertia p.135
ConnectA inp 5 src p.203 DGFC-A Drv W5mon DI 2 inversion p.169
Calc method p.134
ConnectA inp 6 src p.203 p.197 DI 2 monitor p.170
CCF activity p.187
ConnectA inp 7 src p.203 DGFC-A Drv W6mon DI 2X dst p.172
CCF restart p.187
ConnectB inp 0 src p.203 p.197 DI 3 dst p.172
CCF restart time p.187
ConnectB inp 1 src p.203 DGFC-A Drv W7mon DI 3 inversion p.169
Cmp 1 delay p.200
ConnectB inp 2 src p.203 p.197 DI 3 monitor p.170
Cmp 1 function p.200
ConnectB inp 3 src p.203 DGFC-A Drv W8mon DI 3X dst p.172
Cmp 1 inp 0 p.199
ConnectB inp 4 src p.204 p.197 DI 4 dst p.172
Cmp 1 inp 0 src p.199
ConnectB inp 5 src p.204 DGFC-A Drv W9mon DI 4 inversion p.169
Cmp 1 inp 1 p.200
ConnectB inp 6 src p.204 p.197 DI 4 monitor p.170
ConnectB inp 7 src p.204 DGFC-S Drv W0mon DI 4X dst p.172
Cmp 1 inp 2 p.200
Cont close delay p.140 p.195 DI 5 dst p.172
Cont open delay p.140 DGFC-S Drv W1mon DI 5 inversion p.169
Cmp 1 inversion p.200
Contact feedback p.185 p.195 DI 5 monitor p.170
Cmp 1 window p.200
Cosfi p.127 DGFC-S Drv W2mon DI 5X dst p.172
Cmp 2 delay p.201
Counter weight p.129 p.195 DI 6 dst p.172
Cmp 2 function p.201
CPU1 runtime p.124 DGFC-S Drv W3mon DI 6 inversion p.169
Cmp 2 inp 0 p.201
CPU2 runtime p.124 p.195 DI 6 monitor p.170
Curr regulato p.153 DGFC-S Drv W4mon DI 6X dst p.172
Cmp 2 inp 1 p.201
CurrI base value p.153 p.195 DI 7 dst p.172
CurrI gain % p.153 DI 0X inversion p.170 DI 7 inversion p.170
Cmp 2 inp 2 p.201
CurrP base value p.153 DI 0X monitor p.171 DI 7 monitor p.170
CurrP gain % p.153 DI 1X inversion p.170 DI 7654321E p.122, 170
Cmp 2 inversion p.201
CurrReg p.128 DI 1X monitor p.171 DI 7X dst p.172
Cmp 2 window p.201
CUSTOM FUNCTIONS DI 2X inversion p.170 DI 8X dst p.172
CNT activity p.186
p.199 DI 2X monitor p.171 DI 9X dst p.172
CNT feedback src p.185
DI 3X inversion p.170 Dig Enable src p.159
CNT hold off p.186 D DI 3X monitor p.171 Dig pad 0 p.202
Comm card fault p.187
DI 4X inversion p.170 Dig pad 1 p.202
Commands p.159 DC braking p.148
DI 4X monitor p.171 Dig pad 10 p.203
Commands cfg p.159 DC link voltage p.123
Commands mon p.160 DCbrake cmd src p.121,
Commands select p.159 148
Commands src p.159 DCbrake current p.148
COMMUNICATION p.191 DCbrake delay p.148
Compare 1 p.199 DCbrake duration p.148
Compare 1 cfg p.199 DCBrake state p.148
Compare 1 mon p.200 Dead time limit p.153
Compare 1 output p.200 Dead time slope p.153
Compare 1 src p.199 Destinations p.172
Compare 2 p.200 DGFC async Ch p.195
DI 0 Enable dst p.172 Dig pad 7 p.202
Compare 2 cfg p.201 DGFC config p.194

Dig pad 8 p.202 Drv DGFC-A W1src p.195 Drv->SBI W mon p.193 FlxP base value p.153
Dig pad 9 p.202 Drv DGFC-A W2mon Drv->SBI W src p.192 FlxP gain % p.153
Dig StrStp src p.159 p.197 Drv->SBI word p.192 Frequency p.122
Digital inputs p.169 Drv DGFC-A W2src p.195 DS restart p.183 Full scale speed p.129
Digital outputs p.173 Drv DGFC-A W3mon DS restart time p.183
DIX BA9876543210 p.197 Dyn vlt margin p.156 G
p.122, 171 Drv DGFC-A W3src p.195
DO p.174 Drv DGFC-A W4mon E Gain monitor p.157
Gain transitions p.157
DO 0 inversion p.174 p.197
EF activity p.183 Gearbox inertia p.130
DO 0 src p.173 Drv DGFC-A W4src p.196
EF hold off p.184 Gearbox ratio p.129
DO 0X inversion p.175 Drv DGFC-A W5mon
EF restart p.184 Gen Hi ref p.158
DO 0X src p.174 p.197
EF restart time p.184 Gen Low ref p.158
DO 1 inversion p.174 Drv DGFC-A W5src p.196
EF src p.183 Gen output p.158
DO 1 src p.174 Drv DGFC-A W6mon
Efficiency p.127 Gen Period p.158
DO 1X inversion p.175 p.197
EMF constant p.127 GF activity p.183
DO 1X src p.174 Drv DGFC-A W6src p.196
En/Disable mode p.159 GF threshold p.183
DO 2 inversion p.174 Drv DGFC-A W7mon
Enable cmd mon p.160 Ground fault p.183
DO 2 src p.174 p.197
Enable SM mon p.122
DO 2X inversion p.175 Drv DGFC-A W7src p.196 H
Encoders config p.131
DO 2X src p.174 Drv DGFC-A W8mon
Enter setup mode p.126
DO 3 inversion p.174 p.197 Heatsink S OT p.184
Exp ana inp en p.165
DO 3 src p.174 Drv DGFC-A W8src p.196 HT sensor temp p.123
Exp ana out en p.168
DO 3210 p.122 Drv DGFC-A W9mon HTS activity p.184
Exp dig inp cfg p.170
DO 3X inversion p.175 p.197 HTS hold off p.184
Exp dig inp en p.172
DO 3X src p.174 Drv DGFC-A W9src p.196 HTS restart p.184
Exp dig inp mon p.171
DO 4X inversion p.175 Drv DGFC-S W0mon HTS restart time p.184
Exp dig out cfg p.175
DO 4X src p.175 p.195 Hw fault p.189
Exp dig out en p.176
DO 5X inversion p.175 Drv DGFC-S W0src p.194 Hw fault mon p.189
Exp dig out mon p.175
DO 5X src p.175 Drv DGFC-S W1mon
Exp dig out src p.174 I
DO 6X inversion p.175 p.195
Exp enc cnt dir p.133
DO 6X src p.175 Drv DGFC-S W1src p.194
Exp enc position p.123 I/O CONFIG p.159
DO 7X inversion p.175 Drv DGFC-S W2mon
Exp enc pulses p.133 I/O status p.122
DO 7X src p.175 p.195
Exp enc type p.132 IA sensor temp p.123
DOL activity p.188 Drv DGFC-S W2src p.194
External fault p.183 IAS activity p.185
Door activity p.187 Drv DGFC-S W3mon
Door fbk src p.187 p.195 IAS hold off p.185
F IAS restart p.185
Door feedback p.187 Drv DGFC-S W3src p.194
Door hold off p.187 Drv DGFC-S W4mon IAS restart time p.185
FastStop cmd mon p.160
Door open speed p.141 p.195 IGBT desaturat p.183
FastStop SM mon p.122
Door open src p.141 Drv DGFC-S W4src p.194 Import recipe p.137
FastStop src p.159
DOX 76543210 p.122, Drv OL accum % p.123 In use values p.153
Fault rese p.182
175 Drv SBI W0 mon p.193 Index storing p.133
Fault reset src p.182
Drive cont curr p.124 Drv SBI W0 src p.192 Index storing en p.133
Flux p.123
Drive data p.126 Drv SBI W1 mon p.193 Inertia comp p.147
Flux config p.155
Drive ID Status p.124 Drv SBI W1 src p.192 Inertia comp en p.147
Flux level src p.155
Drive name p.125 Drv SBI W2 mon p.193 Inertia comp flt p.147
Flux max lim cfg p.156
Drive overload p.188 Drv SBI W2 src p.192 Inertia comp mon p.147
Flux max lim mon p.156
Drive size p.124 Drv SBI W3 mon p.193 Inst overcurrent p.183
Flux max lim src p.155
Drive type p.124 Drv SBI W3 src p.192 Int Drv SBI W0 p.192
Flux ref p.123
Drv DGFC-A W0mon Drv SBI W4 mon p.193 Int Drv SBI W1 p.192
Flux regulator p.153
p.197 Drv SBI W4 src p.192 Int Drv SBI W2 p.193
FluxReg rot p.128
Drv DGFC-A W0src p.195 Drv SBI W5 mon p.193 Int Drv SBI W3 p.193
FluxReg still p.128
Drv DGFC-A W1mon Drv SBI W5 src p.192 Int Drv SBI W4 p.193
FlxI base value p.153
p.197 Drv->SBI W cfg p.192 Int Drv SBI W5 p.193
FlxI gain % p.153

Int DrvDGFC-A W0 p.196 M MR0 end decel p.139 Pad 4 p.202
Int DrvDGFC-A W1 p.196 MR1 acc end jerk p.139 Pad 5 p.202
Int DrvDGFC-A W2 p.196 Magn curr lim p.156 MR1 acc ini jerk p.139 Pad 6 p.202
Int DrvDGFC-A W3 p.196 Magn curr ref p.123 MR1 acceleration p.139 Pad 7 p.202
Int DrvDGFC-A W4 p.196 Magn ramp time p.155 MR1 dec end jerk p.140 Pad 8 p.202
Int DrvDGFC-A W5 p.196 Magnetiz config p.155 MR1 dec ini jerk p.140 Pad 9 p.202
Int DrvDGFC-A W6 p.196 Magnetizing curr p.123 MR1 deceleration p.140 Pad param bit p.202
Int DrvDGFC-A W7 p.196 Mains voltage p.126 MR1 end decel p.140 Pad param word p.201
Int DrvDGFC-A W8 p.196 Mask W1 S1 p.189 Multi speed 0 p.138 Pad parameters p.201
Int DrvDGFC-A W9 p.196 Mask W1 S2 p.189 Multi speed 1 p.138 Percent values p.152, 153
Int DrvDGFC-S W0 p.194 Mask W2 S1 p.189 Multi speed 2 p.138 Pole pairs p.127
Int DrvDGFC-S W1 p.194 Mask W2 S2 p.189 Multi speed 3 p.138 Pos P gain p.130
Int DrvDGFC-S W2 p.194 Mask W3 S1 p.189 Multi speed 4 p.138 Pos speed limit p.131
Int DrvDGFC-S W3 p.195 Mask W3 S2 p.189 Multi speed 5 p.138 Pre-torque p.146
Int DrvDGFC-S W4 p.195 Max linear speed p.138 Multi speed 6 p.138 Pre-torque gain p.147
Int flx maxlim p.156 Measured DTL p.128 Multi speed 7 p.138 Pre-torque src p.147
Int Inertia p.147 Measured DTS p.128, 129 Pre-torque time p.146
Int IS ctrl p.133 Measured LsSigma p.128, N Pre-torque type p.147
Int Outvlt lim p.156 129 Pre-trq sign src p.147
Measured Rs p.128 Norm Exp enc spd p.123
Int Pre-torque p.146 Prop filter p.145
Mechanical data p.129 Norm Speed p.122
Int ramp ref 1 p.149 Protocol type p.191
Mlt ramp s0 src p.141 Norm Std enc spd p.123
Int ramp ref 2 p.149 Pulley diameter p.129
Int ramp ref 3 p.149 Mlt ramp sel mon p.141
Mlt spd out mon p.141
O R
Int speed ref 1 p.150
Int speed ref 2 p.150 Mlt spd s 0 src p.140 Observer filter p.157
Mlt spd s 1 src p.141 Ramp function p.149
Int torque ref 2 p.154 Observer ref mon p.157
Mlt spd s 2 src p.141 Ramp out enable p.149
Intake air S OT p.185 OS activity p.188
Mlt spd sel mon p.141 Ramp out mon p.150
Inuse flx maxlim p.156 OS hold off p.188
Modbus regs mode p.191 Ramp profile p.138
Inuse Outvlt ref p.156 OS threshold p.188
MOL activity p.188 Ramp ref p.122
Inuse S I gain p.157 Out vlt ref cfg p.156
MONITOR p.122 Ramp ref 1 mon p.149
Inuse S P gain p.157 Out vlt ref mon p.156
MOT activity p.184 Ramp ref 1 src p.149
InUse SpdI gain% p.153 Out vlt ref src p.156
MOT hold off p.184 Ramp ref 2 mon p.149
InUse SpdP gain% p.153 Output current p.122
Mot OL accum p.135 Ramp ref 2 src p.149
Inuse Tcurr lim+ p.155 Output power p.122
Mot OL accum % p.123 Ramp ref 3 mon p.149
Inuse Tcurr lim- p.155 Output vlt ref p.156
Mot OL trip p.135 Ramp ref 3 src p.149
IOC restart p.183 Output voltage p.122
MOT restart p.184 Ramp ref cfg p.149
IOC restart time p.183 Outvlt lim src p.156
MOT restart time p.184 Ramp ref inv src p.149
IS ctrl src p.133 OV restart p.183
Motor data p.126, 127 Ramp ref mon p.149
OV restart time p.183
L Motor inertia p.129 Overspeed p.188
Ramp ref src p.149
Motor OL control p.135 Ramp setpoint p.149
Overvoltage p.183
Landing control p.130 Motor OL factor p.135 Ramp shape p.149
Landing distance p.130 Motor OL time p.135 P Rated current p.126, 127
Landing init src p.130 Motor OT p.184 Rated frequency p.126
Landing ratio p.130 Motor overload p.188 Pad 0 p.201 Rated power p.127
Landing zone p.130 Motor pp/sens pp p.134 Pad 1 p.201 Rated speed p.127
Last SBI error p.192 Motor protection p.135 Pad 10 p.202 Rated voltage p.126, 127
Life time p.125 Motoring gains p.156 Pad 11 p.202 Regen gains p.157
Lift sequence p.140 MR0 acc end jerk p.139 Pad 12 p.202 Regulation mode p.137
Load default ? p.137 MR0 acc ini jerk p.139 Pad 13 p.202 REGULATION PARAM
Load setup p.129 MR0 acceleration p.139 Pad 14 p.202 p.152
Load weight p.129 MR0 dec end jerk p.139 Pad 15 p.202 Regulation S OT p.185
Lock flux pos p.155 MR0 dec ini jerk p.139 Pad 2 p.201 Rep/Sim enc sel p.133
LS inductance p.127 MR0 deceleration p.139 Pad 3 p.201 Rep/Sim encoder p.133

Results p.128 Software type p.125 Std sin enc mod p.123 VltP base value p.154
RG sensor temp p.123 Software version V . Std sin enc Vp p.132 VltP gain % p.153
RGS activity p.185 p.125 Switching freq p.126 Voltage boost p.152
RGS hold off p.185 Spd 0 dis dly p.160 Sys time-ddmmyy p.125
RGS restart p.185 Spd 0 enable p.144 W
RGS restart time p.185 Spd 0 I gain % p.144 T
W0 comp out p.177
Rope weight p.129 Spd 0 P gain % p.144
T setpoint cfg p.154 W0 decomp inp p.179
RS485 p.191 Spd 0 ref delay p.145
T setpoint mon p.154 W0 decomp mon p.179
Spd 0 ref thr p.145
S Spd 0 spd delay p.145
T setpoint src p.154 W0 decomp src p.179
Tcurr lim + p.154 W1 comp out p.179
Spd 0 speed thr p.145
S mot HPgain p.156, 157 Tcurr lim - p.155 W1 decomp inp p.180
Spd fbk loss p.188
Save config ? p.137 Tcurr lim sel p.154 W1 decomp mon p.180
Spd ref/fbk res p.126
SAVE PARAMETERS Tcurr lim state p.155 W1 decomp src p.180
Spd regulator p.152
p.151, 158, 181, Term Start src p.159 Weights p.129
SpdI base value p.152
193, 198, 204 Term Stop src p.159 Word->Bits p.179
SpdI1 gain % p.144, 152
SBI config p.192 Term StrStp src p.159 Word0 B0 src p.176
SpdI2 gain % p.144
SBI Drv W0 mon p.193 Test gen cfg p.158 Word0 B1 src p.176
SpdI3 gain % p.144
SBI Drv W1 mon p.193 Test gen mode p.158 Word0 B10 src p.177
SpdP base value p.152
SBI Drv W2 mon p.193 Test gen mon p.158 Word0 B11 src p.177
SpdP1 gain % p.144, 152
SBI Drv W3 mon p.193 Test generator p.157 Word0 B12 src p.177
SpdP2 gain % p.144
SBI Drv W4 mon p.193 Torque config p.154 Word0 B13 src p.177
SpdP3 gain % p.144
SBI Drv W5 mon p.193 Torque constant p.127 Word0 B14 src p.177
SpdReg gain calc p.134
SBI enable p.192 Torque curr p.123 Word0 B15 src p.177
Speed fbk sel p.131
SBI monitor p.192 Torque curr ref p.123 Word0 B2 src p.176
Speed profile p.138
SBI->Drv W mon p.193 Torque ref p.122, 154 Word0 B3 src p.176
Speed ref p.122
SBI->Drv word p.193 Torque ref 2 mon p.154 Word0 B4 src p.176
Speed ref 1 mon p.150
Seq start mode p.140 Torque ref 2 src p.154 Word0 B5 src p.176
Speed ref 1 src p.150
Seq start sel p.140 TRAVEL p.138 Word0 B6 src p.176
Speed ref 2 mon p.151
Sequencer status p.123 Travel units sel p.129 Word0 B7 src p.177
Speed ref 2 src p.150
SERVICE p.205 Trq curr lim cfg p.154 Word0 B8 src p.177
Speed ref cfg p.150
Service factor p.135 Trq curr lim mon p.155 Word0 B9 src p.177
Speed ref mon p.150
Sfbk der base p.145 Trq curr lim src p.154 Word0->Bits cfg p.179
Speed reg gains p.142
Sfbk der enable p.144 Word0->Bits mon p.179
Speed setpoint p.150 U
Sfbk der filter p.145 Word0->Bits src p.179
Speed threshold p.145
Sfbk der gain p.145 Word1 B0 src p.177
Speedref inv src p.150 Undervoltage p.182
SFL activity p.188 Word1 B1 src p.177
Start alt src p.140 UV repetitive p.189
SGP tran21 band p.146 Word1 B10 src p.178
Start cmd mon p.160 UV restart p.182
SGP tran21 h thr p.146 Word1 B11 src p.178
Start fwd src p.140 UV restart time p.182
SGP tran32 band p.146 Word1 B12 src p.178
Start rev src p.140 UV select src p.182
SGP tran32 l thr p.146 Word1 B13 src p.178
Start SM mon p.122 UVR attempts p.189
Short floor spd1 p.141 Word1 B14 src p.179
STARTUP p.126 UVR delay p.189
Short floor spd2 p.141 Word1 B15 src p.179
Stator resistance p.127
Slave address p.191 V Word1 B2 src p.178
Std dig enc mode p.132
Slave res time p.191 Word1 B3 src p.178
Std dig inp cfg p.169
Slip comp p.152 V ILim I gain p.152 Word1 B4 src p.178
Std dig inp mon p.170
Slip comp filter p.152 V ILim P gain p.152 Word1 B5 src p.178
Std dig out cfg p.174
Slip comp mode p.152 V reg param p.152 Word1 B6 src p.178
Std dig out mon p.174
Slip I gain p.152 V/f config p.135 Word1 B7 src p.178
Std dig out src p.173
Slip P gain p.152 V/f frequency p.135 Word1 B8 src p.178
Std enc cnt dir p.132
SlowDown dist p.140 V/f voltage p.135 Word1 B9 src p.178
Std enc position p.123
Sls SpdFbk gains p.156 Vlt regulator p.153 Word1->Bits cfg p.180
Std enc pulses p.132
Smooth start spd p.138 VltI base value p.154 Word1->Bits mon p.180
Std enc supply p.132
Smooth str time p.140 VltI gain % p.153 Word1->Bits src p.180
Std enc type p.131
Software status p.125

Gefran worldwide
GEFRAN SENSORI GEFRAN SUISSE GEFRAN SIEI - UK SIEI DRIVES TECHNOLOGY
via Cave, 11 Rue Fritz Courvoisier, 40 7 Pearson Road, Central Park No.1265, B1, Hong De Road,
25050 PROVAGLIO DISEO (BS) 2302 LA CHAUX-DE-FONDS TELFORD, TF2 9TX Jia Ding District
ITALY Ph. +41 (0) 329684955 Ph. +44 (0) 8452 604555 201821 Shanghai
Ph. +39 030 9291411 Fax +41 (0) 329683574 Fax +44 (0) 8452 604556 Ph. +86 21 69169898
Fax. +39 030 9823201 [email protected] [email protected] Fax +86 21 69169333
[email protected] [email protected] [email protected]
GEFRAN SIEI - FRANCE
GEFRAN BENELUX 4, rue Jean Desparmet - BP GEFRAN SIEI - ASIA SIEI AMERICA - USA
Lammerdries, 14A 8237 No.160 Paya Lebar Road 14201 D South Lakes Drive
B-2250 OLEN 69355 LYON Cedex 08 05-07 Orion Industrial Building NC 28273 - Charlotte
Ph. +32 (0) 14248181 Ph. +33 (0) 478770300 409022 Singapore Ph. +1 704 3290200
Fax. +32 (0) 14248180 Fax +33 (0) 478770320 Ph. +65 6 8418300 Fax +1 704 3290217
[email protected] [email protected] Fax +65 6 7428300 [email protected]
[email protected] [email protected]
GEFRAN BRASIL
ELETROELETRNICA GEFRAN ISI GEFRAN SIEI Electric Pte Ltd
Avenida Dr. Altino Arantes, 8 Lowell Avenue Block B, Gr.Flr, No.155,
377/379 Vila Clementino WINCHESTER - MA 01890 Fu Te Xi Yi Road,
04042-032 SO PAULO - SP Toll Free 1-888-888-4474 Wai Gao Qiao Trade Zone
Ph. +55 (0) 1155851133 Ph. +1 (781) 7295249 200131 Shanghai
Fax +55 (0) 1155851425 Fax +1 (781) 7291468 Ph. +86 21 5866 7816
[email protected] [email protected] Ph. +86 21 5866 1555
Ph. +86 21 5866 7688
GEFRAN DEUTSCHLAND SIEI AREG - GERMANY [email protected]
Philipp-Reis-Strae 9a Zachersweg, 17
63500 SELIGENSTADT D 74376 - Gemmrigheim
Ph. +49 (0) 61828090 Ph. +49 7143 9730
Fax +49 (0) 6182809222 Fax +49 7143 97397
[email protected] [email protected]
Manuale AVy_L AC/BR 3.5 -EN
GEFRAN S.p.A. Motion Control

0.4 - 8.11.2006
1S9H16
Via Sebina 74 Via Carducci 24

25050 Provaglio dIseo (BS) 21040 Gerenzano [VA] Technical Assistance :
ITALY ITALY [email protected]
Ph. +39 030 98881 Ph. +39 02 967601
Customer Service :
Fax +39 030 9839063 Fax +39 02 9682653 [email protected]
[email protected] [email protected] Ph. +39 02 96760500
www.gefran.com www.gefransiei.com Fax +39 02 96760278

AVy Lift Eng - 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AVy Lift Eng - 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AVy Lift Eng - 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ARTDriveL

Lift Vector AC Drives

...... Instruction Manual

This manual is updated according to software version 3.6XX and RV33-4NV

ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Table of Contents 3

4 Table of Contents ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Table of Contents 5

Safety Symbol Legend - Precautions de securit

Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that, if not strictly

Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that, if not strictly

Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that should be be

NOTE! Indicates an essential or important procedure, condition, or statement.

6 Chapter 0 Safety Precautions ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

According to the EEC standards the ARTDriveL and accessories must

Electrical Shock and Burn Hazard:

Fire and Explosion Hazard:

ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Chapter 0 Safety Precautions 7

Drives and motors must be ground connected according to the NEC.

Replace all covers before applying power to the Drive. Failure to do

Adjustable frequency drives are electrical apparatus for use in indus-

8 Chapter 0 Safety Precautions ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

If the front plate has to be removed because of ambient temperature

Power supply and grounding / Attention ! Alimentation puissance et

ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Chapter 0 Safety Precautions 9

The grounding connector shall be sized in accordance with the NEC

Do not perform a megger test between the Drive terminals or on the

10 Chapter 0 Safety Precautions ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

If the Drives Fault Alarm is activated, consult the TROUBLESHOOT-

Be sure to remove the desicant dryer packet(s) when unpacking the

Do not touch or damage any components when handling the device.

Protect the device from impermissible environmental conditions (tem-

No voltage should be connected to the output of the drive (terminals U2, V2

ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Chapter 0 Safety Precautions 11

A capacitative load (e.g. Var compensation capacitors) should not be

The electrical commissioning should only be carried out by qualified

No dielectric tests should be carried out on parts of the drive. A suit-

12 Chapter 0 Safety Precautions ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Chapter 1 Functions and General Features 13

Simple operation of the drive can be via

14 Chapter 1 Functions and General Features ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

The electrical and mechanical data of standard three-phase motors refers

Is it possible to use standard induction motors?

Which properties of the asynchronous motors have an unfavorable

Star or delta connection?

Operation above the rated speed

What motor data is required for connecting the frequency inverter?

Asynchronous induction motor

ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Chapter 1 Functions and General Features 15

Temperature-dependent contacts in the motor winding

Current limitation of the frequency inverter

16 Chapter 1 Functions and General Features ARTDriveL Instruction Manual

2.1 Upon Delivery Inspection Procedures

Upon delivery, check the following:

In the event of any damage or of an incomplete or incorrect delivery please

NOTE! A certain degree of moisture condensation is permissible if this arises

2.1.2 Inverter type designation

ARTDrive, AC flux vector drive, 3 phase input voltage

Figure 2.1.3.1: Identification nameplate

Type : AVy 3150 -KBL AC4 S/N 02006233